JP7361364B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine including a performance control means for controlling performance based on a result of determining whether or not to execute a special game.

For example, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, when a game ball enters the starting slot, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and after the symbols are displayed in a variable manner, a symbol indicating the result of the above determination is displayed. Stop display. Some gaming machines of this type display a customer waiting menu screen when a set time has elapsed after entering the customer waiting state, and the player can adjust the volume by performing a predetermined operation while the customer waiting menu screen is displayed. There is a gaming machine that displays a setting screen, a premium performance occurrence rate setting screen, or a light amount setting screen (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Patent No. 6152190

By the way, the screens displayed on conventional gaming machines do not prompt the player to decide whether or not to return the settings related to presentation to the initial settings, and there is still room for improvement regarding the configuration for returning settings related to presentation to the initial settings. there were.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately return settings related to presentation to initial settings.

The gaming machine of the first invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is as follows:
an input means that allows input by a player;
a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
A performance control means for controlling a performance based on the determination result of the determination means,
The performance control means is
A first setting regarding the performance can be changed in response to a first input to the input means, and a second setting regarding the performance can be changed in response to a second input to the input means,
The condition is that a first period of time has elapsed without any input being made to the input means after transitioning from a performance progress state in which a performance progresses based on the determination result of the determination means to a performance non-progress state in which the performance does not proceed. a first control for displaying an input prompting screen related to the second setting, and returning the second setting to the initial setting in response to a third input to the input means while the input prompting screen is being displayed;
After the first time has elapsed since the transition to the production non-progress state and the display of the input promotion screen is started, input to the input means is performed while the input promotion screen is displayed. the first setting without displaying an input prompting screen related to the first setting when a second time period that is longer than the first time period has elapsed since the transition to the production non-progress state; A second control for returning to the initial settings can be executed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to appropriately return settings related to presentation to initial settings.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a back view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a front view showing the configuration of a game board according to an embodiment of the present invention. 4 is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3, and is a diagram showing displays included in the gaming machine. FIG. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the gaming machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between the type of winning and the opening pattern of the big prize opening. It is a table showing various random numbers obtained by the game control microcomputer. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a jackpot type determination table, (C) is a reach determination table, (D) is a normal symbol hit determination table, and (E) is a regular symbol variation table. This is a pattern selection table. It is a table showing a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of main control main processing. It is a flowchart of interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of starting port sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of starting pitch entry. It is a flowchart of normal figure movement processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol standby processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol propriety determination processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol fluctuation processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of normal electric accessories processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 standby processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 propriety judgment processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 fluctuation processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 2 standby processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 propriety judgment processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 2 fluctuation processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 2 confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 1 (jackpot game). It is a flowchart of jackpot game start processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state setting processing. It is a flowchart of special figure operation status setting processing 1. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 2 (small winning game). It is a flowchart of special figure operation status setting process 2. It is a flowchart of pending ball number processing. It is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing. It is a flowchart of sub-control main processing. 3 is a flowchart of reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 2ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart of a fluctuating production start process. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a second embodiment. FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining various settings of production. FIG. 7 is a screen diagram illustrating various screens displayed on a third display screen 72a. It is a screen diagram showing a specific example of a customization number notification image and a customization content notification image displayed on the third display screen 72a. It is a screen diagram illustrating a reset selection screen during non-gaming displayed on the first display screen 7a. It is a time chart illustrating a permission period for volume/light intensity adjustment, production customization, and reset selection during non-gaming. It is a flowchart illustrating a prize waiting command reception process executed in the sub control board 90. 3 is a flowchart (Part 1) illustrating an operation corresponding process executed on the sub-control board 90; 3 is a flowchart (Part 2) illustrating an operation corresponding process executed on the sub-control board 90; It is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of performance executed in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol in the low probability low base state. It is a screen diagram which illustrates the screen structure of the 1st display screen 7a in a low probability low base state. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining various performance modes in a low-accuracy, low-base state. It is a list illustrating the characteristics of each normal production mode. It is a screen diagram (part 1) illustrating the effect in the fourth normal mode. It is a screen diagram (part 2) illustrating the effect in the fourth normal mode. FIG. 3 is a screen diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of the effect in the first normal mode. It is a screen diagram (part 2) illustrating the effect in the first normal mode. It is a screen diagram illustrating the effect in the second normal mode. FIG. 11 is a screen diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of the performance in the third normal mode. It is a screen diagram (part 2) illustrating the effect in the third normal mode. It is a screen diagram (part 3) illustrating the effect in the third normal mode.

Next, embodiments of the present invention will be described using examples. In addition, in the following, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the fluctuating display of the symbol, the pachinko gaming machine is capable of executing a winning game that can award a predetermined amount of gaming profits (for example, prize balls) to the player. , an example to which the present invention is applied will be explained.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2 attached within the game machine frame 50. It is configured to be detachable from the frame 50. FIG. 3 shows the game board 2 removed from the game machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main frame 52 for mounting the gaming board 2, etc., and an outer frame 53 for mounting the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the island equipment of the hall. ing. The outer frame 53 is fixed to the island equipment, and the front frame 51 and main body frame 52 are attached to the outer frame via upper and lower frame hinges 56, 56. Further, the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are pivotally supported at one end in the vertical direction (on the left side of the paper in FIG. 1), and can be opened and closed, respectively, relative to the outer frame 53 with the one end as an axis. It is configured. Further, from the closed state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, only the front frame 51 can be opened (opened), or both the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 can be opened (opened).

In addition, the front frame 51 includes a firing handle 60 for firing the game ball with a firing intensity corresponding to the amount of operation (rotation angle) of the player, and a firing handle 60 that can store game balls and supply the stored game balls to the firing device side. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and a surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the batted ball supply tray 61 are provided. The front frame 51 also includes a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b (these two effect buttons are collectively called (also simply referred to as a "performance button 63") is provided. The plurality of performance buttons can be selectively used depending on the type of game performance. Note that the configuration of the production button 63 is not limited to the aspect of the first embodiment, and may be any type that can detect an input from a player, or an input detection means (for example, , a retractable type, a touch sensor type, etc.), or a non-contact type input detection means (photoelectric type, etc.) that detects the proximity of a part of the player's body and performs an input. good.

Further, the front frame 51 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and an image display device (a second image display device 71, a third image display device 72). Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are arranged in front of the front frame 51 (on the player side) so that the display screens 71a and 72a can be easily viewed by the player. It is installed so as to protrude toward the outside and to be inclined outward. In addition, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, like the image display device 7 described later, depending on the execution/non-execution of a game, the game situation, the game effect to be executed, etc. Game productions (characters, production patterns, etc.), demo productions, and game-related information (ball information obtained, number of rounds, number of consecutive wins, remaining period of game status, game mode, reliability and explanation of game productions, etc.) , information regarding the settings of the gaming machine (volume setting information, brightness setting information, etc.) is displayed. Further, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may display different information among these pieces of information, or may display the same information. In addition, when the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display different information among these pieces of information, there are cases where the same information is displayed. There are cases where it is done. Also, any two of the image display device 7 (first image display device), second image display device 71, and third image display device 72 display the same information, and the remaining one displays different information. may also be displayed. Note that any or all of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 may be simply referred to as an "image display device."

Further, the image display device 7 is provided in the inner region of the game area 3 formed on the game board 2, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided in the outer region of the game area 3. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 (provided at the non-open end) is attached to the front frame 51 via a second image display device hinge 75 (hinge portion). It is being Therefore, it is rotatable in the left-right direction about the upper and lower second image display device hinges 75 as an axis. More specifically, it is configured to be able to rotate by a predetermined angle (approximately 45 degrees) in the right direction from the state shown in FIG. 1 (normal state). This is because when the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are opened with the upper and lower frame hinges 56, 56 as axes, the second image display device 71, which is provided to protrude in front of the front frame 51, This configuration is to prevent damage caused by collision with the hall equipment (ball rental machines, inter-machine equipment, etc.) provided adjacent to the frame hinge 56 side of the gaming machine 1 (on the left side of the paper in FIG. 1). . On the other hand, the third image display device 72 (provided at the open end) is fixedly provided to the front frame 51 and cannot be rotated.

The game board 2 has a game area 3 surrounded by a rail member 4, into which game balls shot by operating a shooting handle 60 flow down. The game board 2 is also provided with a board lamp 5 for decoration. A plurality of game nails 16 for guiding game balls are provided in the game area 3 in a protruding manner. Further, a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, making it possible to prevent the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the firing device side.

Further, near the center of the gaming area 3, an image display device 7 made of a liquid crystal display device is provided. Note that the image display device 7 is attached to the game board 2 from the back side of the game board 2. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a performance pattern display area 7b (also referred to as a "performance pattern display area") in which performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (also simply referred to as "performance patterns") are displayed side by side in the left and right direction. ), and the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are set according to the game state (low-accuracy low base state, high-accuracy low base state, low-accuracy high base state, high-accuracy high base state). A variable display is performed in synchronization with a variable display of a special symbol (a first special symbol or a second special symbol described later) that is set as the main character of the game. In addition, the production pattern 8L is also referred to as the "left symbol," the production symbol 8C is also referred to as the "middle symbol," and the production symbol 8R is also referred to as the "right symbol."

The display mode of the performance symbol display area 7b shown in FIG. 3 shows one scene when the gaming state is in the normal state (low probability low base state, state A to be described later). As will be described in detail later, in this low-accuracy low base state, the frequency of game balls entering the starting port (second starting port 21) is set lower than in the high base state (first gaming state). In addition, the probability of determining whether the special symbol is correct (the first special symbol is correct or not) is low (also referred to as a "predetermined probability"), and the variation time of the second special symbol is the same as the first special symbol. is set longer (more than twice) than the fluctuation time of (all out-of-range fluctuations are 10 minutes). Therefore, in the normal state, a game ball is fired into the right game area 3B (second game area) and entered into the starting port (second starting port 21 or third starting port 26) to display the second special symbol in a variable manner. It is more advantageous for the player to play a game in which a game ball is fired into the left game area 3A (first game area) and enters the first starting port 20, and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. has been done. That is, the normal state can be said to be a gaming state in which the first special symbol (performance symbol) is mainly displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, in the normal state (state A), the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the performance symbol display area 7b are designed to perform variable display and stop display in synchronization with the first special symbol.

In addition, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R each consist of a plurality of symbols (identification information) representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. Depending on the display mode (stop display mode) of the left, middle, and right performance symbols that are stopped and displayed (derived display) in the performance symbol display area 7b, the first special symbol display 41a ("first The results of the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as the "second special symbol display section") and the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as the "second special symbol display section") The results of symbol variation display (results of special symbol propriety determination) are displayed (notified) so that the player can easily recognize them. Incidentally, any (or all) of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the production symbol may be simply referred to as "design" or "identification information." Further, the special symbol validity determination is also simply referred to as "validity determination" or "first validity determination." Further, the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the special symbol validity determination is also referred to as "validity determination execution means" or "first validity determination execution means."

For example, if the result of the special symbol validity judgment is a jackpot (first specific hit), the production symbol will be stopped at a symbol with the same three digits (double number) such as "777" (also referred to as a "jackpot symbol"). indicate. In addition, in the case of a small hit (second specific win), a preset chance symbol such as "135" or a special small-hit symbol such as "3★3" (also referred to as a "small hit symbol") will be used. Stop displaying the symbol. In addition, when a small hit occurs, instead of stopping and displaying the small winning symbol, the small winning symbol and the losing symbol may be stopped and displayed in the same manner. In addition, when there are multiple small wins (first small win, second small win, etc.), different small win patterns (first small win pattern, second small win pattern, etc.) can be used to distinguish them. ) may be stopped and displayed, or the same (common) small winning symbols may be stopped and displayed so that it is difficult to distinguish between them.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol validity judgment is a failure, the performance symbol will be stopped and displayed with a variation pattern in which at least one of the three symbols such as "637" and "373" is different ("The failure symbol ). Thereby, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game (results of the special symbol validity determination) by looking at the performance symbols that are stopped and displayed. In other words, the player generally does not directly understand the result of the special symbol validity determination by looking at the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, but rather The user sees and understands the effect pattern 8 displayed in the pattern display area 7b. In addition, the execution mode of the variable display of the performance symbols includes, for example, a mode in which scrolling is displayed in up and down, left and right, diagonal directions, etc., a mode in which the performance is displayed using only the first performance symbol display section 7b, and a mode in which the performance is displayed using only the first performance symbol display section 7b. 7b, it has a mode in which effects are displayed using one or both of the second effect pattern display section 71a and the third effect pattern display section 72a. Additionally, in addition to this, it may have an aspect in which the effect is displayed using only the second effect symbol display section 71a or the third effect symbol display section 72a.

In addition, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying a game performance using the above-mentioned performance symbols (performance symbol game performance), a game performance that is executed along with a winning game (a jackpot game, a small winning game) is displayed. A winning game performance (a jackpot game performance, a small winning game performance), a demonstration performance for waiting for customers, etc. are displayed. In addition, in the performance symbol game performance, winning game performance, and demonstration performance, in addition to performance symbols such as numbers, performance images other than performance symbols such as background images and character images are also displayed. In addition, although the details will be described later, there is also a gaming state (state A, state B, or state C), a state in which a game is played by firing a game ball into the left gaming area 3A, or a state in which a game is played by firing a gaming ball into the right gaming area 3B. The display mode on the performance symbol display area 7b is different depending on whether the game is being played or the like. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a gaming machine that can variably display both the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel (at the same time), and is suitable for this type of game. The machine is also called a "simultaneous variable machine (parallel variable machine)".

In addition, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a first performance reservation display area 9c (first performance reservation display section) that displays a first performance reservation 9a according to the number of stored first special symbol reservations, which will be described later. There is a second performance hold display area 9d (second performance hold display section) that displays a second performance hold 9b according to the number of second special figure hold memories, which will be described later. Depending on the display mode (display number) of the first performance hold 9a or the second performance hold 9b in the performance hold display area, the first special figure hold is displayed on the first special figure hold display 43a (see FIG. 4), which will be described later. It is possible to clearly show to the player the stored number of stored special symbols and the stored number of second special symbols pending displayed on the second special symbol pending display 43b. Note that the display position of the first performance pending display section and the display position of the second performance pending display section may change depending on the gaming state, the gaming mode, or the game performance to be executed (such as a reach performance). In addition, only one of the first performance pending display section and the second performance pending display section (for example, only the performance pending display section corresponding to the main special symbol (performance symbol) depending on the gaming state) is displayed. You can also do this.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7, a center decoration 10 is provided so as to surround the performance symbol display area 7b. A stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which game balls can roll is provided at the lower part of the center decoration body 10. Further, a hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left side of the center decoration body 10. The warp section 12 is provided with a warp entrance and a warp exit, and receives a game ball flowing down the game area 3 from the warp entrance, discharges the game ball from the warp exit, and guides it to the stage section 11. The game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage part 11 can enter the first starting port 20, which will be described later, with a higher possibility than the game ball not guided to the stage part 11. Further, on the upper part of the center decorative body 10, a decorative member 13 having an illumination member (board lamp 5) such as an LED, which can be turned on depending on the game state, and which is shaped like letters, figures, etc., is arranged. There is.

Further, at the upper part of the center decoration body 10 and behind the decoration member 13, there is provided a movable decoration member 14 that can be operated in accordance with the game performance. In FIG. 3, only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible, but for example, when a game performance with a relatively high probability of winning is executed, the movable decorative member 14 falls downward (a predetermined The movable decorative member 14 covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of the movable decorative member 14 is visible. This increases the player's interest in the game and increases his or her expectations for winning.

Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, a fixed winning device 19 is provided which includes a non-variable first starting port 20 that does not change the ease with which game balls enter the game ball. Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a random number for determining the validity of the special symbol, etc. is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is established, the determination of the validity of the first special symbol ( As the first special symbol validity determination (first validity determination) is executed, the first special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the validity determination.

Above the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decoration 10 in the game area 3, there is a gate 28 (regular figure starting opening, passing opening, ball entrance opening, specific starting opening) through which game balls can pass (balls can enter). (also called a mouth) is provided. A game ball that enters from the upstream side of the gate 28 passes through the gate 28 and flows down the gaming area 3 in the downstream direction. Note that this gate 28 also serves as a start gate 29 (also referred to as a winning gate or an operation gate) for starting a jackpot game. In other words, this gate is both the gate 28 and the start gate 29. When a game ball enters (passes through) the gate 28, the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a, a random number etc. for determining the validity of the normal symbol is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (variable condition) is met, the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. At the same time as the symbol validity determination (also referred to as "normal symbol validity determination" or "third validity determination"), the normal symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the normal symbol is displayed based on the result of the normal symbol validity determination. Stop display. When the winning normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the movable member 23 operates (opening operation) and the second starting port 21 becomes open. In addition, the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the normal symbol validity determination of whether or not to operate the movable member 23 (opening operation) to open the second starting port 21 is referred to as the “validity determination execution means”. It is also referred to as "third validity determination execution means." Note that this gate sensor 28a also serves as a start gate sensor 29a for starting the jackpot game. That is, the sensor that detects the entry of a ball into the main gate is the gate sensor 28a and also the start gate sensor 29a.

Further, although the details will be described later, when passing through the gate 28 (starting gate 29), the function as the starting gate 29 is demonstrated only when the conditions for executing the jackpot game are satisfied ("jackpot" (also referred to as "executable state" or "jackpot waiting state"). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 (starting gate 29) when the condition (big hit standby state) is not satisfied, control processing regarding the normal symbols is performed and jackpot starting processing is not executed. In addition, if the game ball passes through the start gate 29 (gate 28) when the condition is met (in the jackpot waiting state), the waiting jackpot game starts and the predetermined jackpot prize opening ( A round game in which the first big prize opening 30) is opened (ball entry possible state) starts.

In the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3, in the game area below (downstream) of the gate 28 (starting gate 29), a first prize opening 30 is provided. A grand prize winning device 31 (also referred to as a "first variable ball entrance") is provided. The first big winning device 31 includes an opening/closing member 32, and opens and closes the first big winning opening 30 by operating the opening/closing member 32. The opening/closing member 32 has a generally rectangular (elongated plate) upper surface as a game ball passage, and in the closed state, the entrance of the first big prize opening 30 is closed and the game ball passes through the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32. It is possible to pass. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32 is formed in an inclined shape from the upstream side to the downstream side (from left to right in the paper). As a result, when the opening/closing member 32 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flown down to the entrance of the first big winning opening 30 passes through the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32 without entering the first big winning opening 30. and flows downstream of the gaming area.

In addition, the opening/closing member 32 is driven by the first big prize opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5), and the opening/closing member 32 is retracted toward the back side of the game board 3, so that the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32 forming the game ball passage disappears. Thereby, when the opening/closing member 32 is in the open state, the game ball that has flown down to the entrance part of the first big winning opening 30 will enter the first big winning opening 30. In this way, the opening/closing member 32 that opens and closes the entrance of the first big prize opening 30 is a retractable opening/closing member, and when it is in the open state (opened), it smoothly moves the game balls flowing down to the first big prize. In addition to letting the ball enter the prize opening 30, when it is in the closed state (closed), the game ball flowing down can be guided in an arbitrary direction (second starting opening 21 to be described later) by the inclined upper surface passage. It becomes possible. Incidentally, a game ball can enter the first big prize opening 30 only when the opening/closing member 32 is in the open state. That is, the first big winning device 31 (first variable ball entry opening) is configured to switch between a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which a game ball cannot enter and an entry state in which a game ball can enter, by the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 32. It is possible to change to a ballable state (open state).

In the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) of the first big prize opening 30, there is a non-stick ball that does not change the ease of entry of game balls. A second fixed winning device 25 having a variable third starting port 26 is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the third starting port 26, a random number etc. for special symbol validity determination is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is established, the validity determination regarding the second special symbol ( As the second special symbol validity determination (second validity determination) is executed, the second special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the validity determination. In addition, the game ball passage is branched below (downstream) from the first big prize opening 30 (upper stage, lower stage), and the upper game ball passage where the third starting opening 26 is provided, and the second starting opening 31 and the second starting opening 31 A lower game ball passageway in which two major prize openings 35 are provided is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the game ball guided to the upper game ball passage enters the third starting port 26 by contacting the game nail 16 provided near the third starting port 26, etc. Otherwise, the ball flows downstream without entering the third starting port 26 and flows into the out port 34. In addition, the third starting port 26 is a fixed winning device (ball entry port) that allows balls to enter at any time, so if you hit the jackpot in a left-handed game (so-called first hit), you can play the first jackpot game with a right-handed ball. When executed in a game, the game ball is allowed to enter the third starting port 26 during the jackpot game (holding), and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed immediately after the jackpot game ends.

In the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) of the first big prize opening 30, there is a variable variable that changes the ease with which the game ball enters. A variable prize winning device 22 (also referred to as a "variable starting port" or "variable starting port") is provided with a second starting port 21 of the formula. Based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, a random number for determining the validity of the special symbol, etc. is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is established, the determination of the validity of the first special symbol (the first 1 special symbol validity determination) is executed, the first special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the validity determination.

The variable prize winning device 22 includes a movable member 23 (also referred to as an "opening/closing member"), and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by operating the movable member 23. Through this opening/closing operation, the second starting port 21 can change from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (open state) in which there is a higher possibility of a game ball entering than the first mode. be. In the first embodiment, a game ball can enter the second starting port 21 only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and a game ball cannot enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. There is. In addition, if the second starting port 21 is such that it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the ball when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when it is in the open state, the second starting port 21 is completely closed when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It does not have to be something that makes it impossible to enter the ball.

In addition, like the opening/closing member 32, the movable member 23 has a generally rectangular (elongated plate-like) game ball passage on its upper surface, and in the closed state closes the entrance of the second starting port 21 and closes the entrance of the second starting port 21. A game ball can pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the movable member 23 is formed in an inclined shape from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left in the paper). As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flown down to the entrance of the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 without entering the second starting port 21. Flows downstream of the gaming area.

Furthermore, the movable member 23 is driven by the second starting port solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5), and the movable member 23 is retracted toward the back surface of the game board 3 (in a direction perpendicular to the game board surface), thereby forming a game ball passage. The movable member 23 disappears from the entrance portion of the second starting port 21. Thereby, when the movable member 23 is in the open state, the game ball that has flown down to the entrance portion of the second starting port 21 enters the second starting port 21. In this way, the movable member 23 that opens and closes the entrance of the second starting port 21 is a retractable opening/closing member similar to the opening/closing member 32, and when it is in the open state (opened), it can prevent the game balls flowing down. The ball enters the second starting port 21 smoothly, and when the ball is in the closed state (closed), the game ball flowing down is moved in any direction (second prize winning port 35 to be described later) by the inclined upper surface passage. lead to.

In this way, in a state where a game is played by firing a game ball into the right side area (right game area 3B), if the game ball enters the second starting port 21, the first special symbol validity determination is executed. The first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and when the game ball enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol validity determination is executed and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, in a state where a game is played by firing a game ball into the right side area (right game area 3B) (right-handed game), a game state where the game is mainly played mainly by the fluctuating display of the first special symbol (state B: low accuracy high A base state, a high-accuracy, high-base state), and a gaming state (state C: a high-accuracy, low-base state) in which the game is mainly played based on the fluctuating display of the second special symbol.

In addition, in the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3, and in the game area below (downstream) of the second starting opening 21, there is a second winning opening 35 provided with a second big winning opening 35. A grand prize winning device 36 (also referred to as a "second variable ball entrance") is provided. The second big prize winning device 36 includes an opening/closing member 37, and the second big winning opening 35 is opened and closed by the operation of the opening/closing member 37. Like the opening/closing member 32, the opening/closing member 37 has a generally rectangular (elongated plate-like) game ball passage on its upper surface, and in the closed state closes the entrance of the second grand prize opening 35 and closes the opening/closing member 37. A game ball can pass through the upper surface of the member 37. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening/closing member 37 is formed in an inclined shape from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left in the paper). As a result, when the opening/closing member 37 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flown down to the entrance of the second big winning opening 35 passes through the upper surface of the opening/closing member 37 without entering the second big winning opening 35. and flows downstream of the gaming area.

Further, the opening/closing member 37 is driven by the second grand prize opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5), and the opening/closing member 37 is retracted toward the back of the game board 3 (in a direction perpendicular to the game board surface), thereby forming a game ball passage. The opening/closing member 37 that was previously used is no longer present at the entrance of the second big prize opening 35. As a result, when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state, the game ball that has flown down to the entrance portion of the second big winning opening 35 enters the second big winning opening 35. In this way, the opening/closing member 37 that opens and closes the entrance of the second big prize opening 35 is a retractable opening/closing member similar to the opening/closing member 32, and when it is in the open state (opened), the game ball flowing down can be opened and closed. Smoothly enters the ball into the second grand prize opening 35, and when in the closed state (closed), the game ball flowing down is guided in an arbitrary direction (out port 34) by the inclined upper surface passage. becomes possible. Incidentally, a game ball can enter the second big prize opening 35 only when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state. In other words, the second big winning device 36 (second variable ball entry opening) operates between an entry impossible state (closed state) in which a game ball cannot enter and an entry state in which a game ball can enter, by the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 37. It is possible to change to a ballable state (open state).

Further, a plurality (three) of general ball entry holes 27 are provided in the gaming area below the left side area (left gaming area 3A) of the center decoration body 10 in the gaming area 3. The gaming area 3 where various ball entrances etc. are arranged in this way is divided into a left gaming area (first gaming area) 3A on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction, and a right gaming area (second gaming area) 3B on the right side. , can be divided into A batting style in which the game ball is launched so that it flows down the left gaming area 3A is called left-handed hitting, and a batting style in which the gaming ball is launched in such a way that it flows down in the right gaming area 3B is called right-handed batting. . In this pachinko game machine 1, in the normal state (low probability low base state, state A) at the start of the game, the player aims to hit the ball to the left into the first starting opening 20. That is, the normal state at the start of the game is a left-handed game in which the ball enters the first starting port 20 by left-handed batting (first special symbol validity determination).

On the other hand, if a jackpot is achieved in the judgment based on the ball entering the first starting hole 20 (first special symbol judgment), the jackpot game and after the end of the jackpot game (special game) (low probability high base state, high probability High base state or high-accuracy low base state) is when you hit the right hand and enter the gate 28, the first big winning hole 30, the second starting hole 21, the third starting hole 26, or the second big winning hole 35. It is a game where you aim at the ball. Specifically, when a jackpot is achieved in a left-handed game, the player first enters a jackpot standby state and becomes a right-handed game where the player aims to hit the ball into the gate 28. Next, when the ball enters the gate 28 (starting gate 29) in the jackpot standby state, the jackpot game starts, and becomes a right-handed game mainly aiming at the ball entering the first jackpot prize opening 30.

In addition, when the jackpot game ends and the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes a low probability high base state or a high probability high base state (state B), the main gate 28 (general gate) and the second starting port 21 It is a right-handed game where you aim to hit the ball. On the other hand, when the jackpot game ends and the game state after the jackpot game becomes a high-accuracy/low-base state (state C), it becomes a right-handed game aiming at hitting the ball into the third starting hole 26 and the second big winning hole 35. Become. In other words, the low-accuracy, high-base state and the high-accuracy, high-base state (condition B) are right-handed games in which the ball enters the second starting port 21 (first special symbol correctness determination) by right-handed batting, and is a high-accuracy, high-accuracy game. The low base state (state C) is a right-handed game in which the ball enters the third starting port 26 by hitting the ball to the right (second special symbol validity determination). As a result, even in the same right-handed game, the main starting opening (object of special symbol validity determination) differs depending on the game state (state B or state C).

In addition, in the right gaming area 3B (second gaming area), a second out port 34b is provided upstream of the gate 28, and a second outlet 34b is provided to prevent game balls flowing into the gaming area downstream from the gate 28 of the right gaming area 3B. The amount can be adjusted (decreased). That is, the second out port 34b is installed upstream of all the ball entry ports installed in the right game area 3B, and the game nail provided near the second out port 34b allows the ball entry ports to be connected to each other. It is possible to adjust the rate of entry of game balls into the installation area (intrusion rate). Further, in the right gaming area 3B (second gaming area), a third out opening 34c is located downstream of the second starting opening 21 and upstream of the second big winning opening 35 which is the big winning opening for small winnings. has been established. This third out port 34c controls the rate of entry of game balls into the gaming area on the second big prize opening 35 side when a small hit occurs, that is, the rate of balls entering the second big prize opening 35 during a small winning game. It is adjustable. A game nail provided in the vicinity of the third out port 34c allows adjustment of the rate of entry of game balls into the second big prize opening 35 (intrusion rate).

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, second starting hole 21, first big winning hole 30, second big winning hole 35, and general ball entering hole 27, the respective ball entering holes A predetermined number of game balls (also referred to as "prize balls" or "gaming profits") are paid out (awarded). In this embodiment, the number of prize balls (amount of gaming profit) paid out based on balls entering the first big winning hole 30 is calculated from the number of prize balls paid out based on balls entering the second big winning hole 35. It is set higher than the number of pieces (amount of gaming profit). Specifically, the first grand prize opening 30 pays out 15 prize balls for each ball that enters, and the second grand prize hole 35 pays out 10 prize balls for each ball that enters. The prize ball shall be paid out.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is arranged at the lower right portion of the game board 2. The main display 40 includes a first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display section) that displays a first special symbol in a variable manner and stops, and a second special symbol display that displays a second special symbol in a variable manner and stops. It includes a device 41b (second special symbol display section) and a normal symbol display device 42 (normal symbol display section) that displays normal symbols (also referred to as "specific identification information") in a variable and static manner. In addition, the main display 40 includes a first special symbol reservation display 43a that displays the stored number of validity determination information (first special symbol reservation) related to the first special symbol, and a first special symbol reservation display 43a that displays the number of memory determination information (first special symbol reservation) regarding the first special symbol; It includes a second special pattern holding display 43b that displays the number of memorized numbers of 2 special pattern holdings), and a normal pattern holding display 44 that displays the number of memory holdings of operation holding (normal pattern holding) of the normal pattern display 42. ing.

In addition, the main display 40 includes a hit indicator 48 that indicates that the result of the first special symbol validity determination or the second special symbol validity determination is a hit, and the first special symbol validity determination or the second special symbol validity determination. When the result is a hit, a round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the winning game to be executed, a game status indicator 46 indicating that the probability variation function is activated, and a direction in which the game ball is launched, that is, to the right. A firing direction indicator 47 is included that indicates whether the ball should be hit to the left or to the left. The main display 40 also includes a fluctuation state display 49 that shows a fluctuation state of the first special symbol (c1), a fluctuation state of the second special symbol (c2), and a fluctuation state of the normal symbol (c3). There is. The various displays included in the main display 40 are display-controlled by a main control section, which will be described later.

The variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the third starting port 26. In addition, in the following explanation, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. Further, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b may be collectively referred to as the special symbol display section 41. Further, the first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b may be collectively referred to as the special figure holding display section 43.

In the special symbol display section 41, the special symbol (identification information) is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time and then stopped, and the first starting port 20 and the second starting port are displayed by the special symbol (stop pattern) that is stopped (derived display). 21 or the result of the validity judgment (special symbol validity judgment, jackpot lottery) based on the ball entering the third starting port 26. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of special symbols based on the special symbol appropriateness determination. If the stopping symbol is a predetermined specific special symbol (specific identification information) (that is, if it is a jackpot symbol or a small winning symbol), the first symbol is released in an opening pattern according to the type of the specific special symbol that is stopped and displayed. A special game (a jackpot game, a small win game) in which the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35 is opened is played. In addition, the opening pattern of the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30 and/or second big winning hole 35) in the special game will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "i to p", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the first special symbol validity determination. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol validity determination is the 4R first jackpot, three LEDs of "ijn" are turned on and the rest are turned off. Moreover, when the 4R second jackpot is achieved, four LEDs of "jnkl" are turned on and the rest are turned off. Furthermore, in the event of a failure, two LEDs of "lo" can be turned on and the rest can be turned off. Further, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a to h", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol validity determination. As for the stop display mode, similarly to the first special symbol display 41b, different display modes are determined depending on the result of the second special symbol validity determination (big hit, small hit, miss). In addition, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed (before the derivation display), the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time, but the manner of the variable display is, for example, from left to right in a predetermined order. Each LED may be turned on so that the light repeatedly flows therethrough.

In this way, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are each composed of a plurality of LEDs (display sections), and while the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the first special symbol display 41a is A plurality of LEDs corresponding to the above are displayed by lighting (blinking) in a predetermined order, and when the variable time has elapsed, the first special symbol according to the result of the first special symbol validity determination is displayed according to the jackpot type (if one type, one type). ), the type of small hit (one type if there is one type), and the type of loss (one type if there is one type).

The fluctuating state indicator 49 includes a display part c1 (LEDc1), a display part c2 (LEDc2), and a display part c3 (LEDc3), and the display part c1 shows the fluctuating state of the first special symbol. The variable state of the second special symbol is indicated by c2, and the variable state of the normal symbol is indicated by the display portion c3. Specifically, the display section c1 that shows the fluctuation state of the first special symbol is composed of one LED (display section), which is a smaller number of LEDs (display section, display device) than the first special symbol display device 41a. has been done. During the variable display of the first special symbol, it is displayed blinking, and when the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed, it is stopped and displayed in a display mode according to the result of the first special symbol validity determination. Specifically, in the case of a miss, the light is turned off and the display is stopped, and in the case of a jackpot, regardless of the type of jackpot, all the lights are lit in red and the display is stopped. Further, when the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped), the display is stopped with yellow lighting.

Therefore, the display part c1 is displayed blinking while the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, lit in yellow while the variable display is interrupted, lit in red while the jackpot symbol is stopped, and displayed in red while the winning symbol is stopped. is turned off (hidden). Thereby, by looking at the display part c1 of the fluctuation state display 49, it becomes possible to grasp the fluctuation state of the first special symbol (fluctuation, interruption, stop, validity determination result). In addition, since the fluctuating state display 49 has a simpler configuration (fewer indicators) than the first special symbol display 41a, it is difficult to grasp the jackpot type etc. in detail, but the fluctuating state It becomes possible to understand easily. Further, the fluctuating state indicator 49 (display section c1) functions as a second first special symbol indicator 41a. In addition, "suspension of variable display" is a process that can be performed when the result of the judgment of the other special symbol (second special symbol) executed at the same time becomes a jackpot, and the variable display is temporarily interrupted. However, after the cancellation condition is satisfied, the variable display is restarted.

In addition, the display section c2 that shows the fluctuation state of the second special symbol, like the display section c1, has one LED (display section, display device) that is a smaller number of LEDs (display section, display device) than the second special symbol display 41b. (display section). Then, during the variable display of the second special symbol, it is displayed blinking, and when the variable time of the second special symbol has elapsed, it is stopped and displayed in a display mode according to the result of the second special symbol validity determination. Specifically, in the case of a miss, the light is turned off and stopped, in the case of a jackpot, all lights are lit red and stopped, regardless of the jackpot type, and in the case of a small hit, all lights are lit green regardless of the jackpot type (small hit mode) Stop and display. Further, when the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped), the display is stopped with yellow lighting.

Therefore, the display part c2 is displayed blinking while the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, lit in yellow while the variable display is interrupted, lit in red while the jackpot symbol is stopped, and displayed in red when the small winning symbol is stopped. The inside is lit in green, and the light is off (not displayed) when the winning symbol is stopped. As a result, by looking at the display section c2 of the variation state display 49, it is possible to grasp the variation state of the second special symbol (fluctuation, interruption, stoppage, validity determination result). In addition, since the fluctuating state display 49 has a simpler configuration (fewer indicators) than the second special symbol display 41b, it is difficult to grasp the jackpot type etc. in detail, but the fluctuating state It becomes possible to understand easily. Further, the fluctuating state indicator 49 (display section c2) functions as a second special symbol indicator 41b.

The display mode (symbol) displayed on the display section c1 of the fluctuating state display 49 is also referred to as a "first state symbol" or "first sub-symbol." In addition, since the result of the first special symbol validity determination can be confirmed from the stopping state of the display section c1, it is also referred to as a "first confirmation symbol (also simply referred to as a "confirmation symbol"). Further, the display mode (symbol) displayed on the display section c2 is also referred to as a "second state symbol" or "second sub-symbol." In addition, since the result of the second special symbol validity determination can be confirmed from the stopping state of the display section c2, it is also referred to as a "second confirmation symbol (also simply referred to as a "confirmation symbol")." In addition, the first state symbol displays a variable display and a stop display in response to the variable display and stop display of the first special symbol, and the second state symbol displays a variable display and a stop display in response to the variable display and stop display of the second special symbol. Displays fluctuation and stoppage. Therefore, if the result of the special symbol validity judgment for the first special symbol is a loss, the first state symbol will be turned off (missing mode) and will stop displaying, and if it is a jackpot, all lights will be lit in red regardless of the jackpot type (jackpot mode). Stop and display. The same holds true for the relationship between the second special symbol and the second state symbol.

In addition, the display part c3 that shows the fluctuating state of the normal symbol is one LED (display part), which is a smaller number of LEDs (display part, indicator) than the normal symbol display 42, like the display part c1. It is configured. Then, while the normal symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, they are displayed blinking, and when the normal symbol variation time has elapsed, they are stopped and displayed in a display mode according to the result of the normal symbol validity determination. Specifically, in the case of a miss, the light is turned off to indicate a stop, and in the case of a hit, the light is lit in red to indicate a stop, regardless of the type of hit. In addition, when the fluctuating display of normal symbols is interrupted (temporarily stopped), the stop display is displayed with yellow lighting.

Therefore, the display part c3 is displayed blinking while the normal symbol is being fluctuated, lit in yellow while the fluctuating display is interrupted, lit in red while the winning symbol is stopped, and turned off while the losing symbol is being stopped. (hidden). As a result, by looking at the display section c3 of the variation state display 49, it is possible to grasp the variation state of the normal symbol (fluctuating, interrupted, stopped, and the result of the judgment). In addition, since the fluctuating state display 49 has a simpler configuration (fewer indicators) than the normal symbol display 42, it is difficult to grasp the hit type in detail, but the fluctuating state can be easily displayed. It becomes possible to understand the

The display mode (symbol) displayed on the display section c3 of the variable state display 49 is also referred to as a "first state normal symbol" or "first sub normal symbol." In addition, the first state normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner and in a stopped state in response to the variable display and stopped display of the normal symbols. Therefore, if the result of the determination of whether the normal symbol is a win or not, the display is stopped and turned off (missing mode), and if it is a win, the display is stopped and lit in red (win mode) regardless of the type of win.

In this embodiment, a special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 41a, second special symbol display device 41b) and a fluctuation state display device 49 are provided, and the fluctuation state of the special symbol can be grasped by either of them. , If any of the LEDs of the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 41a, second special symbol display device 41b) that has a large number of LEDs that can grasp the fluctuation state in detail is broken (damage, disconnection, etc.) However, the fluctuation state indicator 49 makes it possible to roughly grasp the fluctuation state. The same applies to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable state display 49. Further, in this embodiment, both the special symbol display devices (the first special symbol display device 41a, the second special symbol display device 41b) and the fluctuation state display device 49 are display-controlled by the main control unit.

Here, among the stop display modes of special symbols and performance symbols (display results of variable displays), the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol validity judgment is a hit (big hit or small hit) is referred to as the "win mode". ”, “specific mode”, “specific display mode”, or “specific display result”, and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of special symbol validity judgment is a failure is referred to as “missing mode”, “non-specific mode” , also referred to as "non-specific display mode" or "non-specific display result." In addition, the stop display mode that corresponds to the case where the result of the special symbol validity judgment is a jackpot is also referred to as the "jackpot mode", and the stop display mode that corresponds to the case where the result of the special symbol validity judgment is a small hit is also referred to as the "small hit mode". Also referred to as "hit mode". Furthermore, it refers to any or all of the image display device, the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display section), the second special symbol display 41b (second special symbol display section), and the special symbol display section 41. It is also called "variable display means" or "identification information display means."

In this pachinko game machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20, second starting port 21, or third starting port 26, various kinds of random numbers for determining the validity of special symbols etc. are generated based on the entering of the ball. Information (also referred to as "acquisition information") is acquired, and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage section 85 formed in the RAM of the main control section 80. Specifically, if the information is acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, it is stored as the first special pattern holding (also referred to as "first acquired information"). If the information is stored in the section 85a and acquired based on the ball entering the third starting port 26, it is stored in the second special symbol reservation storage section 85b as a second special symbol reservation (also referred to as "second acquired information"). be done. An upper limit is set for the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage section 85, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. These first special figure reservation storage section 85a and second special figure reservation storage section 85b are also referred to as "first acquisition information storage means" and "second acquisition information storage means", respectively, and collectively as "acquisition information storage means". .

The special symbol reservation stored in the special symbol reservation storage section 85 is consumed when the special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner based on the special symbol reservation. Extinguishing the special symbol reservation means determining the special symbol propriety judgment random number etc. corresponding to the special symbol reservation, and executing a variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, if the variable display of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, second starting port 21, or third starting port 26 cannot be executed immediately at the time of the ball entering. That is, during execution of variable display of each special symbol or execution of a special game based on any special symbol validity determination, the special symbol validity determination for the entered ball is limited to a predetermined number (4 for each). It is now possible to reserve (reserve) the rights to.

The number of such special figure reservations is displayed on the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b. Specifically, the first special figure reservation display 43a is composed of two LEDs "uv", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of first special figures reserved, the first special figure reservation display 43a This displays the number of pending items. For example, when the number of reservations is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "u□v□" (for example, □: off, ●: lit in red, ▲: lit in green), and the number of pending is 1. In the case of ``u□v●'', the display mode can be such that the LED for u is turned off and the LED for v is turned on in red. Furthermore, when the number of reservations is 2, the display mode may be such that the LED for u is lit in red and the LED for v is turned off, such as "u●v□". Furthermore, when the number of reservations is 3, the display mode can be such that both LEDs are lit in red, such as "u●v●". Further, when the number of reservations is 4 (upper limit number), both LEDs can be lit in green as a display mode such as "u▲v▲". In addition, the second special figure holding display 43b is composed of two LEDs "wx", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of second special figures holding, the second special figure holding display 43b It displays numbers. For example, if the number of reservations is 0, the display format is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "w□x□" (for example, □: off, ●: red on, ▲: green on), and the number of reservations is 1 to 4 is also defined in the same manner as the first special figure reservation display 43a.

The variable display of the normal symbols is performed based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 (detected by the gate sensor 28a). The normal symbol display device 42 displays the normal symbols in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, then stops displaying them, and uses the stopped and displayed normal symbols (stopped symbols) to indicate the result of the normal symbol validity determination based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. inform. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by the normal symbol validity determination. If the stopped and displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (hit normal symbol), an auxiliary game ("specific game") in which the second starting port 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current game state. ) is carried out. Further, the means (main control section) for executing the auxiliary game (specific game) is also referred to as auxiliary game execution means (specific game execution means). Note that the opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs "st", and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol validity determination depending on the lighting mode. It is. For example, if the determination result is a win, a normal winning symbol with both LEDs lit is stopped and displayed, such as "s■t■" (for example, ■: lit, □: turned off). Further, if the determination result is a failure, a normal failure symbol such as "s□t■" in which only the t LED is lit is displayed. Before the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time. The manner of the variable display is, for example, a manner in which both LEDs alternately turn on and off.

When a game ball passes through the gate 28, this pachinko gaming machine 1 acquires various information (also referred to as "acquired information") such as a random number for determining the validity of normal symbols based on the passing of the game ball, and acquires various kinds of acquired information. is temporarily stored as a general pattern reservation in the general pattern reservation storage section 86 formed in the RAM of the main control section 80. An upper limit is set for the number of ordinary figures that can be stored in the ordinary figures reservation storage section 86, and the upper limit in the first embodiment is four. The general symbol reservation stored in the ordinary symbol reservation storage section 86 is consumed when the variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the ordinary symbol reservation becomes possible. The extinguishing of a normal symbol reservation means to determine the random number for normal symbol propriety determination corresponding to the ordinary symbol reservation, and to execute a fluctuating display of the ordinary symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the fluctuating display of the normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be executed immediately at the time of the passage, that is, when the fluctuating display of the regular symbols is being executed or the auxiliary game is being executed. can reserve (reserve) the right to judge the validity of normal symbols for the passage of a predetermined number of symbols.

This number of ordinary drawings on hold is displayed on the ordinary drawings holding display 44. Specifically, the common picture reservation display 44 is composed of two LEDs "qr", and displays the number of common pictures pending by lighting the LEDs according to the number of common pictures pending. For example, when the number of reservations is 0, the display format is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "q□r□" (for example, □: off, ●: lit in red, ▲: lit in green), and the number of pending is 1. In the case of "q□r●", the display mode can be such that the q LED is turned off and the r LED is turned on in red. Further, the number of reservations 2 to 4 is also determined in the same manner as the first special figure reservation display 43a.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained based on FIGS. 2 and 5. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a main control board 80 (a "main control section" or "main control section") that controls gaming profits such as special symbol validity determination, normal symbol validity determination, and gaming state transition. (also referred to as "gaming control unit"), sub-control board 90 (also referred to as "sub-control unit", "sub-control unit", or "performance control unit") that controls the production executed as the game progresses, game ball A payout control board 110 (also referred to as a "payout control unit") that performs control regarding payouts, the effect symbols 8 displayed on the image display device 7, the symbols displayed on the effect display 102, the third effect pending display 103a, It also includes an image control board 100 (image control unit) that controls the display of the fourth effect pending display 103b, etc. As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case housing a main control board 80 is provided approximately at the center of the rear side (back side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and above the main control board case, An image control board storage case is provided that stores the audio control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100, and a sub-control board storage case that stores the sub-control board 90 is provided on the image control board storage case. It is provided. Further, a payout control board case for storing a payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power board case for storing a power supply board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

A one-chip microcomputer for game control (hereinafter referred to as "microcomputer for game control") 81 is mounted on the main control board 80 and controls the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data (information) to and from other boards etc. via an input/output circuit 87 (I/O port section). The input/output circuit 87 may be built into the game control microcomputer 81. Further, the ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-mentioned special pattern holding storage section 85 (first special drawing holding storage section 85a and second special drawing holding storage section 85b) and regular drawing holding storage section 86. .

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88. Therefore, signals are input from each sensor to the main control board 80, and signals are output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors include a first starting port sensor 20a, a second starting port sensor 21a, a third starting port sensor 26a, a gate sensor 28a (starting gate sensor 29a), a first big winning port sensor 30a, and a second starting port sensor 20a. A big prize opening sensor 35a and a general ball entrance sensor 27a are connected. These various sensors are also referred to as "detection means".

The first starting port sensor 20a is provided in the first starting port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 20. The second starting port sensor 21a is provided within the second starting port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 21. The third starting port sensor 26a is provided within the third starting port 26 and detects a game ball that has entered the third starting port 26. The gate sensor 28a (starting gate sensor 29a) is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first big winning hole sensor 30a is provided in the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first big winning hole 30. The second big winning hole sensor 35a is provided in the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 35. The general ball entrance sensor 27a is provided in each general ball entrance 27 to detect a game ball that has entered the general ball entrance 27.

Further, as the solenoids, a second starting port solenoid 24, a first big winning port solenoid 33, and a second big winning port solenoid 38 are connected. The second starting port solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable prize winning device 22. The first big prize opening solenoid 33 is for driving the opening/closing member 32 of the first big winning device 31. The second big prize opening solenoid 38 is for driving the opening/closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36. Furthermore, the main control board 80 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol pending display 43a, a second special symbol pending display 43b, and a normal symbol display 43a. A figure holding display 44, a fluctuation state display 49, a round display 45, a game state display 46, a firing direction display 47, and a winning display 48 are connected. That is, display control of these main display devices 40 is performed by a game control microcomputer 81 (main control section 80).

The main control board 80 also sends various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. A payout device 120 that pays out prize balls and rental balls, and a card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and a launch device 112 is connected to the payout control board 110 via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as a "launch control unit"). is connected. Firing device 112 includes firing handle 60 (see FIG. 1). The card unit 135 is installed adjacent to one end of the pachinko machine 1 (usually on the left side of the paper in FIG. This system enables ball lending based on information stored in a value storage medium, etc.

The payout control board 110 has a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as a "payout control microcomputer") that controls the payout of game balls of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores programs for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 controls the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the input/output circuit 117. It is driven to pay out prize balls or pay out rental balls. The game balls that are paid out are detected by payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. Note that when the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the firing device 112, the touch switch 114 detects the player's contact with the firing handle 60, and the firing volume 115 changes to the position of the firing handle 60. Detects the amount of rotation. Then, the firing motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 115.

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a unidirectional (one-way) communication connection that allows only the transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode), not shown, is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 as a communication direction regulating means. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control board 90 is equipped with a performance control one-chip microcomputer 91 (``performance control microcomputer'') that controls the performance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The production control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores programs for controlling the game production as the game progresses, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. There is. The production control microcomputer 91 sends and receives data to and from other boards etc. via the input/output circuit 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built in the production control microcomputer 91. Further, the ROM may be externally attached.

An image control board 100, an audio control board 106, and a lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub-control board 90. The production control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 controls the CPU (VDP) of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 ("image control microcomputer") of the image control board 100 based on the command received from the main control board 80. , the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, the third image display device 72, the effect display 102, the third effect pending display 103a, and the fourth effect pending display 103b. Let control take place. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for expanding image data. The ROM of the image control board 100 stores still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device, specifically characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including performance patterns, reserved patterns, etc.), Image data such as a background image is stored. The CPU (VDP) of the image control board 100 reads image data from the ROM based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 91. Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

The performance display device 102 consists of two LEDs, one of which performs a variable display and a stop display in accordance with the variable display and stop display of the first special symbol, and the other LED performs a variable display of the second special symbol. A display mode in which a variable display and a stop display are performed in accordance with the and stop display, and the display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (result of special symbol validity judgment) is shown by lighting/extinguishing or color of the corresponding LED. Stop and display. Similarly, the third effect pending display 103a and the fourth effect pending display 103b each include two LEDs. Then, depending on the lighting/extinguishing of the two LEDs or the combination of colors, the third performance reservation display 103a displays the number of reservations displayed in the first performance reservation display area 9c and the first special symbol reservation display 43a. The display is controlled in a display mode that shows the same number of pending items as the number of pending items. In addition, the fourth effect holding display 103b is controlled to display the same number of holding pieces as the number of holding pieces displayed in the second effect holding display area 9d and the number of holding pieces displayed on the second special figure holding display 43b. Ru.

The character design can be displayed on a part or substantially the entire display screen 7a (performance pattern display section), or the movable decorative member 14 can be moved in front of the display screen 7a (performance pattern display section) to display the character pattern on the display screen 7a (performance pattern display section). By covering part or almost the entire part of the part), part or all of the effect pattern 8, the first effect pending display part 9c, or the second effect pending display part 9d may become invisible. be. Even in such a covered state, in order to be able to reliably check the fluctuating display and stop display of the performance symbols, the number of pending items, etc., these performance display devices 102, the third performance reservation display device 103a, And, a fourth effect pending display 103b is provided. The display mode of the effect display 102, the third effect pending display 103a, and the fourth effect pending display 103b is such that the display is always visible without being obstructed by the movement of the movable decorative member 14. It has become. Furthermore, a VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided in place of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

Furthermore, the performance control microcomputer 91 outputs audio, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as audio output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may be caused to execute voice control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 and the CPU of the image control board 100 may execute audio control. Furthermore, in this case, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 also generates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting/extinguishing, lighting color, etc.) that determines the lighting mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 based on commands received from the main control board 80. , also referred to as lamp data) from data stored in the ROM, and controls the lighting of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107.

Furthermore, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decoration member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Although only a portion of the movable decorative member 14 is visible in FIG. 1, it is a movable so-called gimmick (movable member) provided on the center decorative body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines operation pattern data (also referred to as "drive data") for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, and The motion of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the motion pattern data. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may control the lighting of the lamp and the operation of the movable decorative member 14. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and data regarding the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

In addition, the sub-control board 90 includes a first performance button detection switch 63c and a first performance button detection switch 63c that detects that the first performance button 63a or the second performance button 63b (see FIG. 1) is operated (pressed, rotated, pulled, etc.). 2 production button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first performance button 63a or the second performance button 63b, a signal is outputted to the sub-control board 90 from the corresponding performance button detection switch.

Next, control related to special symbol validity determination in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be explained. The results of the special symbol validity judgment include "big hit", "small hit", and "miss". When it is a "jackpot", the "jackpot symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display section 41. In addition, when there is a "small win", the "small win symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display section 41. Moreover, when it is a "miss", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display section 41. When a jackpot or small win is determined, a "special game" is executed in which the first big prize opening 30 or the second big prize opening 35 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed. . A special game that is executed as a jackpot is called a "jackpot game," and a special game that is executed as a small win is called a "small win game."

There are a plurality of types of hits, and depending on the result (specific result) of special symbol validity determination, the winning type corresponding to the result (specific result) is executed. That is, depending on whether the result of the special symbol validity judgment is the first specific result, the second specific result, the third specific result, or another specific result, different hit types (jackpot , including small winnings). In addition, the special games to be executed may differ depending on the winning type, and the amount of gaming profits that can be earned by the special games may differ, and the gaming state after the special game ends may differ. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the types of winnings include "15R (round) 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", "4R 3rd jackpot", "4R 4th jackpot", and "15R 1st jackpot". 5 jackpot," "2R 6th jackpot," and "2R 7th jackpot." In "15R 1st jackpot" and "15R 5th jackpot", the number of openings (number of rounds) of the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30) is 15 times. In addition, for "4R 2nd jackpot", "4R 3rd jackpot", and "4R 4th jackpot", the number of openings (number of rounds) of the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30) is 4 times. In the "2R 6th jackpot" and the "2R 7th jackpot", the number of openings (number of rounds) of the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30) is two. In this way, in all jackpots, the first big prize opening 30 is opened and the second big prize opening 35 is not opened. For this reason, the first big winning hole 30 is also referred to as a "big winning hole for jackpot (variable ball entry hole for jackpot)".

In addition, "15R 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", "4R 3rd jackpot", "15R 5th jackpot", and "2R 6th jackpot" are the game status after the end of the jackpot game. , to shift to a high probability state (activate the probability variation function), which will be described later. Therefore, these five types of jackpots are also called "probable jackpots (high probability jackpots)." This high probability state (variable probability function) continues until the next jackpot occurs. In addition, "4R 4th jackpot" and "2R 7th jackpot" shift the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game to a low probability state (described later) (the probability change function is not activated). Therefore, these two types of jackpots are also called "low probability jackpots (low probability jackpots, normal jackpots)".

In addition, for "15R 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot" and "15R 5th jackpot", after the end of the jackpot game, "2nd special symbol time saving" which sets the fluctuation time of the 2nd special symbol to a short time function" and does not activate the high base generation function. As a result, the gaming state after the end of these jackpot games becomes a high probability low base state (state C). This high probability low base state continues until the next jackpot occurs. In addition, in this high-accuracy low base state, the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol is longer than the low-accuracy low base state, the low-accuracy high base state, and the high-accuracy high base state. It is set. In particular, the variation time of the first special symbol when the result of the first special symbol propriety determination is negative is set to be a long time (see FIG. 9).

In addition, the gameplay in the high-accuracy, low-base state (state C) will be described in detail later, but by playing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B where various ball entrances are arranged as described above, the third start Let the ball enter the hole 26. Then, a second special symbol validity judgment is performed to generate a small hit, and it is a period in which it is possible to increase the number of game balls in the period between the previous jackpot and the next jackpot (during the jackpot). In addition, by causing small hits to occur frequently in this high-accuracy/low-base state between jackpots, it is possible to expect a large number of game balls to be acquired in a short period of time due to the small hits. In other words, it is a period that is advantageous for the player and is a period in which it is possible to increase interest in the game.

Furthermore, for the "4R 4th jackpot" and the "2R 7th jackpot", the "first special symbol time saving function" and the "high base generation function" are activated after the jackpot game ends. Due to the activation of the first special symbol time saving function, the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol is shorter than when the first special symbol time saving function is not activated (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy low base state) set to time. In addition, since the second special symbol time saving function is not activated, the variation time of the second special symbol is longer than the variation time of the first special symbol. As a result, the gaming state after the end of these jackpot games becomes a low probability high base state. In the case of "4R 4th jackpot" and "2R 7th jackpot", the low probability high base state ends based on the occurrence of the next jackpot or the 100th execution of the variable display of the special symbol. . When the variable display of the special symbol ends after being executed 100 times, the gaming state is set to a low probability low base state (normal state). In addition, as will be described in detail later, in the low-accuracy, high-base state, by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B where various ball entrances are arranged as described above, the first special symbol validity judgment is performed, and the next This is the period during which players play games in hopes of hitting the jackpot.

Furthermore, for the "4R third jackpot" and the "2R sixth jackpot", the "first special symbol time saving function" and "high base generation function" are activated after the jackpot game ends. In addition, since the second special symbol time saving function is not activated, the variation time of the second special symbol is longer than the variation time of the first special symbol. As a result, the gaming state after the end of these jackpot games becomes a high probability high base state. In the case of "4R 3rd jackpot" and "2R 6th jackpot", the "1st special symbol time saving function" and the "high base generation function" continue until the next jackpot occurs. Also, as mentioned above, the "probability change function" continues until the next jackpot occurs. That is, in the case of "4R 3rd jackpot" and "2R 6th jackpot", after the end of the jackpot game, the high probability high base state (first special symbol time saving state) is set until the next jackpot occurs.

In the high-accuracy, high-base state, similarly to the low-accuracy, high-base state, by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B, the first special symbol validity judgment is performed, and the game is played in anticipation of the occurrence of the next jackpot. As mentioned above, the high-accuracy/low-base state is a period in which small hits occur frequently while executing the second special symbol validity judgment by right-handed games, and a large number of game balls are generated in a short period of time due to small hits. This is an advantageous period for players, as they can expect to win. Note that there are more game balls that can be obtained in the high-accuracy, low-base state than in the high-accuracy, high-base state.

In addition, the high certainty high base state after the end of the jackpot game (4R 3rd jackpot game) related to "4R 3rd jackpot" and the low base state after the end of the jackpot game (4R 4th jackpot game) related to "4R 4th jackpot" By executing a common game performance (first game performance: background, game mode, character pattern, reach performance, etc.) in the sure-high base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state he is in. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set as state B, and a common variation pattern determination table is used to determine a variation pattern. As a result, both gaming states are set to non-reporting states in which the gaming state (high probability high base state or low probability high base state) is not notified (recognition is made difficult).

If the type of jackpot was "4R 3rd jackpot", even after the special symbol was displayed 100 times, the high-precision, high-base state continued, resulting in "4R 4th jackpot". In this case, after the special symbols have been displayed 100 times, the gaming state becomes a low probability low base state (a normal state disadvantageous to the player). Therefore, in this non-notification state, the player plays the game with the expectation that the high-accuracy-high base state will continue even after 100 games have passed, increasing his interest in the game, no matter which gaming state he is in. In addition, in the low-accuracy, high-base state or the high-accuracy, high-base state, that is, the high base state, the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls he has much (the rate of decrease in the number of balls he has is slower than in the low-accuracy, low-base state). It can be performed.

Similarly, the high certainty high base state after the end of the jackpot game (2R 6th jackpot game) related to "2R 6th jackpot" and the end of the jackpot game (2R 7th jackpot game) related to "2R 7th jackpot" By executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the low-accuracy/high-base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state he/she is in. do. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set as state B, and a common variation pattern determination table is used to determine a variation pattern. As a result, both gaming states are set to non-notifying states in which the gaming state (high-probability high-base state or low-probability high-base state) is not notified (recognition is difficult).

If the type of jackpot was "2R 6th jackpot", even after the special symbol was displayed 100 times, the high-precision, high-base state continued, resulting in "2R 7th jackpot". In this case, after the special symbols have been displayed 100 times, the gaming state becomes a low probability low base state (a normal state disadvantageous to the player). Therefore, in this non-notification state, the player plays the game with the expectation that the high-accuracy-high base state will continue even after 100 games have passed, increasing his interest in the game, no matter which gaming state he is in.

In addition, for small wins that may occur as a result of the second special symbol validity determination, the number of openings of the big winning hole (second big winning hole 35) is 6 times, and compared to other jackpots, the number of times the big winning hole (second big winning hole 35) is opened is 1 (and (total) opening time is also set short. Specifically, the opening is performed six times for 0.3 seconds, for a total of 1.8 seconds. Therefore, compared to jackpot games (for example, 15R first jackpot game, 4R fourth jackpot game, etc.), the number of game balls that can be acquired in one small win game is set to be smaller. However, by generating small wins a plurality of times (many times) in a high probability/low base state between jackpots, it is possible to execute a plurality of small win games and obtain more game balls. In addition, in the case of a small win, the second big prize opening 35 is all opened, and the first big prize opening 30 is not opened. For this reason, the second big winning hole 35 is also referred to as a "big winning hole for small winnings (variable ball entry hole for small winnings)". In addition, in the small winning game (small winning game), unlike the big winning (big winning game), the number of times the big winning opening is opened is not called the number of rounds, but simply the number of openings. In addition, the probability variable function will not be activated based on the occurrence of a small hit, and if the gaming state when a small hit occurs is a high probability state, it will remain in a high probability state even after the small hit game ends, and when a small hit occurs, If the game state is a low probability state, it will remain a low probability state even after the small winning game ends. Similarly, the time saving function and high base generation function of the second special symbol are not activated based on the occurrence of a small hit.

In addition, the distribution probability to each jackpot in the judgment of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is 20% for the 15R first jackpot, 10% for the 4R second jackpot, 35% for the 4R third jackpot, and 35% for the 4R third jackpot. 4 jackpots are 35%. On the other hand, the jackpot in the judgment of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 50% for the 15R 5th jackpot, 15% for the 2R 6th jackpot, and 35% for the 2R 7th jackpot. In other words, if a jackpot is achieved by the judgment based on the ball entering the third starting port 26 whose fluctuation frequency has been improved by the operation of the second special symbol time saving function described later (second special symbol judgment), 15R It becomes a jackpot (15R 5th jackpot) and a large amount of game balls can be obtained in a short period of time. In this way, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, rather than hitting the jackpot in the judgment (first special symbol judgment) made when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, 3. It is more likely that it will be advantageous for the player (to obtain a large amount of game balls) if the game ball enters the starting hole 26 and the game ball hits the jackpot in the judgment (second special symbol judgment). It is set to be. In addition, the player plays the game in anticipation of the occurrence of the 15R fifth jackpot and the occurrence of a high-precision low-base state in which the number of game balls can be increased by a small win.

Here, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the determination of whether it is a jackpot, a small hit, or a miss is made based on a "random number for special symbol validity determination (also referred to as "properness determination information")", and when a jackpot is achieved, The determination of the jackpot type is performed based on the "random number for jackpot type determination (also referred to as "random number for symbol determination" or "information for symbol determination")". Note that the result of the first special symbol validity determination does not include a small hit. As shown in FIG. 7(A), the random number for determining the validity of the special symbol takes a value in the range from 0 to 629. The random number for determining the jackpot type takes a value in the range from 0 to 99. In addition, the random numbers (acquisition information) acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20, the second starting port 21, or the third starting port 26 include a random number for determining the validity of a special symbol and a random number for determining the jackpot type. In addition, there is "fluctuation pattern random number (also referred to as "fluctuation pattern information")." Further, the variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) including a variation time of the special symbol. The fluctuation pattern random number takes values in the range from 0 to 198. Furthermore, the random numbers obtained based on passage through the gate 28 include the random numbers for normal symbol validity determination shown in FIG. 7(B). The normal symbol validity determination random number is a random number for determining whether or not to perform the auxiliary game that opens the second starting port 21 (normal symbol validity determination). Normal symbol random numbers take values in the range from 0 to 240.

Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be explained. The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a probability variation function (probability variation function) for special symbols and ordinary symbols, a variation time shortening function for special symbols and ordinary symbols, and an opening extension function of the second starting port 21, which are either in an operating state or in a non-operating state. It has a plurality of gaming states depending on the combination that becomes the operating state. Regarding the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol), a state in which the probability variation function is activated is referred to as a "high probability state", and a state in which it is not activated is referred to as a "low probability state". In the high probability state (jackpot probability: 1/63), the probability of being judged as a jackpot in the special symbol validity determination is higher than in the low probability state (jackpot probability: 1/315). In other words, in a low probability state, a jackpot determination table for a low probability state is used to determine whether the jackpot is determined, but in a high probability state, a jackpot determination is performed using a jackpot determination table for a high probability state in which there are many values of random numbers for determining the special symbols that are determined to be a jackpot. Judgment is made using the table (see FIG. 8(A)). In other words, when the special symbol probability variation function is activated, the probability that the result of the special symbol variation display will be a jackpot (the stopped symbol will become a jackpot symbol) becomes higher than when it is not activated. Note that the means (main control unit) for setting a high probability or a low probability as the probability (jackpot probability) for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not is referred to as a "probability setting means".

Further, the state in which the variable time reduction function is activated for the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is referred to as a "time reduction state", and the state in which it is not activated is referred to as a "non-time reduction state". In the time saving state, the average value of the variation time of the special symbols (time from the start of variable display to the time of final display) is shorter than the average value of the variation time of the special symbols in the non-time saving state. That is, in the time-saving state, a variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern table that is determined so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often than in a non-time-saving state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the reserved special symbols are consumed becomes faster, and effective ball entry into the starting slot (balls that can be stored as reserved special symbols) is more likely to occur. Therefore, players can aim for a jackpot while the game progresses smoothly.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, since the length of the variation time of the second special symbol is particularly related to the advantage or disadvantage of the player, it is set as a "second special symbol time saving function" as shown in FIG. There is. State A (low accuracy low base state) and state B (low accuracy high base state) shown in FIG. , high certainty, high base state). In state A (low probability low base state), when the player plays a right-handed game and enters the game ball into the third starting port 26, the second special symbol validity determination is executed, and the second special symbol displays fluctuations. However, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in state A is set to a very long time (600 seconds for a miss, 110 seconds for a jackpot, and 1000 seconds for a small win), the game cannot proceed smoothly (in such a state (also called the "first condition state"). In addition, since it is in a low base state (first game state), it is impossible or difficult for the ball to enter the second starting port 21.

Therefore, even if the player plays a right-handed game in state A, it is difficult for the player to acquire a large amount of game balls. Therefore, in state A, the game is played with a left-handed game, aiming at the first starting opening 20 in which the special symbol variation time is set to an appropriate length. On the other hand, since the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that can simultaneously (in parallel) execute variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol, Even if the second special symbol is erroneously displayed in a variable manner in state A, the player can enter the game ball into the first starting port 20 without waiting for the variable display of the second special symbol to end. , it is possible to display the first special symbol in a variable manner.

On the other hand, in state B (low-probability high base state, high-probability high base state), the right-handed game is performed because the player is in the high base state (second game state) and the first special symbol time saving function is activated. This allows the ball to enter both the second starting port 21 and the third starting port 26 which are in the open state. In state B, like state A, the second special symbol time saving function is not activated. Therefore, when the ball enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol validity judgment is executed and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, but the variation time of the second special symbol is a very long time. (600 seconds for a miss, 110 seconds for a jackpot, and 1000 seconds for a small win), so the game cannot proceed smoothly. However, when the ball enters the second starting port 21, the first special symbol validity determination is executed and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the first special symbol time-saving function is activated to enter the first special symbol time-saving state, and the first special symbol validity determination is executed more frequently than in state A, allowing the game to proceed smoothly.

In addition, as a state where the second special symbol validity determination is the main, state C (high accuracy low base state) shown in FIG. 9 is provided. In state C (high accuracy low base state), the second special symbol time saving function is activated, so by playing a right-handed game, it is possible to play a game aiming at the ball entering the third starting port 26. becomes. When the ball enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol validity determination is executed and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, due to the operation of the second special symbol time-saving function, the second special symbol time-saving state is entered, and the second special symbol validity judgment is executed more frequently than in states A and B, allowing the game to proceed smoothly. Can be done. Thereby, it becomes possible to execute the second special symbol validity determination which is more advantageous than the first special symbol validity determination.

In state C, when the ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the first special symbol validity determination is executed and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Since the symbol fluctuation time is set to a very long time (600 seconds for a loss and 110 seconds for a jackpot), the game cannot be played smoothly. Therefore, in state C, even if the ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, or if there is a pending memory related to the first special symbol correctness determination, the second special symbol correctness determination is It is possible to reduce as much as possible the possibility that an unfavorable first special symbol validity determination will be executed.

In this way, states B and C are both states in which a right-handed game is performed, but in state B, like state C, the game state is a game state in which the first special symbol validity determination is mainly performed, and state C Then, a game state is entered in which the second special symbol validity determination is mainly performed. This results in a jackpot in the normal state of left-handed games (low probability low base state, state A), and after shifting to right-handed games, in the so-called consecutive winning period (right-handed state), the first special symbol validity judgment is performed. A transition is made between a game state in which the main character is played and a game state in which the second special symbol is judged as the main character, thereby diversifying the gameplay. In addition, since there are different types of jackpots (jackpot games) that can occur in the game state in which the first special symbol validity determination is mainly performed and the game state in which the second special symbol validity determination is mainly performed, there are different types of jackpots (jackpot games) that can occur. While the game continues, different jackpots (jackpot games) are generated by shifting these gaming states. This makes it possible to prevent players from getting bored with the game and increase their interest in the game.

In addition, when the second special symbol time saving function is activated, that is, in state C shown in FIG. 9 (such a state is also referred to as "second condition state"), as shown in FIG. Since the fluctuation time of the special symbols is short, the player can smoothly play the game (second special symbol validity judgment, second special symbol determination, 2 special symbol variation game) can be executed. In addition, in this embodiment, the first special symbol time-saving function is not activated during the period in which the second special symbol time-saving function is activated (the variation time of the first special symbol is made longer than in the normal state). However, the first special symbol time saving function may be activated. Further, in state B, the number of balls held is maintained or slightly decreased, and in state C, it is assumed that the number of balls is increased.

The probability variation function and the variation time reduction function (first special symbol time reduction function or second special symbol time reduction function) regarding the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) operate simultaneously. The probability variation function and variation time reduction function for normal symbols operate in synchronization with the high base generation function. In other words, the normal symbol probability fluctuation function and fluctuation time shortening function operate when the gaming state is a high base state (low probability high base state, high probability high base state), and when the gaming state is low base state (low probability low base state, high probability does not operate in low base conditions). Therefore, in the high base state (state B), the probability of winning in the normal symbol validity determination is higher than in the low base state (also referred to as the "normal symbol high probability state"). In other words, in the high base state (state B), the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) that is determined to be a hit is higher than the normal symbol hit determination table used in the low base state (states A, C). A normal symbol correctness determination (normal symbol determination) is performed using the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 8(C)). In other words, when the probability variation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the result of the variable display of the normal symbol will be a hit (the stopped symbol will become a normal winning symbol) will be higher than when it is not activated. .

Also, in the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the low base state. In the first embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds in the low base state, but 1 second in the high base state (see FIG. 8(E)). Furthermore, in the high base state, the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the low base state. In other words, the opening time extension function of the variable prize winning device 22 is operating. Specifically, when the result of normal symbol validity determination is a hit in the low base state, the opening/closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs an opening operation of 0.9 seconds three times (opening time: 2.7 seconds), and then opens. During the period of operation, the second starting port is in an open state. In addition, when the result of normal symbol validity determination is a hit in the high base state, the opening/closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs one opening operation for 6.0 seconds (opening time: 6.0 seconds). . Further, the closing time between opening operations in the low base state is 0.1 seconds. In this embodiment, the number of times the opening/closing member 37 is opened is different between the low base state and the high base state, but the number of times the opening and closing member 37 is opened may be the same. For example, the opening operation in the low base state may be one opening of 2.7 seconds, or the opening operation in the high base state may be three openings of 2.0 seconds. Further, the opening operation in the high base state may be opened six times for 1.0 seconds, which may be greater than the number of openings in the low base state. In such a case, it is also said that the function of increasing the number of openings of the variable prize winning device 22 is activated.

In the high base state, the probability fluctuation function for normal symbols, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 are activated, compared to the low base state in which these functions are not activated. , the period during which the second starting port 21 is open becomes longer (the opening time per unit time becomes longer), and the frequency of game balls entering the second starting port 21 increases (also referred to as a "high frequency state"). ). As a result, the frequency of execution of the first special symbol validity determination increases. As mentioned above, in a high base state, you can aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have.

Further, if the opening time is the same, the smaller the number of openings, the lower the possibility that the game ball will pass through the second starting port 21. In this embodiment, the opening mode of the second starting port 21 in the high base state is set to one opening of 6.0 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be extremely short (1 second). In addition, since the second starting port 21 is in the closed state while the normal symbols are changing, the normal symbol changing time is the time when the game ball begins to flow down on the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 in the closed state. The time is set to such an extent that the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 opens before the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface. When the movable member 23 becomes an open state while flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 enters the second starting port 21 which is in the open state. In addition, in order to prevent the game balls flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 from passing through the upper surface of the movable member 23, the material constituting the upper surface (game ball passage) of the movable member 23 is It is made of a material with a higher coefficient of friction than the material that makes up the ball passage (the materials are different).

Thereby, the speed of the game ball flowing down on the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set to be slower than the speed of the game torrent in the game ball path on the front side thereof. In addition, as a mode for reducing the flow rate, the inclination angle may be made gentler, or an inhibiting member (such as a protrusion) that reduces the flow rate may be provided. In addition, as a result, in the high base state, the game ball that has flowed down to the second starting port 21 does not enter the second starting port 21 (flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23), and can be moved to the second grand prize opening. 35 is further reduced. In other words, in the high base state, even if there is a small hit and the second big prize opening 35 is in the open state (ball entry possible state), the game ball that has flown down will enter the second starting opening 21 and enter the second It is difficult to enter the ball into the grand prize opening 35. Further, the third out port 34c can also prevent the game ball that has flown down to the second large winning port 35 from entering the second large winning port 35.

The high base state may not be one in which all of the above functions are activated. That is, due to the activation of at least one of the probability fluctuation function for normal symbols, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22, the second starting port is more open than when the function is not activated. It is sufficient that the number 21 is easily released (the frequency of ball entry is high). Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without accompanying the time saving state of the special symbol. A function that generates such a high base state is called a "high base generation function."

As mentioned above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, since the determination of the validity of the second special symbol is more advantageous for the player than the determination of the validity of the first special symbol, the player can play the first special symbol. There is a possibility that the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner without being displayed in a variable manner. That is, even in the normal state (low probability low base state), there is a possibility that the player attempts to play a right-handed game. However, as mentioned above, in the normal state (low probability low base state), the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the second special symbol is extremely long compared to the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol. Therefore, even if the second special symbol is displayed variably in the normal state (even if the ball enters the third starting port 26), it cannot be displayed variably many times, and the game efficiency is extremely low. It has become bad. That is, it is more advantageous for the player to display the first special symbol in a variable manner in a left-handed game than to display the second special symbol in a variable manner in a right-handed game. Here, the "state where the first special symbol is not being played (non-gaming state)" means that the first special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reservations of the first special symbol is "0". ”. In addition, "a state in which the second special symbol is not being played (non-gaming state)" means that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reservations for the second special symbol is "0". It means that

In addition, in high base states such as high-accuracy high-base states and low-accuracy high-base states, the frequency of the second starting port 21 being in the open state increases, and the first special symbol time saving function reduces the variation time of the first special symbol. The time is shortened, and the game efficiency of right-handed games is improved. In such a case, the game can proceed more advantageously by playing a right-handed game and determining the validity of the first special symbol than by playing a left-handed game. In addition, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is opened more easily than in the low base state, and it is easier for the ball to enter the second starting port 21 than to enter the first starting port 20. This is because. Therefore, while passing the game ball through the gate 28 which is the trigger for determining whether the symbol is correct or not, the player performs a right hit in order to cause the game ball to enter the second starting port 21.

In addition, in the high accuracy low base state, due to the second special symbol time saving function, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened, and the game efficiency in the right-handed game is improved. In such a case, the game can proceed more advantageously by playing a right-handed game and determining whether the second special symbol is correct or not, which is advantageous for the player. Furthermore, in the high-accuracy, low-base state, the frequency of balls entering the second starting port 21 is the same as in the low-accuracy, low-base state (normal state), and the frequency of balls entering the second starting port 21 is the same as in the low-accuracy, low-base state (normal state). The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is changing for a long time (compared to the low probability low base state). In addition, in the high-accuracy/low-base state, the probability variation function for normal symbols, the variation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable prize winning device 22 are not operating, so the entry to the second starting port 21 is not activated. The ball frequency is low compared to the high base state. Therefore, the prize ball based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is less likely to be obtained in a higher base state. However, instead, the second special symbol correctness judgment prevents the number of game balls from decreasing between jackpots due to small hits that occur with a high probability (small win probability: 420/630), and rather causes small hits to occur frequently. It is also possible to increase the number of balls held by (occurring multiple times).

That is, in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), by causing the ball to enter the second starting port 21 frequently by playing the right-handed game, the ball entering the second starting port 21 can be increased. The player aims to generate the next jackpot by obtaining the prize ball for the target and determining whether the first special symbol is correct or not without greatly reducing the number of balls he has. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is set to one, and even if all the game balls hit to the right enter the second starting port 21, the game ball will not be awarded. The number of balls does not increase (maintenance). In addition, in this embodiment, the setting is such that about 75 to 85% of the game balls hit to the right enter the second starting port 21, so unless the ball enters the other ball entry port, the high base If the condition continues for a long period of time, the number of balls held will decrease slightly. Further, by adjusting the game nails around the second out port 34b, it is possible to adjust the rate of game balls entering the second starting port 21.

On the other hand, in the high-accuracy, low-base state, small hits are generated at a high frequency (420/630) by the second special symbol correctness judgment based on the ball entering the third starting hole 26 by right-handed games, and the accuracy is high. The player aims to increase the number of balls held in a small winning game during a low base state, and aims to generate the next jackpot by making a second special symbol correctness judgment which is more advantageous than the first special symbol correctness judgment. In the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, in the high probability low base state, the longer the period in which the next jackpot does not occur (the longer the period in the high probability low base state continues), the more small wins will occur. There are more opportunities (to execute a small winning game), which is advantageous to the player.

[Explanation of board configuration and gaming status]
In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, in the right game area 3B (second game area), various ball entry holes are arranged from the upstream side of the game area, including a gate 28 (starting gate 29), a first big winning hole 30, and a first big winning hole 30. The second starting port 21 and the second winning port 35 are arranged in the optimal order. In addition, since the game ball flow path in the right game area 3B is formed as shown in FIG. , passes through the gate 28 (starting gate 29), then flows down the top surface of the opening/closing member 32 of the first big winning opening 30, then flows down the top surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting opening 21, and then flows down the top surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting opening 21. The liquid flows down the upper surface of the opening/closing member 37 and flows down to the outlet 34. If there is an open prize opening in the middle of the flow, the ball enters the prize opening, is ejected from the prize opening to the back of the game board, and the entered game ball enters the downstream gaming area. The structure is such that it will not work. Further, the remaining approximately 10% of the balls that do not flow into the gate 28 enter the second out port 34b provided on the upstream side of the gate 28, and are discharged to the outside of the gaming machine. Furthermore, by adjusting the angle of the game nails around the second out port 34b, it is possible to adjust the rate of game balls flowing into the gate 28 side.

By arranging the gate 28 at the most upstream position, it is possible to prevent the game ball from reaching the gate 28 due to the opened second starting port 21 or the like. In addition, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the occurrence of a waiting time (a state in which the normal symbols do not change) due to the normal symbol reservation becoming "0". That is, by arranging the gate 28 at the most upstream side of the right game area, almost all the game balls hit to the right can pass through the gate 28, regardless of whether or not other winning holes are opened. In addition, since the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 flows downstream in the right game area as it is, the presence of the gate 28 does not prevent the ball from entering other winning holes.

When playing a right-handed game in a high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), the game ball first passes through the gate 28, and a determination is made as to whether or not the second starting port 21 should be opened. be done. In the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time (1 second), and the probability of hitting the normal symbol is also set to a high probability (239/240) that is almost a hit, so the game ball is at the gate. Immediately after passing (one second), the movable member 23 operates and the second starting port 21 becomes open. That is, when a game ball passes through the gate 28 and the normal symbol validity determination is executed and the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 before reaching the entrance of the second starting port 21. 2. The starting port 21 is in an open state. In addition, the opening time of the second starting port 21 is set to be one time of 6.0 seconds, so as long as the right-handed game continues, the second starting port 21 will be closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second. , then open once for 6.0 seconds, close during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second, then open once for 6.0 seconds, and repeat the cycle (1 second closed → 6 .0 seconds open → 1 second closed → approximately 6.0 seconds open →...).

Therefore, when playing a right-handed game in a high base state, the second starting port 21 will be in an almost open state, and most (about 70 to 80%) of the game balls flowing down the right gaming area 3B will be in the second starting port 21. He will enter the ball. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, a first special symbol validity determination is executed. In the first special symbol validity determination, in the high-accuracy, high-base state, the probability of a jackpot is 1/63, no small hit occurs, and the probability of a miss is 62/63.

First, if the result of the first special symbol validity determination is negative, most (approximately 70 to 80%) of the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B will be in the open state after passing through the gate 28. The ball enters the second starting port 21, and the other game balls flow downstream from the game ball path that branches before the second starting port 21, and do not flow into the second starting port 21, but enter the third starting port 21. The ball enters the ball 26 or flows into the out port 34. As a result, the first special symbol validity determination is executed continuously (with high frequency). In addition, since one prize ball is ejected by one ball entering the second starting port 21, the speed at which the balls are reduced is reduced and the first special symbol validity judgment is executed to determine the next jackpot. It is possible to aim. Also, when one ball enters the third starting port 26, one prize ball is ejected.

Next, if the result of the first special symbol validity determination is a jackpot, the first big prize opening 30 on the upstream side of the second starting opening 21 will be opened in a manner according to the jackpot type shown in FIG. . Further, the second big prize opening 35 provided on the downstream side of the second starting opening 21 is not opened in the jackpot game. As a result, when a jackpot game starts, the game ball that flows down due to the right-handed game will not be hindered from entering the ball by other winning holes such as the second starting hole 21, and will smoothly enter the first big winning hole. Enter the pitch at 30. Here, if the second starting port 21 is placed upstream of the first big winning hole 30, the state will shift to the low base state during the jackpot game, but in this embodiment, the second starting port 21 will be activated even in the low base state. Since it is designed to be in an open state, a game ball flowing down the right game area during a jackpot game enters the second starting port 21 first, and a game ball that does not enter the second starting port 21 A situation arises in which only the ball enters the second grand prize opening 30.

Furthermore, since the number of prize balls based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is one, the execution time of the jackpot game is unnecessarily prolonged, and there is no benefit to the player. On the contrary, there is a possibility that the game becomes redundant, does not proceed smoothly, and reduces the interest in the game. Therefore, by arranging the first big prize opening 30 upstream of the second starting opening 21 as in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent such a situation and to smoothly proceed with the jackpot game. Become. In addition, since the first jackpot 30 is not opened except during jackpot games, the first jackpot 30 may obstruct the ball from entering the second starting slot 21 when other than jackpot games. do not have.

Next, the high-certain low base state will be explained. The high probability low base state is a low base state, but since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short, it is advantageous for the player to proceed with the game by hitting right. When a right-handed game is played in the high-accuracy-low base state, the game ball first passes through the gate 28, and a determination (normal symbol validity determination) is performed as to whether or not the second starting port 21 is to be opened. In the low base state (high accuracy low base state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be longer (3 seconds) than in the high base state, and the probability of winning a normal symbol is also lower than in the high base state. (1/240), after the game ball passes through the gate, after a short time (3 seconds), if it hits, the movable member 23 operates and the second starting port 21 opens. state. Since the probability of winning is set to 1/240, it is almost a miss, and the possibility that the second starting port 21 will be in the open state is low. In addition, instead of this mode, the probability of winning in the normal symbol correctness determination in the low base state may be set to 0/240, and all results may be incorrect. In this way, the second starting port 21 will not be in the open state in the low base state. Similarly, the winning probability in the high base state is 239/240.

In other words, in the high-accuracy/low-base state, the probability that the second starting port 21 will be in the open state is set to be very low, so the game ball that has flown down to the entrance of the second starting port 21 will not enter the second starting port 21. There is a low possibility that the ball will enter the ball, and it is set that there is a high possibility that the ball will pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23 and reach the entrance of the second big prize opening 35. In addition, the possibility that the result of the second special symbol validity judgment will be a small hit does not change whether it is in a high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state) or high accuracy low base state. do not have. That is, the small winning probability does not change regardless of the gaming state (small winning probability: 420/630). Further, the result of the first special symbol validity determination does not have a small hit, and only the result of the second special symbol validity determination has a small win.

The game ball flowing downstream of the first big prize opening 30 through the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32 branches into a passage on the third starting opening 26 side and a passage on the second starting opening 21 side by the branching part. When the game ball that has flowed into the third starting port 26 side passage enters the third starting port 26, a second special symbol validity determination is executed. In addition, in the high-accuracy/low-base state, even if the game ball passes through the gate 28, there is a low possibility that the second starting port 21 will be in the open state. All the balls do not enter the second starting port 21, but flow down to the second big winning port 35 and third out port 34c provided downstream of the second starting port 21.

In addition, if the result of the second special symbol validity judgment executed based on the ball entering the third starting port 26 is a small hit, the second big winning port 35 on the downstream side of the second starting port 21 is , it is in the open state in the opening/closing mode for small winnings shown in FIG. Specifically, an opening operation of 0.3 seconds is performed six times (closing time between opening operations is 0.1 seconds, total opening time is 1.8 seconds). Then, the game ball that has flowed into the second starting port 21 side passage passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 in the closed state, flows down to the second big winning port 35, and is opened due to the small winning game. The ball enters the second grand prize opening 35, which is .

Since the prize balls based on the ball entering the second big winning hole 35 are 10 prize balls for one ball entering, the ball is allowed to enter the second big winning hole 35 during a small winning game. This makes it possible to increase the number of balls held during a high-accuracy, low-base state. In addition, the high-accuracy, low-base state continues at least until the next jackpot occurs based on the special symbol validity judgment, so the longer the high-accuracy, low-base state continues, the more the player is unable to increase the number of balls he or she owns. It becomes possible. In addition, in the high accuracy high base state, it is the second special symbol time shortening state and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to a long time (first special symbol long time state), so the second special symbol validity judgment is The frequency of execution is higher than the frequency of execution of the first special symbol validity determination. In this embodiment, it is possible to obtain on average about 20 prize balls (2 balls entered) by the occurrence of one small winning game. By making this small winning game occur multiple times (many times) until the next jackpot occurs, it is possible to increase the amount of game balls (for example, 200 in 10 games). Moreover, as a result of this, the balls acquired in the small winning game can be added to the balls acquired in the jackpot game as the total acquired balls during the "consecutive game period" in which the right-handed game is continued, making it possible to acquire a larger amount of game balls. Moreover, this makes it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, the second big prize opening 35 located downstream (the most downstream of these) of the gate 28, the first big winning opening 30 for the jackpot (exclusively for the jackpot), and the second starting opening 21 is for the small winning (only for the jackpot). It is said to be a big winning opening (only for small wins). In addition, by arranging the second big prize opening 35, which is a big winning opening for small winnings, downstream of the second starting opening 21, the opening operation (opening/closing control) of the second starting opening 21 allows the second big winning opening to be opened and closed. The number (ratio) of game balls reaching the prize opening 35 can be controlled. Specifically, when a small winning game is executed, the high base state ( The probability that the game ball will enter the second grand prize opening 35 is higher in the high probability low base state than in the low probability high base state and the high probability high base state. In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, by forming a flow path that does not reach the second big prize opening 35 unless the ball passes through the second starting opening 21 (without entering the ball), The effect of opening/closing control of the second starting port 21 is made more effective.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a low probability high base state where a small winning game can occur, the second starting port 21 is configured to hardly be in an open state (it may be configured not to be in an open state at all). It is difficult to adjust the rate of balls entering the second big winning hole 35 when a game occurs by adjusting the ball entering the second starting hole 21. Therefore, a third out port 34c is provided between the second starting port 21 and the second grand prize opening 35, and by making it possible to adjust the rate of balls entering the third out port 34c, the second grand prize winning hole can be adjusted. The rate of ball entry into the mouth 35 can be adjusted.

Furthermore, even in the same right-handed game, by entering the game ball into the second starting port 21, the number of balls held is almost maintained (including a slight increase or decrease) (or the speed of decrease in number of balls held is suppressed) ), a state in which the game is played with the expectation that the result of the first special symbol validity judgment will be a jackpot (advantageous jackpot) (high base state), and a state in which the game ball is entered into the third starting hole 26 and played in a small state. When a hit occurs, the ball enters the second big winning hole 35 to increase the number of balls held, and the player plays the game in the hope that the result of the second special symbol correctness determination will be a jackpot (advantageous jackpot) (high accuracy, low base state), and has diversified gameplay. This also makes it possible to increase interest in the game. Incidentally, for the player, the high-probability low-base state, in which he can increase the number of balls he has, is a more advantageous gaming state than the high-base state. In addition, while continuing the right-handed game, it is possible to transition between a high base state (low-accuracy high base state or high-accuracy high base state) and a high-accuracy low base state, so this also improves the gameplay. Diversify and increase interest in gaming.

Further, the start gate 29 is provided at the most upstream position in the right gaming area 3B by serving also as the gate 28. As a result, when the jackpot standby state is reached, the game ball is allowed to pass through the start gate 29 at any timing without being hindered from passing through the start gate 29 by the second starting port 21, etc., and the jackpot game is started. It becomes possible to do so. In addition, the starting gate 29 and the gate 28 may be provided separately, but in that case, the starting gate 29 may be located upstream or downstream of the gate 28, but the starting gate 29 may be located upstream or downstream of the gate 28. It is necessary to provide it upstream of the second starting port 21, the third starting port 26, and the second big prize winning port 35.

Further, when a right-handed game is to be played, the firing direction indicator 47 is controlled to light up in a predetermined manner to notify that the firing should be performed to the right game area. Furthermore, when a left-handed game is to be played, the firing direction indicator 47 is lit (displayed) controlled in a predetermined manner to notify that the firing should be performed to the left game area. Specifically, the firing direction indicator 47 is composed of two LEDs "yz", and indicates the firing direction by lighting the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that the light should be emitted to the left gaming area as a display mode that turns off both LEDs, such as "y□z□" (for example, □: off, ■: on). can. In addition, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the light should be emitted to the right gaming area as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned on, such as "y z ■" (for example, □: off, ■: on). can.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming states when the identification information (special symbols, performance symbols) is displayed in a variable manner are "low-accuracy low base state", "high-accuracy low base state", " It is possible to control the game to either "low-accuracy, high-base state" or "high-accuracy, high-base state," of which the low-accuracy, low-base state is also called the "normal gaming state," and the high-accuracy, low-base state is also called the "normal gaming state." Also referred to as a "specific gaming state."

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (control processing by the main control section) will be explained based on FIGS. 10 to 46. Note that the counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided in the main control board 80 reads out the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80 and executes it. . As shown in FIG. 10, in the main control main processing, initial settings are first performed (S101). Initial settings include, for example, stack settings, constant settings, interrupt time settings, CPU settings of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, and CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, and various flags, status, and counter settings. Perform a reset, etc. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". In addition, the initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter. In addition, in the examples and drawings, the ordinary design is referred to as "ordinary design", the special design is referred to as "special design", the first special design is referred to as "special design 1" or "first special design", and the second special design is referred to as "special design". 2" or "second special map."

Following the initial setting (S101), interrupts are prohibited (S102), and normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the values of the various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 are updated by adding one. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S104). While interrupts are enabled, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. This interrupt processing (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80 at a cycle of, for example, 4 msec. Then, after the interrupt processing (S105) ends and until the next interrupt processing (S105) starts, the updating processing of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating processing (S103) is repeated. executed. Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU while the interrupt is disabled, the interrupt processing (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, interrupt processing (S105) will be explained using FIG. 11. In the interrupt processing (S105), output processing (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), commands (control signals) etc. set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below are output to the sub control board 90, payout control board 110, etc. do. The commands and the like outputted here include information regarding the gaming state, the result of special symbol validity determination, symbols as jackpot types, fluctuation patterns, and the like. Note that the command consists of, for example, 2 bytes of information. The upper 1 byte is information regarding the type of command, and the lower 1 byte is information regarding the contents of the command.

In the input process (S202) that is performed next to the output process (S201), various sensors (first starting port sensor 20a, second starting port sensor 21a, third starting port sensor 26a) attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mainly used. , the first big winning hole sensor 30a, the second big winning hole sensor 35a, the general ball entering hole sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5)) are read and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as prize ball information. It also captures a detection signal from a lower tray full switch that detects whether the surplus ball tray 62 (also referred to as "lower tray") is full and stores it in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as lower tray full data.

Next, normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S203) is executed. The normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S203) is the same process as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the updating process of the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. This is done both during the period until the next interrupt processing (S105) is started). This gives randomness to the obtained values of various random numbers.

Following the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S203), the starting port sensor detection process (S204), the starting ball entry process (S205), the regular symbol movement process (S206), and the special pattern 1 movement process (S207), which will be described later. ), special figure 2 operation processing (S208), reserved ball number processing (S209), and power outage monitoring processing (S210) are executed. Thereafter, various other processes (S211) are executed, and the interrupt process (S105) is ended. Then, until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (main control section), the processes of S102 to S104 of the main control main process are repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10), and the interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (main control section). Then (after about 4 msec), the interrupt processing (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the commands etc. set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) are output.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
Next, the starting port sensor detection process (S204) will be described using FIG. 12. In the starting port sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether a game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), then the number of normal symbol reserved balls (the number of regular symbols reserved, specifically, the counter that counts the number of regular symbols reserved value) is 4 or more (S302). On the other hand, if it is determined in S301 that the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process advances to S305.

If it is determined in S302 that the number of normal symbols reserved balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), the process advances to S305. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of normal symbols reserved balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), "1" is added to the stored number of normal symbols reserved balls (S303), and the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed. and proceed to S305. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value of the random number counter for normal symbol validity determination (label -TRND-H, Fig. 7 (B)) stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired. Then, the acquired random number value (acquisition information, normal symbol acquisition information) is stored in an address space corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reserved balls in the regular symbol reservation storage section provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

In S305, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, that is, whether the game ball has been detected by the first starting port sensor 20a or the second starting port sensor 21a. Determine (S305). If it is determined in S305 that no game ball has entered the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (NO in S305), the process advances to S309. On the other hand, if it is determined in S305 that the game ball has entered the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (YES in S305), the number of special symbols 1 reserved balls (number of first special symbols reserved, specific In step S306, it is determined whether the value of a counter provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 for counting the number of reserved first special symbols has reached four (the upper limit number). Then, in S306, if it is determined that the number of special map 1 reserved balls has reached 4 (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309. If it is determined in S306 that the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 is less than 4 (NO in S306), 1 is added to the stored number of reserved balls for special figure 1 (S307), and a random number related to special figure 1 is obtained. Processing is performed (S308) and the process proceeds to S309.

In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the random number counter for determining the validity of special symbols (label -TRND-A) stored in the update value storage area of the RAM (not shown), the random number for determining the jackpot type Obtain the counter value (label-TRND-AS) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) (the random number value shown in FIG. 7(A)), and Figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls in the first special figure reservation storage section 85a.

In S309, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the third starting port 26, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the third starting port sensor 26a (S309). If it is determined in S309 that no game ball has entered the third starting port 26 (NO in S309), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S309 that a game ball has entered the third starting port 26 (YES in S309), then the number of special symbols 2 reserved balls (the number of second special symbols reserved, specifically the main control It is determined whether the value of a counter provided in the RAM of the unit 80 for counting the number of second special symbols pending has reached four (upper limit number) (S310). Then, in S310, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special map 2 has reached 4 (YES in S310), the process ends. In S310, if it is determined that the number of special map 2 reserved balls is less than 4 (NO in S310), "1" is added to the stored number of special map 2 reserved balls (S311), and the special map 2 related Random number acquisition processing is performed (S312), and the processing ends.

In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S312), similarly to the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol validity determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is (Label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type determination random number counter (Label-TRND-AS), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (Label-TRND-T1) (shown in Figure 7 (A) Random numbers), and these acquired random numbers are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of special symbols 2 reserved balls in the second special figure reservation storage section 85b.

[Processing at the time of starting ball entry]
Next, the starting ball entering process (S205) will be described using FIG. 13. The game control microcomputer 81 performs the starting ball entry process (S205) following the starting opening sensor detection process (S204). As shown in FIG. 13, in the starting ball entry process (S205), first, it is determined whether the number of special map 2 reserved balls has increased by "1" (S315). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special figure 2 has increased by "1" (YES in S315), the process moves to S316. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for special map 2 in S307 in the starting port sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the second starting port. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S315), the process moves to S319.

In S316, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) in the immediately preceding starting port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit is read ( S316). Next, the obtained random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S317). In S317, among the read random numbers, the value of the random number counter for special symbol validity determination (random number value for special symbol validity determination) is determined to be a jackpot depending on the current gaming state (low probability state or high probability state). If the result of the determination is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is further determined (preliminary judgment). This judgment (preliminary judgment) by S317 is a preliminary judgment (so-called ``holding pre-reading'') that performs a validity judgment (judgment of whether or not it is a jackpot) for the special drawing 2 hold prior to a judgment in the special drawing 2 holding judgment process, which will be described later. ”).

In addition, the prior judgment of whether or not it is a jackpot is based on the jackpot judgment table (see Figure 8 (A)), that is, if it is a high probability state, it is a jackpot judgment table for a high probability state, and if it is a normal state (low probability state). For example, it is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot determination value matches the jackpot determination value based on the normal state jackpot determination table. In addition, as other pre-judgment aspects, as a fluctuation pattern information determination table that can determine fluctuation pattern information, there is a fluctuation pattern information determination table for normal states (for low probability states) and a fluctuation pattern information determination table for high probability states (for high probability states). It is assumed that the variation pattern information determination table has the following. In the preliminary determination, predetermined fluctuation pattern information is selected based on the obtained random number value (the value of a random number counter for special symbol validity determination, etc.) and the fluctuation pattern information determination table according to the gaming state. It is possible to do so. From this selected variation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not there is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, whether a game performance with high jackpot reliability is executed, etc.

Next, in S318, game information (pre-determination information) related to the determination result in S317, specifically, information indicating whether or not the random number value for determining the validity of the special symbol matches the jackpot determination value (jackpot information), Information indicating the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (random value for determining the jackpot type) (jackpot type information), information indicating whether the random value for determining the validity of the special symbol matches the small hit determination value (small hit information ), command data including information indicating the value of the variable pattern random number counter (variable pattern random number value), etc. is generated as a special chart 2 starting ball entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S318). In addition, as the special figure 2 starting ball entry command, part or all of the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number read out in S316 may be sent as is to the sub-control board, or the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number Instead of transmitting as is, game information (for example, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern information, etc.) acquired based on the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number may be transmitted.

In addition, by analyzing the special chart 2 start ball entry command sent from the main control unit 80 by the sub-control unit 90, it is possible to determine whether the information is related to a jackpot, what type of jackpot it is, and information related to a small hit. The sub-control unit 90 can identify whether or not there is one. In addition to this, in this embodiment, by analyzing the special pattern 2 starting ball entry command, it is possible to determine whether or not the obtained special pattern 2 acquisition random number will be a jackpot when judged in a high probability state, and whether the special pattern 2 acquisition random number will be a jackpot or not It is possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot when judged based on the probability state. As a result, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 starting ball entry command as pending (production pending information), pre-determines the production pending information at a specific timing, and when it is determined whether it is correct or not in a low probability state. It becomes possible to determine whether performance suspension information that is determined to be a jackpot is stored.

In addition, from the perspective of fraud prevention, among the acquired random values read in S316, the random value for determining the validity of the special symbol is not sent as is to the sub-control unit, but the value of the random number counter for determining the other jackpot type (the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type) Generate command data as a special chart 2 starting ball entry command, including information indicating the random number value for type determination), the value of the variation pattern random number counter (the variation pattern random number value), and information indicating the result of preliminary determination. It is possible to set

Next, in S319, similarly to the process related to the above-mentioned special figure 2, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 has increased by "1" (S319). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 has increased by "1" (YES in S319), the process moves to S321. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls of special map 1 in S311 in the starting port sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the first starting port. On the other hand, if it is determined in S319 that the number of special map 1 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S319), the process is ended as is. The processing in S321 to S323 is the same processing as in S316 to S318 described above for the special figure 1. That is, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the starting opening sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit is read out (S321), A preliminary determination is made regarding the read random number value (S322). Then, command data including game information related to this preliminary determination is generated as a special chart 1 starting ball entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). Incidentally, the preliminary determination (pending pre-reading) in S322 is performed prior to the validity determination in the special figure 1 validity determination process to be described later.

[General figure movement processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal figure operation process (S206) shown in FIG. 14 following the start ball entry process (S205). In the normal pattern movement processing (S206), the processing regarding the normal pattern display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and "normal pattern movement status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these stages. . Then, when the "common pattern movement status" is "1" (YES in S401), the normal pattern standby process (S402) is performed, and when the "common pattern movement status" is "2" (S401 NO in S403, YES in S403), perform the normal symbol fluctuation process (S404), and if the "Normal pattern movement status" is "3" (NO in both S401 and S403, YES in S405), the normal symbol is confirmed. Processing (S406) is performed, and if the "normal figure action status" is "4" (all of S401, S403, and S405 are NO), normal electric accessory processing (S407) is performed. Note that the normal figure action status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
Next, the normal symbol standby process (S402) will be explained using FIG. 15. In the normal symbol standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (S501), and if it is determined to be "0" in S501 (YES in S501), the process finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in S501 that it is not "0" (NO in S501), a normal symbol validity determination process to be described later is performed (S502), and then a normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection process, with reference to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table shown in FIG. Select a symbol variation pattern. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a low base state (states A and C), a normal symbol fluctuation pattern in which the normal symbol fluctuation time is 3 seconds is selected. Further, following the normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S503), the below-described normal symbol random number shift process is performed (S504), and then the normal symbol variation start process is performed (S505), and the process ends. In the normal symbol variation start process (S505), the variable display of the normal symbol is started in the normal symbol variation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". In addition, in the normal symbol variation start process, a normal symbol variation start command is set in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of variation of the normal symbols.

[Normal symbol validity determination process]
Next, the normal symbol validity determination process (S502) will be explained using FIG. In the normal symbol validity determination process (S502), first, the value (label -TRND-H) of the random number counter for normal symbol validity determination stored in the regular symbol reservation storage unit is read (S601). Next, it is determined whether the state B flag is ON, that is, whether the gaming state is a high base state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state) (S602). If it is determined in S602 that the state B flag is ON, that is, in a high base state (YES in S602), the table for state B (hit determination It is determined whether or not it is a hit based on the high probability normal pattern correctness judgment based on the value "0" to "238" (S604), and the process moves to S605. That is, it is determined whether the read value of the random number counter for normal symbol validity determination (label -TRND-H) matches any of the hit determination values.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S602 that the state B flag is not ON, that is, it is a low base state (NO in S602), state A (state C) is selected in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 8(C). It is determined whether or not it is a hit based on a low probability normal pattern correctness judgment based on a table (with a hit judgment value of "0" to "119") (S603), and the process moves to S605. Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal pattern correctness determination (S603, S604) is a hit (normal pattern hit) or not (S605). A normal symbol (ordinary symbol) is determined (S606), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a hit (ordinary figure hit) in S605 (YES at S605), the winning ordinary symbol (ordinary figure per symbol) to be stopped and displayed is determined (S607), and the ordinary figure hit flag is turned ON (S608). ), the process ends.

[Normal pattern random number shift processing]
Next, the normal symbol random number shift process (S504) will be explained using FIG. In the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each common symbol reservation in the common symbol reservation storage unit is shifted one place from the current position to the side from which it is read (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest-level pending memory in the common picture pending storage section, is made empty ("0"), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth pending common picture is cleared to 0 (S703 ), the process ends. In this way, the reservations for common maps are cleared in the order of reservation.

[Normal symbol fluctuation processing]
Next, the normal symbol fluctuation processing (S404) will be explained using FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol fluctuation processing (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S801), and if it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in S801), the process is performed. Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time has elapsed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802), the normal symbol movement status is set to "3" (S803), and then the normal symbol fluctuation display is Other processing such as stopping at the display result (hit normal symbol or missed normal symbol) according to the determination result of the random number for normal symbol validity determination is performed (S804), and the processing ends.

[Normal pattern confirmation process]
Next, the normal symbol determination process (S406) will be explained using FIG. 19. In the normal symbol confirmation process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit flag is ON (S901). If it is determined that the ordinary figure flag is not ON (NO in S901), the ordinary figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the common map hit flag is ON (YES in S901), then it is determined whether the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in a high base state (S902). If it is determined in S902 that the status B flag is ON (YES in S902), the opening pattern for status B (for high base status) is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21). (S903), move to S904. The opening pattern for state B (high base state) is an opening pattern in which opening for 1.8 seconds is repeated three times, as described above. Therefore, the second starting port opening counter that counts the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened is set to "3".

On the other hand, if it is determined that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S902), the opening pattern for the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) is for states A and C (low base state). Set the pattern (S906) and proceed to S904. The release pattern for state A and state C (low base state) is, as described above, an release pattern in which the release is performed three times for 0.9 seconds. Therefore, "3" is set in the second starting port opening counter. In S904, the normal drawing operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this process is finished.

[Normal electric accessory processing]
Next, the normal electric accessory processing (S407) will be explained using FIG. 20. In the normal electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the normal figure per end flag is ON (S1001). The common symbol winning end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second starting port 21 has ended in the auxiliary game executed as a winning result. If it is determined that the normal map hit end flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is being opened (S1002). If it is determined in S1002 that the second starting port 21 is not open (NO in S1002), then it is determined whether it is time to open the second starting port 21 (S1003), and if it is determined that it is not time to open the second starting port 21. If determined (NO in S1003), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1003 that it is time to open the second starting port (YES in S1003), control is executed to open the second starting port (S1004), and the process ends. In addition, if it is determined in S1002 that the second starting port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), it is determined whether it is time to close the second starting port 21 (that is, after opening the second starting port 21, It is determined whether the predetermined opening time has elapsed (S1005), and if it is determined that it is not the time to close the second starting port (NO in S1005), the process ends. If it is determined in S1005 that it is time to close the second starting port (YES in S1005), a process is performed to close the second starting port 21 (closed) (S1006), and the value of the second starting port opening counter is is decremented by 1 (S1007), and the process moves to S1008.

In S1008, it is determined whether the value of the second starting port opening counter is "0" (S1008). If it is determined in S1008 that the value of the opening counter is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process is ended in order to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1008 that the value of the open counter is "0" (YES in S1008), a normal pattern per end process is performed to end the auxiliary game (S1009), and a normal pattern per end flag is set ( S1010), the process ends. Note that the second starting port opening counter becomes "0" when the second starting port 21 is opened (opening operation of the movable member 23) three times in state B (high base state), and in state A. Also during state C (low base state), when the second starting port 21 is opened three times, it becomes "0". On the other hand, if it is determined in S1001 that the normal pattern hit end flag is ON (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 has been completed the number of times set in S903 or S906. , the end flag per common figure is turned OFF (S1011), the flag per common figure is turned OFF (S1012), the general figure operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) will be executed again as the normal symbol operation process (FIG. 14).

[Special figure 1 movement processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special pattern 1 movement process (S207) following the normal pattern movement process (S206). This special figure 1 operation process will be explained using FIGS. 21 to 29. In the special figure 1 operation process (S207), as shown in FIG. 21, the process regarding the special symbol display section 41 and the grand prize device (first grand prize device 31 and second grand prize device 36) is divided into five stages, "Special figure 1 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of those stages. Then, if the "Special figure 1 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), special symbol 1 standby processing (S1102) is performed, and if the "Special figure 1 operation status" is "2", (NO in S1101, YES in S1103), performs special symbol 1 fluctuation processing (S1104), and if "special symbol 1 operation status" is "3" (NO in both S1101 and S1103, YES in S1105) ), perform the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106), and if the "special symbol 1 operation status" is "4" (NO in S1101, S1103, S1105, YES in S1107), the special electric symbol as a jackpot game Accessory processing 1 (S1108) is performed, and if the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5" (all of S1101, S1103, S1105, and S1107 are NO), the processing is finished. In addition, the special figure 1 operation status is "1" in the initial setting. In addition, since a small hit is not set as a result of the first special symbol validity determination, special electric accessory processing 2 is not executed in the special figure 1 action processing, but a small hit is set as a result of the first special symbol validity determination. You may. In this case, when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5", the special electric accessory processing 2 as a small winning game is executed.

[Special symbol 1 standby process]
Next, special symbol 1 standby processing (S1102) will be explained using FIG. 22. In the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls at the first starting port 20 (namely, the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls) is "0" (S1201). If it is determined in S1201 that the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 is "0", that is, there is no memory of the random number counter value obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 (YES in S1201), then , it is determined whether the special figure 2 is being played (S1207). Then, in S1207, if it is determined that the special figure 2 is being played (YES in S1207), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1207 that the special map 2 is not being played (NO in S1207), the process of setting the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a standby screen is in progress (demonstration screen for waiting for customers is being executed). (S1208), and if it is determined that the screen is on standby (YES in S1208), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1208 that the standby screen is not displayed (NO in S1208), a standby screen setting process for displaying the standby screen is executed (S1209), and the process ends.

In addition, if it is determined in S1201 that the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 is not "0", that is, there is one or more memory of the random number counter value obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 (in S1201 NO), special figure 1 validity judgment processing (S1203), special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204), special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1205), and special figure 1 variation start processing (S1206), which will be described later, are performed in this order. Here, "Special figure 2 (second special symbol) is not being played" means that Special figure 2 is not being displayed in a variable manner (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved balls of Special figure 2 is "0". It means that. Of course, this means that the jackpot game and small win game related to special drawing 2 are not being executed.

[Special figure 1 validity judgment process]
Next, the special figure 1 validity determination process (S1203) will be explained using FIG. In the special figure 1 validity judgment process (S1203), first, the determination value is stored in the lowest area of the first special figure reservation storage section 85a of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first piece of the first special figure reservation). The value (label -TRND-A) of the random number counter for special symbol validity determination (oldest memory) is read out (S1601). Next, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON or not, that is, whether or not the second special symbol is performing a fluctuation display related to the jackpot (S1602). In S1602, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1602), the process moves to S1607.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when one special symbol is performing a variable display related to a jackpot, in determining whether or not the other special symbol is a jackpot, it is not judged whether or not it is a jackpot, but whether it is a small hit or a jackpot. It is considered either a miss (that is, it is not judged as a jackpot). In addition, since there is no small hit as a result of the first special symbol validity determination, when the second special symbol is executing a variable display related to a jackpot, the result of the first special symbol validity determination executed during that time is: Everything will come off. If it is determined in S1602 that the special pattern 2 jackpot variation flag is not ON, that is, the second special symbol does not display a variation display related to the jackpot (NO in S1602), then whether or not the probability variation flag is ON, i.e. It is determined whether the state is a high probability state (S1603). If it is determined in S1603 that the probability change flag is not ON, that is, it is in a low probability state (NO in S1603), the jackpot determination for the normal state (for the low probability state) in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8(A)) Judgment is made based on the table (the jackpot judgment values are "3" and "397") (S1604). On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability change flag is ON (YES in S1603), a judgment is made based on the jackpot judgment table for high probability state among the jackpot judgment tables (FIG. 8(A)) (S1605). In the jackpot judgment table for high probability states, the jackpot judgment values are "3", "5", "7", "311", "313", "317", "337", "397", "449". , "503".

In S1606, it is determined whether the result of the jackpot determination (S1604, S1605) is a "jackpot" (S1606), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (YES in S1606), the value of the random number counter for jackpot type determination (label -TRND- AS), the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8(B) (S1608), the jackpot symbol is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (S1609), FIG. 1 The jackpot fluctuation flag is turned on (S1610) and the process ends. In addition, in the case of judgment regarding the first special symbol, the jackpot type is judged using the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol, and in the case of the judgment regarding the second special symbol, the jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. The jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table. In addition, if it is determined that the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is a jackpot, one of the 15R 1st jackpot, 4R 2nd jackpot, 4R 3rd jackpot, and 4R 4th jackpot will be executed. . In addition, if it is determined that the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is a jackpot, one of the 15R 5th jackpot, 2R 6th jackpot, and 2R 7th jackpot will be executed (Fig. 8(B)). On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination (S1604, S1605) is not a "jackpot" (NO in S1606), the process moves to S1607. In S1607, a missed symbol is determined (S1607), and the process ends.

Here, in the first embodiment, the first special symbol is a first jackpot variation flag indicating that the first special symbol is executing a variation display related to a jackpot (a variation display in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed). and a second jackpot variation flag indicating that the second special symbol is executing a variation display related to a jackpot (a variation display in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed), and the main control unit 80 The corresponding flag is set in the jackpot fluctuation flag storage means provided in the RAM. In addition, as a small hit fluctuation flag, a second small hit fluctuation flag indicating that the second special symbol is performing a fluctuation display related to a small hit (a fluctuation display in which the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed). The corresponding flag is set in the small hit fluctuation flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Then, when the jackpot fluctuation flag is set for one special symbol (that is, when the fluctuation related to the jackpot is being displayed), the process of determining whether or not it is a jackpot is performed in the determination of the validity of the other special symbol. Not performed. That is, control is not performed such that both special symbols perform variable displays related to jackpots in parallel. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which too much gaming profit is given to a player in a very short period of time, and to appropriately suppress the gambling nature.

[Special figure 1 variation pattern selection process]
In the special symbol 1 standby process (FIG. 22), following the special symbol 1 validity determination process (S1203), the special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1204). As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204), first, it is determined whether the gaming state is state A (whether it is a low probability low base state or not) (S1701). If it is determined in S1701 that the state is A (YES in S1701), then it is determined whether the special pattern 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1702), and if the special pattern 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON. If it is determined (YES in S1702), refer to the state A jackpot table (the part of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 that corresponds to state A and jackpot) and calculate the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label -TRND-T1). A variation pattern is selected based on (S1703). Note that once the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. Further, in the first embodiment, one of the fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 having different lengths of fluctuation time is selected by the state A jackpot table.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special chart 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S1702), then it is determined whether the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) is either 1 or 2 (S1705). If it is determined in S1705 that the number of reservations is either 1 or 2 (YES in S1705), state A first reservation number out table (state A and out of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 1 and 2), and select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). In the first embodiment, variation patterns P4 to P7 are selected.

In addition, if it is determined in S1705 that the number of reservations is neither 1 nor 2, that is, the number of reservations is either 3 or 4 (NO in S1705), the state A second reservation number removal table (Fig. 9), a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label -TRND-T1). As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "3" or "4", the fluctuation time is shorter than when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "1" or "2". There is a high possibility that a fluctuation pattern will be selected. In the first embodiment, variation patterns P8 to P11 are selected. As a result, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of balls held is activated, and the average fluctuation time is shortened.

In addition, if it is determined in S1701 that the gaming state is not state A (low probability low base state) (NO in S1701), then check whether the gaming state is in state B (low probability high base state, high probability high base state). Determine (S1708). In S1708, if it is determined that the state is B (S1708), then it is determined whether the special chart 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1709), and if it is determined that the special chart 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON ( YES in S1709), refer to the state B jackpot table (part of the fluctuation pattern table shown in Figure 9 that corresponds to state B and jackpot), and change based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). Select a pattern (S1710). In the first embodiment, variation patterns P15 to P16 are selected. In S1709, if it is determined that the special chart 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1709), refer to the state B out-of-order table (the part of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 that corresponds to state B and out-off). Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1711). In the first embodiment, variation patterns P17 to P19 are selected.

Also, if it is determined in S1708 that the gaming state is not state B (low probability high base state, high probability high base state), that is, the gaming state is determined to be state C (high probability low base state) (NO in S1708) Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1712), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1712), the status C jackpot table (see FIG. 9) is A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label -TRND-T1) by referring to the part of the variation pattern table shown that corresponds to state C and jackpot (S1710). In the first embodiment, variation pattern P23 is selected. If it is determined in S1712 that the special drawing 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1712), refer to the table for state C loss (the part of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 that corresponds to state C and loss). Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1714). In the first embodiment, variation pattern P24 is selected.

After selecting a variation pattern as described above, other processing shown in FIG. 24 is executed (S1704), and the processing ends. In addition, in other processing (S1704), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and is sent to the sub control board 90 through output processing (S201).

[Special figure 1 random number shift processing]
Next, special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1205) will be explained using FIG. 26. In the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage section 85a is set to one level lower (for example, when the first special figure reservation storage section 85a consists of an address space corresponding to addresses "0000" to "0003") , address "0000" side) (S1802). Then, set "0" in the highest address space of the first special figure reservation storage section 85a, that is, (if the upper limit number is stored), the RAM corresponding to the fourth of the second special figure reservation. The area is cleared to 0 (S1803), and this process ends. After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206) of FIG. 22 is executed. In the special figure 1 variation start process (S1206), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "2", a variation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the variation display of the first special symbol is started.

[Special symbol 1 fluctuation processing]
Next, the special symbol 1 fluctuation processing (S1104) will be explained using FIG. 27. As shown in Figure 27, in the special symbol 1 fluctuation processing (S1104), first, the fluctuation time of special symbol 1 (the fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in S1204 of Figure 22, see Figure 9) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S1901). In S1901, if it is determined that the variation time of special figure 1 has not elapsed (NO in S1901), special figure 1 variation interruption processing is performed (S1914), and the process ends. On the other hand, in S1901, if it is determined that the variation time of special map 1 has passed (YES in S1901), the process moves to S1903. In S1903, a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S1903), and the process moves to S1904.

Next, in S1904, it is determined whether the status B flag is ON (S1905). If it is determined in S1904 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S1904), the value of the state B counter (state B fluctuation counter) that counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during state B (high base state) is subtracted by 1 (S1905), and then it is determined whether the value of the state B counter is "0" (S1906). If it is determined in S1906 that the value of the state B counter is "0" (YES in S1906), the state B flag is turned OFF (S1907) and the process proceeds to S1908. By turning off the state B flag, the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state. Specifically, if it is in the low certainty high base state, it shifts to the low certainty low base state (normal state). In addition, in the high-accuracy, high-base state, the state B counter is set to "10000", so even if the counter is subtracted every time there is a change, the value of the state B counter will not actually become "0". do not have. That is, the high probability and high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

In S1908, the special symbol 1 operation status is set to "3" (S1908), and other operations such as stopping the fluctuating display of the special symbol according to the judgment result of the random number for determining the validity of the special symbol and the random number for determining the jackpot type, etc. (S1909) and ends the process.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing]
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) is performed when a jackpot game or a small hit game related to special figure 2 is executed while the special figure 1 is being displayed. This is a process in which the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol 1 is temporarily interrupted, and when the jackpot game or small win game ends, the interrupted measurement is restarted. As a result, while the jackpot game or small win game related to one special symbol is being executed, the win/fail determination process and the variable display related to the other special symbol are not executed.

The special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) will be explained using FIG. In the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON or not (S2901), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 interruption flag is not ON (NO in S2901), then the special It is determined whether or not the jackpot flag in FIG. 2 is ON, that is, whether or not the jackpot game related to special drawing 2 is being executed (S2902). If it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S2902), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON or not, that is, the small hit game related to the special figure 2 is being executed. It is determined whether or not (S2909). In S2909, when it is determined that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON, that is, neither the jackpot game nor the small hit game related to the special figure 2 is being executed (NO in S2909), the process is ended. Then, the variable display of special figure 1 is continued. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2902), and if it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2909), the special figure 1 The interruption flag is turned ON (S2903), the measurement of the special figure 1 variation time is interrupted (S2904), and the process is finished. Thereby, the variable display of the special figure 1 can be temporarily interrupted.

In addition, if it is determined in S2901 that the special pattern 1 interruption flag is ON, that is, the fluctuating display of the first special pattern is already being interrupted (YES in S2901), whether the special pattern 2 jackpot flag is ON or not. Determine (S2905). If it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2905), it is determined that the jackpot game related to the special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S2905), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (S2906). If it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small winning flag is ON (YES in S2906), it is determined that the small winning game related to the special drawing 2 is still being executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small winning flag is not ON (NO in S2906), it is determined that the jackpot game or small winning game related to the special figure 2 has ended, and the special figure 1 interruption flag is turned OFF. (S2907), restarts measurement of special figure 1 variation time (S2908), and ends the process. As a result, it is possible to restart the suspended variation display (time measurement of variation time) of the first special symbol.

Here, in the present embodiment 1, as the interruption flag, there is a special figure 1 interruption flag (also referred to as "first interruption flag") indicating that the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is being interrupted, and a special symbol 1 interruption flag (also referred to as "first interruption flag") of the second special symbol. A special figure 2 interruption flag (also referred to as a "second interruption flag") indicating that the variable display is being interrupted, and a flag corresponding to the interruption flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80. is set (stored).

[Special symbol 1 confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) will be explained using FIG. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S2001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S2001), the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag indicating that the jackpot fluctuation related to the first special symbol is being displayed is turned OFF (S2002), and the first The special symbol 1 jackpot flag indicating execution of the jackpot game related to the special symbol is turned ON (S2003), and the process moves to S2004. As a result, in the special drawing 1, it is possible to indicate that the fluctuating display related to the jackpot is ended (the jackpot is confirmed) and the transition to the jackpot game is started.

In S2004, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 15R jackpot (S2004), and if it is determined that it is a 15R jackpot (YES in S2004), the round to be executed during the jackpot game (in the mode where one round is opened once), A round counter that counts the number of times (one round is from opening to closing of the jackpot) is set to "15" (S2005), and a jackpot opening command is set to start the jackpot game (S2006). ), sets the special figure 1 operation status to "4" (S2007), and ends the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2004 that it is not a 15R jackpot (NO in S2004), the jackpot type is a 4R jackpot, so the value of the round counter is set to "4" (S2008), and the process moves to S2006. Further, a stop command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 at the timing of stopping the special symbols that are displayed in a variable manner. By receiving this stop command, the sub-control board 90 can grasp that the variable display of the special symbols has ended. Note that this will result in a jackpot waiting state. In addition, if it is determined in S2001 that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S2001), neither the jackpot game nor the small hit game will start. is set to "1" (S2009), and the process ends.

Here, in the first embodiment, as a jackpot flag, a special figure 1 jackpot flag ("first jackpot A special figure 2 jackpot flag (also called a "second jackpot flag") indicating that the result of the judgment regarding the second special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot game related to the jackpot is being executed. When a jackpot game is executed, a jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored). In addition, as a small hit flag, a special figure 2 small hit flag (also known as a "small hit flag") indicates that the result of the judgment regarding the second special symbol is a small hit and a small win game related to the small win is being executed. When a small winning game is executed, a small winning flag corresponding to the small winning flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored).

Here, the round display 45 is composed of three LEDs, a 2R lamp, a 4R lamp, and a 15R lamp, and the corresponding lamps are lit and displayed at the timing when the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, in the case of a 4R second jackpot, the display mode will be "2R△4R▲15R△" (for example, ▲: lit, △: off). Next, the special figure 2 movement process (S211) etc. will be explained using FIGS. 30 to 39. In the special figure 2 movement process (S211), the special figure 1 movement process (S211) shown in FIGS. Since the processing is performed in the same flow as S206), etc., a simplified explanation will be given below.

[Special figure 2 movement processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, the special figure 2 movement process (S208) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 movement process (S207) shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 operation process (S208) following the special figure 1 operation process (S207). The pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment can perform variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel by these special symbol 1 operation processing and special symbol 2 operation processing. That is, the expiration of the first special symbol reservation and the expiration of the second special symbol reservation ("variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol", "first special symbol validity judgment and second special symbol") It is possible to execute the judgment of validity and the judgment of validity in parallel. In addition, in the first embodiment, the validity determination based on the ball entering the second starting port (the second special symbol validity determination) is better than the validity determination based on the ball entering the first starting port (the first special symbol validity determination). (Figure 8(B)).

As shown in FIG. 30, similar to the special figure 1 operation process (S207), the processing regarding the special symbol display section 41 and the grand prize device (first grand prize device 31 and second grand prize device 36) is divided into five stages. "Special figure 2 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each stage. Then, if the "Special figure 2 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1151), special symbol 2 standby processing (S1152) is performed, and if the "Special figure 2 operation status" is "2", (NO in S1151, YES in S1153), performs special symbol 2 fluctuation processing (S1154), and if "special symbol 2 operation status" is "3" (NO in S1151 and S1153, YES in S1155) ), perform the special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156), and if the "special symbol 2 operation status" is "4" (NO in S1151, S1153, S1155, YES in S1157), the special electric symbol as a jackpot game Perform accessory processing 1 (S1108), and if "special figure 2 operation status" is "5" (all of S1151, S1153, S1155, S1157 are NO), special electric accessory processing as a small winning game 2 (S1109). In addition, the special figure 2 operation status is "1" in the initial setting. Since there is a small hit in the result of the second special symbol validity determination, the special figure 2 operation process has a special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) that is not present in the special figure 1 operation process.

Here, the special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108) is a common process for the special figure 1 operation process (S206) and the special figure 2 operation process (S211), and the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109) is Only the special figure 2 movement process (S211) is processed. This is because although the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment can execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel, the jackpot game related to the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. This is because the jackpot game related to the 2 special symbols cannot be executed in parallel (only one of them can be executed). In this embodiment, the result of the first special symbol validity determination does not include a small hit, but as another aspect, the result of the first special symbol validity determination may include a small win. In this case, like the jackpot game, the small win game related to the first special symbol and the small win game related to the second special symbol cannot be executed in parallel (only one of them can be executed).

[Special symbol 2 standby process]
The special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) shown in FIG. 31 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) shown in FIG. 22, so the explanation will be omitted.

[Special figure 2 validity judgment process]
The special figure 2 validity determination process (S1253) shown in FIG. 32 is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 validity determination process (S1203) shown in FIG. However, since this process is related to the special symbol 2, in S1301, the lowest area of the second special symbol reservation storage section 85b of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first of the second special symbol reservation) is Read out the stored random number counter value (label -TRND-A) for special symbol validity determination. In addition, since the result of the second special symbol validity determination includes a small hit, if it is determined that the result of the second special symbol validity determination is not a jackpot (S1304), then in S1305, the second special symbol validity determination It is determined whether the result is a small hit (S1305). When it is determined that it is a small hit in S1305 (YES in S1305), the small winning symbol is determined (S1306), the special figure 2 small winning fluctuation flag is turned ON (S1307), and the process is finished. Other processes are the same as the special figure 1 validity determination process (S1203).

[Special figure 2 variation pattern selection process]
As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254) follows the same flow as the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204) shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 (S1401 to S1420). )I do. Therefore, detailed explanation of this process will be omitted. However, since this process is related to the second special symbol, refer to the column corresponding to the second special symbol in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. to select the fluctuation pattern. Further, since the result of the second special symbol validity determination includes a small win, when it is determined that the small win variation flag is ON, a variation pattern is selected from the small win table according to the gaming state.

Furthermore, in state C, the game is played mainly by the variable display of the second special symbol (determination of the validity of the second special symbol). Therefore, in state C, there are more types of variation patterns (variation time) of the second special symbol than variation patterns of the first special symbol, and variation patterns of various times (that can execute various game effects) are selected. It is possible. Moreover, the variation time of the first special symbol is configured to be longer than the variation time of the second special symbol, thereby reducing the variation efficiency of the first special symbol. On the other hand, in state A and state B, the game is mainly performed based on the variable display of the first special symbol (determination of validity of the first special symbol). Therefore, in state A and state B, the variation pattern of the first special symbol has more types of variation patterns (variation time) than the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and the variation pattern of the first special symbol has more types of variation patterns (variation time) than the variation pattern of the second special symbol. (feasible) variation patterns can be selected. Therefore, in state A and state B, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is simple (few types). Further, the variation time of the second special symbol is configured to be longer than the variation time of the first special symbol, thereby reducing the variation efficiency of the second special symbol.

In addition, since states A and B are game states in which the game is mainly performed by displaying fluctuations of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function of the second special symbol is inactive, and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is It is set for a long time. Specifically, in states A and B, when the second special symbol validity determination is executed and the result of the validity determination is a jackpot, the variable display time of the second special symbol is set to 110 seconds. (P12 or P20). This is set to a shorter variation time than the longest variation time set as the variation display time of the first special symbol when the result of the first special symbol validity determination is a jackpot in state A. Further, in state B, the variable time is set to be shorter than the longest variable time that is set as the variable display time of the first special symbol when the result of the first special symbol validity determination is a jackpot.

In states A and B, the second special symbol validity determination is not the main validity determination, but if the fluctuation time is set too long, the player who made the validity determination may himself execute the jackpot game related to the jackpot. There is a possibility that you will end up playing the game. Therefore, if the result of the judgment is a jackpot, instead of setting an unnecessarily long variation time, the variation time (the longest one) is set for the main first special symbol. Set a shorter fluctuation time than . As a result, if the result of the second special symbol validity determination is a jackpot, a variable time is set in which the player can wait, and the player is not put at a disadvantage such as not being able to earn the profit from the jackpot that he or she has earned. do not have. Furthermore, this type of control is used because the probability of a jackpot occurring is low and the profit that can be obtained is large.

Further, in states A and B, if the result of the second special symbol validity determination is a small hit, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 1000 seconds (P13 or P21). This is set to a longer variation time than the longest variation time that can be set for the main first special symbol in state A. Further, the variation time is set to be longer than the longest variation time that can be set for the first special symbol that is the main character in state B. Of the variable display time of the second special symbol that is not the subject in states A and B, the case where the judgment result of the second special symbol is a small hit is set to a longer variable display time than the case where it is a jackpot or a miss. Set.

Since states A and B are mainly based on the first special symbol validity determination which does not have a small hit as a result of the validity determination, it is not desirable that small hits occur frequently due to execution of the second special symbol validity determination. In addition, if there is a situation where small hits may occur frequently, a malicious player may execute the second special symbol validity determination even though the game state is mainly based on the first special symbol validity determination. There is a risk that players may gain gaming profits due to small hits. For example, if a player plays a right-handed game in a gaming state in which a left-handed game should be played, there is a risk that the player will unfairly gain gaming profits due to an inappropriate game. In order to prevent such a situation, in states A and B, if the result of the second special symbol validity determination that is not the subject is a small hit, by setting the fluctuation time to a long time (the longest time), This prevents small hits (small winning games) from occurring frequently. Furthermore, since the gaming profit that can be obtained by one small winning game is not so large, the player who generates the small winning does not suffer much damage.

Further, in states A and B, if the result of the second special symbol validity determination is incorrect, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 600 seconds (P14 or P22). This is set to a longer variation time than the longest variation time that can be set for the main first special symbol in state A. Further, the variation time is set to be longer than the longest variation time that can be set for the first special symbol that is the main character in state B. In addition, the variable display time of the second special symbol that is not the subject in states A and B is shorter than when the judgment result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and longer than when it is a jackpot. Set to . When the result of the second special symbol validity determination is a miss, by setting the fluctuation time of the second special symbol to a long time, the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol is reduced, and the game state where left-handed game should be performed is reduced. To prevent a player from playing an inappropriate game such as playing a right-handed game. In addition, as another aspect, the jackpot and the loss may be set to the same fluctuation time (for example, both may be set to 110 seconds, or both may be set to 600 seconds).

In this special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), after selecting a variation pattern, other processes (S1404) are performed and this process is finished. In other processing (S1404), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and is sent to the sub control board 90 through output processing (S201).

[Special figure 2 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage section 85b is shifted to the lower side by one (S1502). Then, set "0" in the highest address space of the second special figure reservation storage section 85b, that is, (if the upper limit number is stored), the RAM corresponding to the fourth of the second special figure reservation. The area is cleared to 0 (S1503), and this process ends. After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1256) of FIG. 31 is executed. In the special figure 2 variation start process (S1256), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "2", the special figure 2 variation start command is set to the output buffer of RAM, and the variation display of the second special symbol is started. do.

[Special symbol 2 fluctuation processing]
The special symbol 2 fluctuation processing (S1154) shown in FIG. 36 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 fluctuation processing (S1104) shown in FIG. 27 (S1951 to S1959). Therefore, detailed explanation of this process will be omitted.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing]
The special figure 2 variation interruption process (S1952) shown in FIG. 37 is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 variation interruption process (S1902) shown in FIG. 28 (S2951 to S2959). Therefore, detailed explanation of this process will be omitted.

[Special design 2 confirmation process]
The special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) shown in FIG. 38 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) shown in FIG. 29 (S2051 to S2067). Therefore, detailed explanation of this process will be omitted. However, since the special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) is a process related to the special symbol 2, the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) is different from the jackpot type (round counter setting process) and the special symbol 2 small hit fluctuation flag. Although the processing when it is determined that it is ON is different, it is as shown in FIG. 38.

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (jackpot game)]
Next, special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108) will be explained using FIG. 39. In the special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108), first, a jackpot game start processing to be described later is executed (S2101), and the process moves to S2102. In S2102, it is determined whether the jackpot start flag is ON (S2102), and if it is determined that the jackpot start flag is not ON (NO in S2102), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2102 that the jackpot start flag is ON (YES in S2102), then it is determined whether the jackpot end flag is ON (S2105). Here, the jackpot start flag is a flag that turns ON when the player shoots a game ball into the right gaming area 3B at an arbitrary timing and passes the game ball through the start gate 29 in the jackpot standby state. . After the special symbol is confirmed and stopped as a jackpot symbol and becomes a jackpot, a game ball is passed through a start gate to turn on a jackpot start flag and a jackpot game progresses (a round game is started). Here, if the game ball is not allowed to pass through the start gate 29 after the jackpot is achieved, the gaming machine is maintained in a jackpot standby state in which the jackpot can be executed. During this time, the player can leave his/her seat and take a break such as going to the restroom, having a drink, or making a phone call. Then, after the end of the break, the player can shoot the game ball at any timing and allow the game ball to pass through the start gate 29, thereby making it possible to proceed with the jackpot game. Further, the jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that all openings of the jackpot device (first jackpot device 31) have been completed (the jackpot game has ended) in the jackpot game.

If it is determined in S2103 that the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2103), then it is determined whether the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30) is open or not (S2104), and it is determined that it is not open. If so (NO in S2104), is it time to open the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30) (round start time), that is, whether it is time to pass through the start gate 29 and start the first round? Alternatively, it is determined whether the interval time between rounds has elapsed and it is time to start the next round (next opening) (S2105). If it is determined in S2105 that it is not the round start time (NO in S2105), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2105 that it is time to start the round (YES in S2105), a round start command is set (S2106), a big prize opening opening process is performed (S2107), and the process ends. As a result, the first jackpot 30 is opened according to the opening pattern (see FIG. 6) depending on the type of jackpot.

If it is determined in S2104 that the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30) is open (YES in S2104), the number of balls entering the big winning hole in that round is the specified maximum number of balls entering (this implementation In Example 1, it is determined whether or not the number has reached 10 per round (S2111). If it is determined that the specified number of balls entered (10) has not been reached (NO in S2111), then whether or not it is time to close the grand prize opening (first grand prize opening 30), that is, whether or not the grand prize opening It is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed since the opening of the terminal (S2112). If it is determined in S2112 that the opening time of the big prize opening has not elapsed (NO in S2112), the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2111 that the specified number of balls entered (10) has been reached (YES in S2111), or if it is determined that the opening time of the grand prize opening has elapsed (YES in S2112), That is, when it is determined that either of the two round end conditions is satisfied, a process is performed to close the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30) (S2113). Next, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2114), and it is determined whether the value of the round counter is "0" (S2115). If it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is not "0" (NO in S2115), the process ends in order to start the next round.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is "0" (YES in S2115), a jackpot ending command is set as a jackpot ending process to end the jackpot game (S2116), and the jackpot ending period (S2117), turns on the jackpot end flag (S2118), and ends the process. Further, if it is determined in S2105 that the jackpot end flag is ON (YES in S2103), the final round has ended, so it is then determined whether the jackpot ending period has elapsed (S2119). If it is determined in S2119 that the predetermined ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2119), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2119 that the ending period has passed (YES in S2119), the jackpot end flag is turned OFF (S2120), the game state setting process described below is performed (S2121), and the jackpot flag is turned OFF (S2122). , the jackpot start flag is turned OFF (S2123), the special figure operation status setting process 1 described later is performed (S2124), and the process is finished.

[Jackpot game start process]
Next, the jackpot game start process (S2101) will be explained using FIG. 40. In the jackpot game start process (S2101), it is first determined whether the jackpot start flag is ON or not (S2151), and it is determined that the jackpot start flag is not ON, that is, the jackpot is not yet passed through the start gate 29 in the jackpot waiting state. (NO in S2151), then it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag is ON (S2152), and if it is determined that the variable probability flag is ON (YES in S2152), the variable probability flag is set to OFF (S2102), and the process in S2154 is performed. Move to processing. In S2154, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S2103), and if it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in 2154), the state B flag is set OFF (S2104) and the process moves to S2156. . That is, during execution of the jackpot game, in order to control to a low probability state and a low base state, the probability change flag and the state B flag are turned OFF before starting the jackpot game (round game).

Further, if it is determined in S2152 that the probability variation flag is not ON (NO in S2152), the process proceeds to S2154 without turning the probability variation flag OFF. Further, if it is determined in S2154 that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S2154), the process proceeds to S2156 without turning the state B flag OFF. In S2156, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the starting gate (S2156), and if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the starting gate (YES in S2156), the The jackpot start flag is turned on (S2157), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2156 that the starting gate has not been passed (NO in S2156), the process ends. As a result, the gaming machine continues in the jackpot waiting state. Further, in S2151, if it is determined that the jackpot start flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot game has already started (S2151), the process ends. This allows the player to start (advance) the jackpot game at any timing.

[Game status setting process]
Next, the gaming state setting process (S2121) will be explained using FIG. 41. In the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether the jackpot game that has ended this time is related to a variable probability jackpot (S2201). In this embodiment, as mentioned above, five types of variable probability jackpots are 15R 1st jackpot, 4R 2nd jackpot, 4R 3rd jackpot, 15R 5th jackpot, and 2R 6th jackpot, and in S2201, these jackpot games are It is determined whether it corresponds to any of the five types. Then, if it is determined that the game that ended this time is a probability variable jackpot (YES in S2201), the probability variation flag is turned ON (S2202), and then, if the finished jackpot game is either a 4R 3rd jackpot or a 2R 6th jackpot, Determine whether there is one (S2203).

If it is determined in S2203 that the finished jackpot game is either the 4R 3rd jackpot or the 2R 6th jackpot (YES in S2203), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204) and "10000" is set in the state B counter. Set (S2205) and end the process. As a result, a high base state is set for a maximum of 10,000 times after the end of the jackpot game, resulting in a high probability high base state. It is not possible to display the changing special symbols 10,000 times during the business hours of the game parlor in one day.Therefore, by setting the status B counter to "10,000", the next jackpot will actually occur. This means that the high base state (state B) continues until Incidentally, instead of the control in which the number of times such as "10000" is set in the state B, the high base state (state) may be maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2203 that the finished jackpot game is neither 4R 3rd jackpot nor 2R 6th jackpot (NO in S2203), that is, the finished jackpot game is 15R 1st jackpot, 4R 2nd jackpot, Or, if it is determined that it is either the 15R fifth jackpot (NO in S2203), the process ends with the status B flag kept OFF. As a result, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game becomes a high probability low base state.

If it is determined in S2201 that the completed jackpot is not a probability variable jackpot, that is, it is a low probability jackpot (low probability jackpot, normal jackpot) (NO in S2201), the state B flag is turned ON (S2206), and the state B counter is set. "100" is set (S2207) and the process ends. As a result, a 100-time high base state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and a low-probability high base state is established.

[Special figure operation status setting process 1]
Next, special figure operation status setting processing 1 (S2124) will be explained using FIG. 42. In special pattern operation status setting processing 1 (S2124), first, it is determined whether the special pattern 1 jackpot flag is ON or not (S3001), and the special pattern 1 jackpot flag is ON, that is, the jackpot game that occurred this time is a special pattern. 1 (YES in S3001), the special figure 1 jackpot flag is turned OFF (S3002), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3003), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt processing, the special symbol 1 standby processing will be executed again as the special symbol 1 operation processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3001 that the special pattern 1 jackpot flag is not ON, that is, the special pattern 2 jackpot flag is ON, that is, the jackpot game that occurred this time is related to special pattern 2 (NO in S3001) ), the special figure 2 jackpot flag is turned OFF (S3004), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "1" (S3005), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt processing, the special symbol 2 standby processing is executed again as the special symbol 2 operation processing.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small winning game)]
Next, special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109) will be explained using FIG. 43. In the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109), first, it is determined whether the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small winning end flag is a flag indicating that all openings of the big winning device (second big winning device 36) have been completed in the small winning game. If it is determined that the small winning end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is being opened (S2302). If it is determined in S2302 that the big winning opening is not open (NO in S2302), whether or not it is time to open the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35), that is, the opening time for the small win has elapsed. It is determined whether the time has come to start the first opening operation, or whether the interval time between multiple openings has elapsed and it is time to start the next opening operation (S2303). . Regarding the small winning game, the small winning game (opening operation) starts after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the small winning symbol is fixed and stopped and displayed, regardless of whether the player passes through the start gate. In other words, the player can arbitrarily decide when to start a jackpot game based on the starting gate, but cannot arbitrarily decide when to start a small win.

In S2303, if it is determined that it is not the time to open the big prize opening (NO in S2303), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2303 that it is time to open the big winning opening (YES in S2303), the second big winning opening 35 is opened according to the small winning opening pattern (see Figure 6) (S2304), finish. If it is determined in S2302 that the big winning hole (second big winning hole 35) is being opened (YES in S2302), the number of balls that entered the big winning hole during the 6 opening operations, that is, the 6th time. It is determined whether the sum of all the game balls entered during the release operation has reached the prescribed maximum number of balls entered (10 in the first embodiment) (S2306). If it is determined in S2306 that the specified number of balls entered (10) has not been reached (NO in S2306), it is determined whether it is time to close the grand prize opening, that is, if the specified number of balls has not been reached after opening the grand prize opening. It is determined whether the opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed (S2307). Then, in S2307, if it is determined that the opening time of the big prize opening has not elapsed (NO in S2307), the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of balls entering the grand prize opening during the 6th opening operation has reached the specified number of balls entering (10) (YES in S2306), the grand prize opening (second grand prize The opening 35) is closed (S2314), and the process moves to the small hit ending process of S2311. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the big winning opening has passed (YES in S2307), the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is closed (S2308), and the value of the small winning opening counter is It is decremented by 1 (S2309), and it is determined whether the value of the small win opening counter is "0" (S2310). If it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit release counter is not "0" (NO in S2310), the process is ended as it is in order to start the next release operation.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small win opening counter is "0" (YES in S2310), the process moves to the small win ending process in S2311. In S2311, as a small winning ending process to end the small winning game, a small winning ending command is set (S2311), a small winning ending period is started (S2312), a small winning end flag is set (S2313), Finish processing. Incidentally, the small winning opening counter becomes "0" when the big winning opening is opened six times.

Also, if it is determined in S2301 that the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), the 6 opening operations have been completed (or the specified number of game balls have entered the ball), so It is determined whether the small winning ending time has elapsed (S2315), and if it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2315), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2315 that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned OFF (S2316), the special figure operation status setting process 2 is performed (S2317), and the process ends. By generating a small winning game in a high-accuracy/low-base state, it becomes possible to aim for the next jackpot while increasing the number of balls held, thereby increasing the interest in the game. In addition, at the start of the small winning game, the probability change flag and the state B flag are not switched from ON to OFF, or from OFF to ON. Further, when the small winning game ends, the game state setting process is not performed. That is, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming state (probability state, base state) is not changed before and after the execution of the small winning game.

[Special figure operation status setting process 2]
Next, special figure operation status setting processing 2 (S2317) will be explained using FIG. 44. In the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON or not (S3101). If it is determined that it is related to special symbol 1 (YES in S3101), the special symbol 1 small hit flag is turned OFF (S3102), the special symbol 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3103), and the process is executed. Finish. As a result, in the next interrupt processing, the special symbol 1 standby processing is executed again as the special symbol 1 operation processing. In this embodiment, since the result of the first special symbol validity determination does not include a small hit, the special symbol 1 small hit flag will not be turned ON. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special pattern 1 small hit flag is not ON, that is, the special pattern 2 small winning flag is ON, that is, the small winning game that occurred this time is related to special pattern 2 (NO in S3101). ), the special figure 2 small hit flag is turned OFF (S3104), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "1" (S3105), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt processing, the special symbol 2 standby processing is executed again as the special symbol 2 operation processing.

[Held pitch count processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved ball number process (S209) following the special figure 2 operation process (S208). As shown in FIG. 45, in the reserved ball number processing (S209), first, the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls, the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 is read ( S2501). Next, data on the number of held balls (a held ball number command for transmitting the held ball number information to the sub-control board 90, etc.) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502), and the process ends.

[Power-off monitoring processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power-off monitoring process (S210) following the pending ball count process (S209). As shown in FIG. 46, in the power-off monitoring process (S210), it is first determined whether a power-off signal is input (S2601), and if it is determined that there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2601 that there is a power-off signal input (YES in S2601), the current state of the gaming machine (whether it is variable rate, whether it is playing a winning game, how many balls are on hold, whether it is variable rate or time saving), Data regarding the number of remaining fluctuations, etc.) are stored in the RAM (S2602), a power-off flag is turned on (S2603), and thereafter loop processing (infinite loop) is performed without returning to the interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

As explained in detail above, the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment has the above-mentioned characteristic configuration, and thus has unique effects not found in conventional pachinko game machines, or has unique effects compared to conventional pachinko game machines. It has a remarkable effect. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the first special symbol (also referred to as "first information") or the second special symbol (also referred to as "second information") becomes a jackpot in the special symbol validity determination. A high-probability state occurs (a benefit is given) based on the symbol (stopping and displaying in a specific display mode), and when a predetermined condition is met, a high-probability state (a benefit) occurs. is assumed to end.

The process (gaming state setting process (S2121)) for granting this high probability state (privilege) can also be referred to as "privilege granting means". In addition, the first special symbol and the production symbol 8 are linked (synchronized), the second special symbol and the production symbol 8 are linked (synchronized), and the fluctuating display and stop display are performed to show the same validity judgment result. , "The special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol" can be replaced with "the production symbol is stopped and displayed at the winning production symbol (specific display mode)". .

[Sub control main processing]
Next, the operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 (control processing by the sub-control unit 90) will be explained based on FIGS. 47 to 52. Note that the counters, flags, status, buffers, timers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the production control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (sub-control unit). When the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, the performance control microcomputer 91 provided in the sub-control board 90 reads out the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 47 from the ROM of the sub-control board 90 and executes it. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main processing, first, CPU initialization processing is performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack settings, constant settings, CPU 92 settings, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, and various flags, status, counter resets, etc. are performed.

Subsequently, in S4002, it is determined whether the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the result of this determination is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub control board 90. In other words, if the power-off signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power-off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized. If the power-off signal is turned ON but the contents of the RAM are maintained normally (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. When the RAM is initialized, various flags, statuses, and counter values are reset. Note that S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and are not executed thereafter. In addition, in the first embodiment, the performance control microcomputer 91 also performs the same process as the power-off monitoring process (S209) by the game-control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. When turned ON, data related to the effect control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. In other words, data related to performance control in the event of a power outage such as a power outage is backed up. For this reason, unless the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003) when the power is turned on after recovering from a power outage such as a power outage (returning from a power outage), the effect will be controlled by the effect control microcomputer 91. The state returns to the state before the power failure occurred.

In S4004, interrupts are prohibited. Next, random number seed update processing is executed (S4005). In the random number seed updating process (S4005), the values of various performance determining random number counters are updated. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub control board 90. The random number for performance determination includes a random number for determining a variable performance that determines the mode of performance symbol game performance to be executed (variable performance pattern), a random number for determining a preview performance that determines a preview performance, and a random number for determining a performance symbol that determines a performance symbol. There are random numbers, etc. The random number updating method can be the same as the random number updating process performed by the main control board 80 described above. Note that when updating the random numbers, the random numbers may be added in increments of 2 instead of incrementing them in increments of 1. The random number for performance determination is acquired at a predetermined timing. This timing may be, for example, when the main control board 80 sends a control signal (starting ball command) notifying that a starting ball has arrived, or when the main control board 80 sends a control signal (starting ball entering command) notifying the start of fluctuation. This can be done when a fluctuation start command (fluctuation start command) is sent, or when a fluctuation effect pattern (to be described later) is determined. The acquired random number for effect determination is stored in a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, a command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer (also referred to as "sub output buffer") in the RAM of the sub control board 90 are transmitted to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, and the lamp control board 100. Among the boards 107, the command is sent to the control board to which the corresponding command is sent. Each control board (each control unit) that receives the command uses various presentation devices (image display device, speaker 67, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) to perform various presentations according to the received command. (Performance pattern game effects, special game effects related to winning games, etc.). The production control microcomputer 91 then permits an interrupt (S4007). After that, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4008), 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control of performance symbols, etc., executed on each display screen of the image display device 7 (first image display device), second image display device 71, and third image display device 72 is performed. It is also possible to control the lighting of various lamps, control the operation of movable decorative members, and control the audio output from speakers.

[Reception interrupt processing]
Next, the reception interrupt processing (S4008) will be explained using FIG. In the reception interrupt processing (S4008), first, it is determined whether the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON or not, that is, whether the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input section of the production control microcomputer 91. Determine (S4101). If it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands sent from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and the process ends. . This reception interrupt process (S4008) is a process that is executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009) will be explained using FIG. 49. The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process that is executed every time an interrupt pulse with a 2 msec period is input to the sub control board 90. In the 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), first, input processing is performed to create switch data (edge data and level data) based on detection signals from the production button detection switches 63c and 63d (S4201). Next, a lamp data output process (S4202) that outputs lamp data for causing lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 to emit light, and outputs drive data for driving the movable decorative member 14 (electrical drive source). drive data output processing (S4203). Incidentally, the lamp data and drive data are created by a 10ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later. Then, watchdog timer processing is performed to reset the watchdog timer (S4204).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10ms timer interrupt process (S4010) will be explained using FIG. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process that is executed every time an interrupt pulse of 10 msec period is input to the sub control board 90. In the 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4010), first, received command analysis processing (S4302), which will be described later, is performed. Next, a switch state acquisition process is performed in which the switch data created in the 2ms timer interrupt process is stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 as switch data for the 10ms timer interrupt process (S4303), and the switch data stored in the switch status acquisition process is Switch processing is performed to set the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the data (S4304). Thereafter, other processes such as creating lamp data (data for controlling lighting of the board lamp 5 and frame lamp 66) and updating random numbers for effect determination are executed (S4305).

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described using FIG. 51. In the received command analysis process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not a starting ball command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and if it is determined that a starting ball entering command has not been received (NO in S4401). , the process moves to S4403, and when it is determined that the starting ball entry command has been received (YES in S4401), the production pending information storage process (S4402) is performed, and the process moves to S4403. Performance pending information storage processing (S4402) stores various information (pre-judgment results, jackpot type determination error) included in the starting ball entry command (special chart 1 starting ball command or special chart 2 starting ball command) received in S4401. (game information such as numerical values, random fluctuation pattern values, etc.) according to the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the number of special symbol pending balls at the time of sending and receiving the starting ball entry command (when generating the command) , is stored in a predetermined effect pending information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 in a shift memory format. For example, if the received starting ball command is a special chart 1 starting ball command that corresponds to the number of reserved balls of special chart 1 "4", the preliminary judgment result and hit type included in the special chart 1 starting ball command This information is stored as special figure 1 performance pending information in an area corresponding to the number of reservations 4 in the special figure 1 performance pending information storage area. The performance pending information stored in this way is used to execute various performances such as a variable performance, a preview performance, and a performance mode, which will be described later. The storage contents (performance pending information) of the production pending information storage area in the sub-control board 90 are stored in the special figure pending storage section (first special figure pending storage section, second special figure pending storage section) in the above-mentioned main control board (main control section) 80. This matches the stored content (obtained information) of the hold storage unit). From this, the performance pending information storage area of the sub-control board 90 can also be said to be an "acquired information storage means."

Next, in S4403, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4403), and if it is determined that a fluctuation start command has been received (YES in S4403), a fluctuation production start process ( S4404) and moves to the process of S4405, and if it is determined that the fluctuation start command has not been received (NO in S4403), the process moves to the process of S4405 without performing the fluctuation effect start process. In S4405, it is determined whether or not a variation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4405), and if it is determined that a variation stop command has been received (YES in S4405), the production pattern is stopped and displayed and the variation production is performed. Performs variable performance termination processing to be terminated (S4406). In the fluctuating performance end process (S4406), a fluctuating performance end command for stopping and displaying the performance symbol 8 and ending the fluctuating performance is set in the sub output buffer. When the set variable effect end command is sent to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 changes the effect pattern 8 that was being displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The display is stopped and the variable performance (performance symbol game performance) is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4405 that the fluctuation stop command has not been received (NO in S4405), the process proceeds to S4407 without performing the fluctuation production end process. Incidentally, the variable effects refer to various effects performed in accordance with the variable display of special symbols.

Subsequently, in S4407, it is determined whether a winning game related command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4407). Here, the winning game-related commands are commands sent from the main control board 80 when executing winning games (big winning games, small winning games), and specifically, the commands are the commands that are sent from the main control board 80 when executing winning games (big winning games, small winning games). ), a round start command that is sent when a round starts, a round end command that is sent when a round ends, an ending command that is sent when a jackpot game ends, and the first big prize opening in a round game. This applies to the 1st grand prize opening ball entry command sent based on the ball entering 30, the 2nd grand prize opening ball entry command sent based on the ball entering the 2nd grand prize opening in a small winning game, etc. . In S4407, it is determined whether any of these jackpot game related commands have been received, and if not received (NO in S4407), the process moves to S4409, and if received (YES in S4407) , performs processing related to execution of performance (big hit game performance, small win game performance) according to the type of the received command (S4408).

For example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening performance command that specifies an opening performance according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer, and if the received command is a round start command, the command A round performance command that specifies a round performance according to the round specified based on the round is set in the sub output buffer, and if it is an ending command, an ending that specifies an ending performance according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command. Set the production command to the sub output buffer. In addition, if the received command is a big winning hole entry command (1st big winning hole entry command, 2nd big winning hole entry command), the big winning hole (1st big winning hole ball entry command) specified based on the command A ball entering performance command that specifies a ball entering performance according to the ball entering the opening 30 and the second big prize opening 35 is set in the sub output buffer. When the various performance commands related to the set winning games are sent to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 controls the opening performance and the round according to the progress of the winning games. Performances, pitching performances, etc. are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Finally, the process of S4409 is performed to end this process. In S4409, as other processing, processing based on other received commands (for example, normal symbol fluctuation start command and normal symbol fluctuation stop command) other than the various commands described above is performed (S4409).

[Variable effect start processing]
Next, the variable effect start process (S4404) executed in the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described using FIG. 52. In the variable performance start processing (S4404), first, performance determination random number processing (S4501) is performed to obtain various performance determination random numbers such as a variable performance determination random number, a preview performance determination random number, and a performance design determination random number. In this embodiment, the process of S4501 is performed at the timing when the fluctuation start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is acquired from each random number. Based on this acquired value (acquired information), the mode of the performance symbol game performance (variable performance) to be executed, the mode of the preview performance (including the presence or absence of the preview performance), the performance pattern to be stopped and displayed, etc. are determined.

Next, in S4502, the received fluctuation start command is analyzed (S4502). The fluctuation start command includes a fluctuation pattern designation command (information that designates a fluctuation pattern) that designates the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The fluctuation pattern designation command includes the fluctuation pattern information (P1 to P33) shown in FIG. It includes the result, symbol information specifying the jackpot type, etc. (see FIG. 8). In addition, since there are variable pattern designation commands that correspond to the first special symbol and those that correspond to the second special symbol, by analyzing the fluctuation pattern designation command, the production symbol game production to be started this time It becomes possible to determine whether the (variable display of performance symbols) is related to special figure 1 or special figure 2. Incidentally, the variable pattern information, game state information, symbol information, etc. can also be used in other processes other than the variable performance start process to be executed thereafter.

Next, in S4503, the performance control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining the production mode to be executed. The mode status is any value from "1" to "5", and each value is assigned to the production mode A to E. Specifically, mode status "1" corresponds to production mode A, mode status "2" corresponds to production mode B, mode status "3" corresponds to production mode C, and mode status "4" corresponds to production mode C. The mode status "5" corresponds to the production mode D, and the mode status "5" corresponds to the production mode E. By referring to the current mode status, it is possible to specify the current production mode.

Here, the performance mode is a performance mode mainly using the image display device 7, and when the performance mode is different, part or all of the performance mode of the game performance, such as a preview performance or a reach performance, is different. . Specifically, the image displayed on the image display device 7 may vary depending on the production mode, such as the appearance of the production pattern 8 (for example, pattern design, number design, etc.) being different, or the appearing characters, items, and background images being different. considered to be different. In addition, the production symbol game production can also be executed in a manner according to the production mode, and when providing multiple game productions (notification production, reach production, etc.), different game production can be executed depending on the production mode. It can be done. In this embodiment, production modes A and B are executed when controlled to a low-accuracy low base state, production modes C and D are executed when controlled to a high-accuracy low base state, and production mode E is executed when controlled to a low-accuracy high-base state and when controlled to a high-accuracy high-base state. Therefore, when the production mode is one of A to D, the player can understand whether the current gaming state is a low-probability low-base state or a high-probability low-base state by checking the production mode. becomes possible. On the other hand, when the production mode is E, even if the player checks the production mode, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the current gaming state is a low probability high base state or a high probability high base state. be. In that sense, production mode E can be said to be a gaming state non-notification mode.

Next, in S4504, the image display device 7, the board lamp 5, the movable decoration member 14, etc. are used to create a variable effect pattern (a variable effect pattern, a effect pattern, etc.) which is mainly controlled by the sub-control unit 90. A variable performance pattern determination table (not shown) and a preview performance determination table for determining game performance (S4504) are set. Specifically, based on the mode status (current production mode) referenced in S4503 and the variation pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80, a variation production pattern determination table to be used and a preview production determination table are set. . That is, it is equipped with a plurality of variable performance pattern determination tables and a plurality of advance notice performance determination tables, and from these, a predetermined variable performance pattern determination table and advance notice performance determination table are set based on the gaming state (performance mode), etc. do. For example, if the variation pattern information specified by the received variation pattern specification command is "P1 (variation pattern P1)" (see Figure 9), the variation performance pattern determination table will be used to determine when the jackpot corresponding to the current production mode A variable performance pattern determination table and a preview performance determination table are set. The variable production pattern determination table is mainly used to determine the execution mode of production symbol game production (variation mode of production symbols, etc.), and contains multiple variable production pattern determination tables ( (not shown) is stored in advance in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. In S4504, the table corresponding to the mode status (current performance mode) referred to in S4503 is selected and set from among these variable performance pattern determination tables.

Next, in S4505, based on the random number for determining the variable effect obtained in S4501 and the variable effect pattern determination table set in S4504, a variable effect pattern that matches the specified variable pattern is selected and set ( S4505). As the variation performance pattern, the variation mode of the performance symbol 8 (execution mode of the performance symbol game performance) mainly displayed in the performance symbol display area 7b is set. As a result, in the production symbol game production, when performing a reach production (design game production with reach effect) or when performing a character production using a specific character (character production symbol game production), the reach production or character A case where the performance is not executed (ready-to-reach non-performance symbol game performance), etc. is determined. In addition, the reach effect is, for example, a display mode of the effect pattern 8 when the result of the special symbol validity judgment indicates a jackpot, in which three effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all the same (double number). In the case where a mode (jackpot mode, specific mode) is provided, two of the three production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) with the symbols (same production pattern) that constitute the jackpot mode. ), and while the remaining one continues to be displayed in a variable manner (scrolling display), whether or not the remaining one production symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol (three same production symbols) that completes the jackpot mode. It refers to a performance that shows. At this time, a game performance is executed using a predetermined character as the performance symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner, and whether or not the performance symbols are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode is determined whether the predetermined character achieves a predetermined purpose. It is also possible to show this with a performance. Such game performances (ready-to-reach performances and character performances described later) can also be referred to as story performances (specific game performances) or objective performances (specific game performances). Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's expectation of winning the jackpot and increase his/her interest in the game.

In addition, in S4505, based on the random number for effect design determination obtained in S4501 and a stop symbol determination table (not shown), the effect pattern 8 to be stopped and displayed (also referred to as "stop effect pattern") is determined and set. Performance Symbols The performance symbol 8 that is stopped and displayed as a result of the game performance is a result of the special symbol validity judgment, and if it is a reach or miss, three performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as "787" are displayed. One of the performance symbols is considered to be a different one from the other production symbols, and when it is out of reach, at least one of the three production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, such as "635", is different from the other production symbols. It is said to be a barakeme with different production designs.

Further, in S4506, a preview performance to be executed in conjunction with the variable performance pattern (performance symbol game performance) is determined. In addition, the performance including the preview performance to be executed is also referred to as the performance symbol game performance. This preview performance is a performance (in advance) that indicates the possibility that the result of the current performance symbol game performance will be stopped and displayed in a jackpot manner before the performance symbol stops display (determined stop display) (during the fluctuating display of the performance symbol). This is a public announcement). In S4506, based on the random number for determining the preview performance obtained in S4501 and the preview performance determination table set in S4504, a preview performance that matches the specified variation pattern and the determined variation performance pattern is selected and set. (S4506).

Then, in S4507, based on the variable performance pattern and preview performance set in S4505 and S4506, a variable performance start command for starting the performance symbol game performance etc. is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 ( S4507), the variable performance start process ends. When the variable effect start command set in S4507 is sent to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 transmits the variable effect pattern specified based on the variable effect start command, that is, S4505 Predetermined image data corresponding to the variable effect pattern set in is read out from the ROM of the image control board 100, and variable effects etc. based on the read image data are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, a variable display (blinking display) using two LEDs on the performance display 102 is also performed.

[Summary of production symbol game production]
Next, an outline of the performance symbol game performance (variable performance) of this embodiment will be explained. As described above, when the variable performance start command for starting the performance symbol game performance etc. based on the variable performance pattern etc. set in S4505 is transmitted from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the image display device 7 The variable display of the effect pattern 8 is started on the display screen 7a. A performance symbol game performance (variable performance) is constituted as a series of performances from the start to the end (stop) of the variable display of the performance symbols 8.

In principle, the fluctuating display of the production pattern 8 is performed by vertically scrolling the pattern in the order of "1" → "2" → "3" ... → "7" → "8" → "9" (in ascending order). (vertical scrolling), and when it reaches "9", returns to "1" again and repeats vertical scrolling. The mode of variable display of the effect symbols 8 is determined by the variable effect pattern stored in the above-mentioned variable effect pattern determination table. Therefore, in addition to vertical scrolling, there are various types of variable display, such as horizontal scrolling (horizontal scrolling), and switching displays where symbols (numbers) change sequentially on the spot without scrolling. It is possible to provide the aspect as a variable effect pattern. Further, it is also possible to provide a mode in which the symbols "1" to "9" are displayed in descending order. Furthermore, it is also possible to set the manner of variable display depending on the performance mode and gaming state.

In addition, the fluctuating display of the production pattern 8 is performed according to the fluctuating time determined by the fluctuating pattern of the special symbol, and the fluctuating display is stopped as the fluctuating time elapses, but in this embodiment, the fluctuating display is stopped when the fluctuating display is stopped. It has a plurality of stopping modes (stopping patterns). Specifically, as the main stopping modes, (1) the stopping order (also referred to as "stopping order") of each of the production symbols 8L (left symbol), 8C (middle symbol), and 8R (right symbol) is "left symbol". → middle symbol → right symbol” (also referred to as “first stopping mode”); (2) stopping order of each symbol is “left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol” (“ (3) A stopping mode in which all the stop times (stop timings) of each symbol are approximately the same (also referred to as "simultaneous stopping") (also referred to as "third stopping mode"). and (4) a stopping mode (also referred to as a "fourth stopping mode") in which the left and right symbols stop at approximately the same timing and the middle symbol stops after that. These stop modes (stop patterns) are included in the execution mode of the production symbol game production, and depending on the variable production pattern selected (set) in S4505, it is determined in which stop mode the variable display will be stopped. It has become a thing. That is, in this embodiment, the selection/determination (setting) of the variable production pattern also serves as the selection/determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). However, it is also possible to separately process the selection/determination (setting) of the variable production pattern and the selection/determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). Furthermore, the stopping symbol that is first in the stopping order is also referred to as the "first stopping symbol", the stopping symbol that is second in the stopping order is also referred to as the "second stopping symbol", and the stopping symbol that is the third stopping symbol in the stopping order. This is also called the "third stop symbol" or "final stop symbol."

Among the first to fourth stopping modes, the first stopping mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol) is mainly used when the result of the second special symbol validity judgment is "small" when in production mode C (state C). This is a stop mode that can be executed when stopping the variable display when the effect pattern 8 is displayed in a variable manner based on the fact that the effect is a hit.

The second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) mainly occurs when (1) production mode A, B (state A), the result of the first special symbol validity judgment is "miss" or "jackpot" When the variable display of the production symbol 8 is performed based on the following, (2) when in production mode E (state B), the result of the first special symbol validity determination is “miss” or “jackpot”. When the variable display of the production pattern 8 is performed based on the variation mode with reach (also referred to as "reach variation") or the variation mode without reach (also referred to as "normal variation"), and (3) production mode C ( In state C), when the fluctuating display of the production pattern 8 is performed as a reach fluctuation or a normal fluctuation based on the result of the second special symbol validity determination being "miss" or "jackpot", the relevant fluctuation display This is a stop mode that can be executed when stopping.

The third stop mode (stopping all symbols at the same time) is mainly used in (1) production modes A and B (state A), when the shortening variation function according to the number of reserved balls in the special pattern works (at the start of variation). When the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is "3" or "4"), the result of the first special symbol validity judgment is "miss", and based on this, the fluctuating display of production symbol 8 is performed as normal fluctuation. , (2) When in production mode E (state B), the variation display of production symbol 8 is performed in normal variation based on the result of the first special symbol validity determination being "miss", and (3 ) Stopping the fluctuating display when the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 8 is performed as a normal fluctuation based on the result of the second special symbol propriety determination being "miss" in production mode C (state C). This is a stop mode that can be executed when

The fourth stop mode (left and right symbols simultaneously stop → middle symbol) is mainly used when the result of the second special symbol validity judgment is "miss" or "jackpot" when in production mode C (state C). When the variable display of the production symbol 8 is performed based on the reach variation, and (2) in production mode E (state B), the result of the first special symbol validity determination is "miss" or "jackpot". This is a stop mode that can be executed when the variable display is stopped when the variable display of the production symbol 8 is performed based on the reach variation.

In this way, a plurality of stopping modes for stopping the variable display of the production symbols 8 are provided depending on the variable display mode and result (stop display mode) based on the production mode (gaming state) and the result of the special symbol propriety judgment. This makes it possible to vary the stopping manner by changing it depending on the game situation. In addition, for the player, it is possible to pay attention to the stop mode when the fluctuating display of the effect symbols 8 stops and guess the display mode (stop display mode) of the effect symbols 8 that will be displayed (derived display) afterwards. This makes it possible to infer the type of special game that can be executed, whether or not it will be executed, the possibility of such a game, etc., based on the manner in which it is stopped. Thereby, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the manner in which the variable display stops, and to arouse expectations for the subsequent special game.

In addition to the above-mentioned first to fourth stopping modes, for example, there is a stopping mode in which the stopping order of the three symbols constituting the production pattern 8 is "right symbol → left symbol → middle symbol" (fifth stopping mode). ), a stopping mode in which the left and middle symbols stop at approximately the same time and the right symbol stops after that (sixth stopping mode), etc. It is possible to provide various stopping modes. The conditions under which the embodiment is executed are not limited to the present embodiment, and can be determined in various ways.

In addition, in this embodiment, the symbols "1" to "9" constituting the production design 8 are colored so that they can be classified by color, and the type of symbol (design type) is determined by the color. This symbol type corresponds to the game state (performance mode). Specifically, in state A (production mode A, B), among the odd numbered symbols, "7" is a red symbol (hereinafter also referred to as "red symbol"), and the other odd numbered symbols are "1" and "3". , "5", and "9" are green symbols (hereinafter referred to as "green symbols"), and the even number symbols "2", "4", "6", and "8" are blue symbols (hereinafter referred to as "blue symbols"). (also called "design"). On the other hand, in states B and C (production modes C, D, and E), among the odd symbols, "3", "5", and "7" are red symbols, and the other odd symbols are "1" and "9". is used as a green pattern, and the even numbers ``2'', ``4'', ``6'', and ``8'' are used as blue patterns.

Note that the correspondence between the designs and colors shown in this example is just an example, and other correspondences may be adopted, and the types of colors are not limited to those in this example, and other colors may be used. It is possible to use Further, in this embodiment, the symbol type (red symbol, green symbol, blue symbol) is determined by color, but it is also possible to determine the symbol type by factors other than color. For example, the type of character when a character is attached to the production design, or the type of character when the production design has a production design that represents a number (number design), and the number design when it has a performance design that represents a predetermined character (text design). The symbol type may be determined by the character design, or furthermore, the symbol type may be determined simply by the odd numbered symbols and even numbered symbols.

Due to the symbol combination (stop display mode) of the production symbols 8 (8L, 8C, 8R) that is displayed (derived display) when the variable display of the production symbol 8 is performed and the variable display is stopped according to the above-mentioned stop mode, The result of the fluctuation display is notified. In this example, the basic symbol combination (stop display mode) is a "perfectly rose" (such as "124") in which the three production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all different symbols (numbers), and the production symbol 8L (left symbol) and production symbol 8R (right symbol) are the same symbol (number), and the remaining production symbol 8C (middle symbol) is a different symbol (number) from the others (“343” etc.) ) is a losing mode (non-specific mode) that does not trigger the execution of a winning game. On the other hand, a "Zero" (such as "777") in which the three production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all the same is used as a jackpot mode (specific mode) that triggers the execution of a jackpot game of 4R or more (see Figure 6). There is.

On the premise of such a basic symbol combination, in this embodiment, among the winning combinations, the "reach winning combination" is also used as a 2R jackpot mode, which is the trigger for executing the 2R jackpot game (see Figure 6). . This is because in 2R jackpot games, the number of prize balls that the player can acquire (number of prize balls acquired) is smaller than in 4R or higher jackpot games (4R jackpot games, 15R jackpot games), and in state C (high It is a special game that triggers the setting of state B (high base state), in which it is difficult to obtain prize balls (increase in balls held) in a small winning game compared to the low probability base state), that is, it is a special game for the player. This is due to the fact that it is a special game with a relatively low advantage (profit amount). In addition, among the winning combinations, the "perfect winning combination" is also used as a small winning mode that triggers the execution of a small winning game (second special symbol) in state B (high base state). This is because, as mentioned above, in state B, the second starting port 21 is open for most of the period, so the small winning large winning port (second This is because it becomes difficult to enter the big winning hole 35), and the possibility of getting a profit from a small hit is extremely low (close to zero) (substantially equivalent to a miss). Furthermore, among the winning combinations, a "specific winning combination" which will be described later is made into a small winning mode that becomes an opportunity to execute a small winning game (small winning of the second special symbol) in state C (high accuracy low base state). Here, the small winning mode (specific winnings) is also referred to as the "first display mode", the jackpot mode (double winning) is also referred to as the "second display mode", and the losing mode (complete winnings, reach winnings) is also referred to as the "second display mode". Of the orders (Orders), the Reach-Barase order is also referred to as the "third display mode", and of the out-of-order modes (Complete Barase orders, Reach Barase orders), the complete Barase order is also referred to as the "fourth display mode".

In addition, since state A (low accuracy low base state) is a game state in which left-handed games are basically played, the first special symbol validity judgment (first special symbol determination based on the ball entering the first starting hole 20) This is because it is rare for the second special symbol validity judgment (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) to be performed during the fluctuating display of the first special symbol. If the second special symbol validity judgment is made under such circumstances, the corresponding effect pattern 8 will not be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect display 102 will display the variation. Only display (and stop display) is performed. Similarly, state B (high base state) is a game state in which right-handed games are basically played, and the first special symbol validity judgment (first special This situation If the second special symbol validity judgment is made below, the corresponding effect pattern 8 will not be displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect display 102 will display the variable display ( and stop display).

Similarly, state C (high accuracy, low base state) is a gaming state in which right-handed games are basically played, so the second special symbol validity judgment (mainly based on the ball entering the third starting port 26) Since it is rare that the first special symbol validity judgment (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is performed during the fluctuating display of the second special symbol, If the first special symbol validity determination is made under such circumstances, the corresponding effect pattern 8 will not be displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, but will be displayed on the effect display 102. Only fluctuation display (and stop display) is performed.

However, if a special symbol validity determination is made that is contrary to the current gaming state (left-handed game, right-handed game) and a "jackpot" determination result is obtained (for example, if the first special symbol validity determination is made in state C) (in the event that a jackpot is achieved), one or more display devices of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display an effect indicating the occurrence of the jackpot. conduct. As a result, while the performance display (fluctuating performance) of the performance symbol 8 corresponding to the current gaming state (fluctuating display of the main special symbol) is mainly performed on the display screen 7a, it is displayed in parallel with the fluctuating display of the main special symbol. It becomes possible to notify the player that the result of the variable display of the special symbols shown is a jackpot. In addition, by suggesting the occurrence of such a jackpot, it is possible to avoid a situation where the player stops playing without noticing the occurrence of a jackpot and misses an opportunity to earn profits.

Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 61. Here, FIG. 53 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment. In addition, in the following explanation, the explanation of the common configuration and common processing with the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be omitted, and the explanation will mainly be given of the different configuration and processing from the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment. conduct. In the second embodiment, the display screen of the first image display device 7 (see FIG. 3) is called a first display screen 7a, and the display screen of the second image display device 71 (see FIG. 1) is called a second display screen. 71a, and the display screen of the third image display device 72 (see FIG. 2) will be called a third display screen 72a.

In addition to the first performance button 63a and the second performance button 63b described above in the first embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment has a first performance button on the front frame 51 as an input means that allows input by the player. A cross key is provided at a position close to 63a. This cross key is configured with an up key, a down key, a left key, and a right key, and when the player operates any of the keys on the cross key, the first display screen 7a or the third It is possible to change the selection of items displayed on the display screen 72a, or to highlight an item other than the highlighted item.

As illustrated in FIG. 53, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, in addition to the first performance button 63a and the second performance button 63b, there is also a key that detects that any key of the cross key has been operated. An operation detection switch 63e is connected. When the player operates any key of the cross key (up key, down key, left key, or right key), a detection signal notifying that the key operation has been detected is output to the sub-control board 90. Note that different detection signals are output when the up key is operated, when the down key is operated, when the left key is operated, and when the right key is operated. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 can specify which of the four keys making up the cross key has been operated based on the detection signal from the key operation detection switch 63e. It is.

[About various settings related to production]
Next, various settings regarding effects will be explained with reference to FIG. 54. Here, FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various settings of effects. As illustrated in FIG. 54, the settings related to the performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment can be roughly classified into first settings and second settings.

(Example of first setting)
The first settings include volume adjustment and light amount adjustment, as illustrated in FIG. The volume adjustment is a function to adjust the volume of the performance sound output from the speaker 67, and the player can press the four-way controller and the The volume of the effect sound can be changed by performing a predetermined operation using the effect button 63a. The light intensity adjustment is a function to adjust the light intensity of the first display screen 7a, the second display screen 71a, and the third display screen 72a, and the player can press the cross key and the first By performing a predetermined operation using the effect button 63a, it is possible to change the amount of light on the three display screens.

(Example of second setting)
As illustrated in FIG. 54, the second settings include premier mode, one-shot notification mode, look-ahead reduction mode, auto button, back button suggestion, and treble adjustment.

Premier mode is a function that allows you to set a mode in which the so-called "premier effect", which occurs only when the judgment result of the special symbol validity judgment is a "jackpot", is more likely to occur than usual. The player can switch between the premier mode and the non-premier mode by performing a predetermined operation using the cross key and the first effect button 63a while the icon (see FIG. 55(C)) is displayed. In addition, as a premiere performance, a predetermined character called a premiere character is displayed on the screen before the performance symbol indicating a double eye is stopped and displayed to notify that the judgment result of the special symbol validity judgment is a "jackpot". One example is the performance.

One-shot notification mode is a function that allows you to set a mode in which the so-called "one-shot notification", which occurs only when the judgment result of the special symbol validity judgment is a "jackpot", is more likely to occur than usual. Yes, when the player performs a predetermined operation using the cross key and the first performance button 63a while the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)) is displayed, the one-shot announcement mode and the non-one-shot announcement mode can be selected. It is possible to switch between In addition, as a one-shot notification, a predetermined notification sound is output from the speaker 67 prior to the stop display of the production pattern indicating a double mark that informs that the judgment result of the special symbol validity judgment is a "jackpot". An example of this is an effect in which the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 are made to emit light in rainbow colors.

The look-ahead reduction mode is a function that can be set to a mode in which so-called "look-ahead effect", which is executed based on the result of the above-mentioned advance judgment (pre-determination result), is less likely to occur compared to normal. (C)) is displayed, the player can switch between the prefetch reduction mode and the non-prefetch reduction mode by performing a predetermined operation using the cross key and the first effect button 63a. An example of the pre-read effect is a pending pre-read effect in which a pending image (pending icon) indicating that the right to judge the validity of a special symbol is reserved is displayed in a display mode different from normal.

The auto button is a function that generates a performance corresponding to the operation in the same way as when the first performance button 63a is operated without operating the first performance button 63a, and the performance customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)) is displayed. When the player performs a predetermined operation using the cross key and the first performance button 63a in this state, it is possible to switch the function related to the auto button between "ON" and "OFF".

The back button suggestion is a so-called "back button suggestion" in which an operation corresponding performance is executed when the player operates the first performance button 63a during the valid period without an operation promotion performance that prompts the player to operate the first performance button 63a. This is a function that suggests that the "back button" is still valid, and the player can perform a predetermined operation using the cross key and the first performance button 63a while the performance customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)) is displayed. By doing this, it is possible to switch between "ON" and "OFF" the function related to back button suggestion. By setting this back button suggestion to "ON", for example, the button lamp built in the first effect button 63a emits light during the above-mentioned validity period.

The treble adjustment is a function that cuts the treble range of the production sound output from the speaker 67, and when the production customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)) is displayed, the player presses the cross key and the first production button. By performing a predetermined operation using 63a, it is possible to switch the function related to treble adjustment between "ON" and "OFF".

(Characteristics of various settings)
Up to this point, an overview of various settings classified as first settings or second settings has been described, but the first settings and second settings have the following characteristics.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of the second embodiment, a game performance non-progress state (non-performance progress state) in which a game production in which a production pattern is displayed variably in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol (or second special symbol) is not performed. If the first time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the transition to the game performance non-progress state without ending the game performance non-progress state, the non-gaming reset selection screen (Fig. 57) will be displayed. ) will be displayed. This non-gaming reset selection screen is a selection screen that is displayed when one or more settings classified as the second setting are set differently from the initial settings, and is classified as the second setting. This is a screen for the player to select whether or not to reset various settings all at once (return to initial settings).

By the way, the non-gaming reset selection screen is displayed not only when a certain player (first player) temporarily interrupts and resumes playing, but also when another player (second player) starts playing. Although they are also displayed during the second game, the premier mode, one-shot announcement mode, look-ahead reduction mode, auto button, and back button suggestion change or affect the game performance, so When the player starts playing the game, it is preferable that the second player can easily select whether or not to reset these second settings (set by the first player). Further, if even one performance setting classified as the second setting is performed, the contents of the second setting are displayed on the third display screen 72a (see FIG. 56), and the contents are displayed to other players. It is preferable for the first player to stop playing without being given the opportunity to choose whether or not to reset the second setting, since this may become known to others (e.g., the second player). do not have.

Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the first time (here, 10 seconds) has elapsed after transitioning to the game performance non-progress state, the performance setting (here, classified as the second setting) is changed. As a selection promotion effect that prompts the player to select whether or not to return various settings (various settings) to the initial settings, the display of the reset selection screen during non-gaming (see Figure 57) is started, and the reset selection screen during non-gaming is displayed. Inside, there is a configuration in which changes to various settings classified as the second setting, that is, changes to the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)) are not possible (for example, a configuration in which the effect customization screen is not displayed). (See Figure 54).

For example, if the first time is set to a relatively short time such as 3 seconds, the game ball will not enter the first starting hole 20 easily in the low-accuracy, low-base state, and the game performance will frequently go into the non-progress state. As a result, the reset selection screen is frequently displayed during non-gaming, which may cause discomfort to the first player. On the other hand, if the first time is set to a relatively long time, such as 30 seconds, the waiting time from when the first player stops playing until the non-gaming reset selection screen starts to be displayed becomes long, This configuration is not preferable from the viewpoint that the first player can easily reset the setting of 2. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the second embodiment, the first time is set to 10 seconds in consideration of these points.

On the other hand, even if the volume of the speaker 67 and the light intensity of each display screen are set differently from the initial settings, they will not change the content of the game presentation or have a large impact on the game presentation, and will not change the game presentation. Compared to the second setting, it is considered that there is less need for the player (for example, the first player) to select whether or not to reset the first setting. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, while the non-gaming reset selection screen is displayed, priority is given to the player's selection as to whether or not to reset the various performance settings classified as the second setting. If the volume or light intensity cannot be adjusted, and reset is selected on the reset selection screen (see Figure 57) during non-gaming, in other words, the operation to return the production settings to the initial settings is not possible. If it is performed while the non-gaming reset selection screen is displayed, the display of the non-gaming reset selection screen (selection promotion effect) ends and the second setting is reset (returned to the initial setting). A configuration is adopted in which the first setting is not reset (not returned to the initial setting) (see FIG. 54).

By the way, regarding the volume of the speaker 67 and the light intensity of each display screen, even if the second player learns the settings made by the first player, there is no major problem, and it is up to the first player whether or not to reset them. It is considered that there is little need to adopt a configuration in which one can be selected arbitrarily. On the other hand, for example, while the volume of the speaker 67 is set to the maximum (in the second embodiment, "5" out of five levels: see FIG. 55(B)), the first player's next When the second player starts playing, a loud game effect sound is output from the speaker 67 as the game effect starts, surprising the second player and causing discomfort to the second player. There is a possibility that it will be given. Further, for example, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is left with the light intensity of each display screen set to the minimum (in this embodiment, "1" out of five levels: see FIG. 55(B)), each Even if a customer waiting effect is performed using a display screen, it is difficult to improve the operating rate of the pachinko game machine 1 because the pachinko game machine 1 is difficult to stand out.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, if the second time period (5 minutes in the second embodiment) passes without the game performance non-progress state ending after the transition to the game production non-progress state, The volume of a speaker 67 and the light amount of each display screen are automatically reset (returned to their initial settings) without prompting the player to select whether or not to reset the settings of the volume and light amount. Specifically, the volume of the speaker 67 is returned to "1", which is the minimum volume among five levels, and the light intensity of each display screen is returned to "5", which is the maximum light intensity among five levels.

In the second embodiment, an example will be described in which the initial setting of the volume of the speaker 67 is the minimum volume "1", and the initial setting of the light amount of each display screen is the maximum light amount "5". On the other hand, in other embodiments, the initial setting of the volume of the speaker 67 may be a volume other than the minimum volume, and the initial setting of the light amount of each display screen may be a light amount other than the maximum light amount. It's okay. For example, the volume of the speaker 67 may be returned to "3", which is the middle of five levels, and the light amount of each display screen may be returned to "3", which is the middle of five levels.

In addition, after the non-gaming reset selection screen has been selected to reset the performance settings and the non-gaming reset selection screen has finished displaying, the player can adjust the volume and light intensity as described below. It is possible to change the volume and light intensity by displaying the screen.

<Specific examples of various screens displayed on the third display screen 72a>
Next, various screens displayed on the third display screen 72a will be described with reference to FIG. 55. Here, FIG. 55 is a screen diagram illustrating various screens displayed on the third display screen 72a.

(Customization reception screen)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, there is a game performance progress state in which a game performance is in progress in which the performance symbols are displayed variably in accordance with the variable display of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol), and a game performance progress state in which the game performance described above is in progress. When the non-gaming reset selection screen (see FIG. 57) is not displayed in the production non-progress state, the customization reception screen illustrated in FIG. 55(A) is displayed on the third display screen 72a of the third image display device 72. be done. This customization reception screen includes a cross key image imitating a cross key and a message such as "You can customize the performance" to inform you that various settings related to the performance can be changed. has been done.

Note that, as is clear from the notation in FIG. 55(A), in the cross key image forming the customization reception screen, the left key and right key are displayed in a different display manner from the up key and down key. Specifically, for example, the left key and right key are highlighted more than the up key and down key. Therefore, the player who sees the cross-key image can switch the customization reception screen to another screen for actually customizing the performance by operating the left or right key on the cross-key. It is possible to easily recognize that there is a

(Customized quantity notification image, customization content notification image)
In addition, if any of the settings classified as the second settings (see FIG. 54) described above have been changed from the initial settings, the upper part of the third display screen 72a while the customization reception screen is displayed. A customization number notification image and a customization content notification image are displayed in the area. Here, the customized number notification image is an image that notifies the number of settings that are different from the initial settings based on the player's selection operation, among the various settings classified as the second settings. , In FIG. 55(A), a customization number notification image containing the words "Production customization 3" is displayed to notify that the number of settings that are different from the initial settings is 3. An example of how this is done is shown below.

FIG. 56 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the customization quantity notification image and the customization content notification image displayed on the third display screen 72a. Here, the customized number notification image is as described above based on FIG. 55(A). One of the customization content notification images is an image that sequentially notifies the contents of settings that are different from the initial settings among various settings classified into the second setting (Fig. 55(A), 56(A) to (C)).

For example, as illustrated in FIG. 54(B), among the various settings classified as the second setting, the initial If the settings are different from the settings, for example, after the customization content notification image (see Figure 56 (A)) including the words "Premier Mode" is displayed for 1.5 seconds, the words "Pre-Read Reduction Mode" are displayed. A customization content notification image (see FIG. 56(B)) containing the words "back button suggestion" is displayed for 1.5 seconds, followed by a customization content notification image (see FIG. 56(C)) containing the text "back button suggestion" for 1.5 seconds. Displayed for seconds. Then, after the customization content notification image (see Figure 56(C)) including the text "back button suggestion" is displayed for 1.5 seconds, the customization content notification image including the text "Premier mode" (see Figure 56(C)) is displayed for 1.5 seconds. A) is displayed again.

In this way, if multiple settings among the various settings classified as the second setting are set differently from the initial settings, the characters indicating the contents of these multiple settings will be switched in order, In addition, the display of the customization content notification image is updated as appropriate so that it is displayed repeatedly.

By the way, for example, as mentioned above, if the three settings of "Premier Mode", "Lookahead Reduction Mode", and "Back Button Suggestion" are set differently from the initial settings, the settings that include the words "Premier Mode" An idea is to adopt a configuration in which a customization content notification image, a customization content notification image containing the words "prefetch reduction mode", and a customization content notification image including the text "back button suggestion" are displayed side by side in the vertical direction. It will be done.

However, in this configuration, as the number of performances that have settings different from the initial settings increases, the number of customization content notification images to be displayed on the third display screen 72a increases. A problem may arise in that it becomes difficult to use the system for presentations (for example, presentations that display characters or letters that notify the reliability of a jackpot).

On the other hand, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the second embodiment, the number of settings that are different from the initial settings among the second settings is notified by the customization number notification image, and the number of customizations is also notified. In the display area (an example of the first display area) immediately below the display area (an example of the second display area) in which the notification image is displayed, a customization content notification image that sequentially shows the contents of settings different from the initial settings is displayed. Ru. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player of the number and contents of settings different from the initial settings in an easy-to-understand manner while suppressing the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems.

Note that these customization number notification images and customization content notification images are similarly displayed in the upper area of the third display screen 72a even while the non-gaming reset selection screen is being displayed (see FIG. 57). Therefore, the player must check the number and content of settings that are different from the initial settings based on the customization number notification image and the customization content notification image, and then decide whether or not to reset these settings. It is possible to judge.

(Volume/light intensity adjustment screen)
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 55, when the player operates (presses) the left or right key while the customization reception screen (see FIG. 55(A)) is displayed, the volume/light intensity adjustment screen appears on the third display screen 72a. is displayed (see FIG. 55(B)). Specifically, the characters "Volume" forming the volume image included in the volume/light amount adjustment screen are highlighted, and the volume can be adjusted. This volume/light amount adjustment screen is configured to include a volume image, a light amount image, a first cross key image, a second cross key image, and a first effect button image.

Here, the volume image (see FIG. 55(B)) is a display object that is highlighted among five display objects that each contain a number from "1" to "5" and have different sizes. This is an image that shows the volume by the number of . The light intensity image (see FIG. 55(B)) is determined by the number of highlighted display objects among five display objects each containing a number from "1" to "5" and having different sizes. This is an image showing the amount of light.

The first effect button image (see FIG. 55(B)) is an image imitating the first effect button 63a, and the words "Decision" are displayed directly below the first effect button image. Therefore, the player determines (confirms) the volume and light intensity, which have been changed (increased or decreased) by operating the cross key while the volume/light intensity adjustment screen is displayed, by operating (pressing) the first effect button 63a. It can be easily recognized that it is possible to

The second cross key image (see FIG. 55(B)) is a cross key image displayed between the first cross key image and the first effect button image, and the up key and down key are the left key and The right key is highlighted. The words "increase/decrease" are displayed directly below the second cross key image. Therefore, a player who sees the second cross-key image and the text directly below it knows that it is possible to increase or decrease the volume (or light intensity) by operating the up or down key on the cross-key. can be easily recognized.

Note that, as is clear from the notation in FIG. 55(B), the display object that includes the text "Volume" that makes up the volume image is displayed with more emphasis than the display object that includes the text "Light Amount" that makes up the light amount image. ing. In this state, the volume can be adjusted, and the player can increase or decrease the volume by operating the up or down key of the cross key. In FIG. 55(B), the display object containing the character "1" and the display object containing the character "2" are highlighted, indicating that the current volume is "2" out of five levels. It has been shown that On the other hand, for example, when the player operates the down key once, the display object containing the character "1" becomes highlighted, and when the player operates the first effect button 63a, the volume is changed to the minimum "1". Conversely, for example, if the player operates the up key twice, four display objects from the display object containing the character "1" to the display object containing the character "4" become highlighted, and the player When the user operates the first effect button 63a, the volume is changed to "4".

The first cross-key image (see FIG. 55(B)) is a cross-key image displayed to the left of the second cross-key image, and the left and right keys are highlighted more than the up and down keys. ing. The words "switch" are displayed directly below the first cross key image. Therefore, the player who sees the first cross-key image and the text directly below it can customize the volume/light intensity adjustment screen by operating the left key of the cross-key (see Figure 55(A)). You can easily recognize that it is possible to change the state to a state where the light amount can be adjusted by returning the screen to 1 and operating the right key.

When the player operates the right key of the cross key only once while the volume/light intensity adjustment screen illustrated in FIG. Instead, the display object including the characters "light amount" forming the light amount image is highlighted. In this state, the amount of light can be adjusted as described above, and the player can increase or decrease the amount of light by operating the up or down key of the cross key. In FIG. 55(B), the display object containing the character "1" to the display object containing the character "4" is highlighted, indicating that the current light amount is "4" out of five levels. It is shown. On the other hand, for example, when the player operates the down key twice, the display object containing the character "1" and the display object containing the character "2" are highlighted, and the player By operating the effect button 63a, the light amount is changed to "2". Conversely, for example, when the player operates the up key once, all five display objects, from the display object containing the character "1" to the display object containing the character "5", become highlighted, and the game ends. When the person operates the first performance button 63a, the volume is changed to the maximum "5".

(Production customization screen)
In addition, when the display object containing the words "light level" is highlighted, that is, when the volume/light level adjustment screen indicating that the light level can be adjusted is displayed, the player operates the right key once. Then, the volume/light amount adjustment screen is switched to the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)). This effect customization screen includes a premier mode setting image, a one-shot announcement mode setting image, a look-ahead reduction mode setting image, an auto button setting image, a back button suggestion setting image, a treble adjustment setting image, and a third cross. It is configured to include a key image, a fourth cross key image, and a first effect button image.

Here, the premier mode setting image is an image showing the setting status of the premier mode, and when the premier mode is not set, the text "OFF" is highlighted, and instead of the text "OFF", When the characters "ON" are highlighted as illustrated in FIG. 55(C), the premium mode is set. The one-shot notification mode setting image is an image showing the setting status of the one-shot notification mode, and when the one-shot notification mode is not set, the text "OFF" is highlighted (see Figure 55 (C)). ), when the text "ON" is highlighted instead of the text "OFF", the one-shot notification mode is set.

The read-ahead reduction mode setting image is an image showing the setting status of the read-ahead reduction mode, and when the read-ahead reduction mode is not set, the text "OFF" is highlighted, and instead of the text "OFF", When the characters "ON" are highlighted as illustrated in FIG. 55(C), the read-ahead reduction mode is set. The auto button setting image is an image showing the setting status of the auto button, and when the auto button function is not enabled, the word "OFF" is highlighted (see Figure 55 (C)), and the word "OFF" is displayed. When the text "ON" is highlighted instead of the text, the auto button function is enabled.

The back button suggestion setting image is an image showing the setting status of back button suggestion, and when the back button suggestion function is not enabled, the word "OFF" is highlighted, and the word "OFF" is displayed instead of "OFF". , when the character "ON" is highlighted as illustrated in FIG. 55(C), the back button suggestion function is enabled. The treble adjustment setting image is an image showing the setting status of treble adjustment, and when the treble adjustment function is not enabled, the word "OFF" is highlighted (see Figure 55 (C)), and the word "OFF" is displayed. When the text "ON" is highlighted instead of the text "ON", the treble adjustment function is enabled.

The first effect button image (see FIG. 55(C)) is an image imitating the first effect button 63a, and is used to switch between "ON" and "OFF" of the setting image where the cursor is located. Directly below this first effect button image, the words "Decision Change" are displayed. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 55(C), the cursor is positioned so as to surround an item image containing the words "one-shot notification mode" that constitutes the one-shot notification mode setting image, and the item image containing the words "OFF ” is highlighted, when the player operates the first effect button 63a, the word “ON” is highlighted (instead of the word “OFF”) and the game enters the one-shot notification mode. Set.

The fourth cross key image (see FIG. 55(C)) is an image displayed between the third cross key image and the first effect button image, and the up key and down key are lower than the left key and right key. is also highlighted. The words "Move cursor" are displayed directly below the fourth cross key image. Therefore, the player who sees the fourth cross key image and the characters immediately below it can move the cursor up or down by operating the up or down key of the cross key. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 55(C), in a situation where the cursor is positioned so as to surround an item image that includes the words "one-shot notification mode," the player operates the lower key of the cross pad once. Then, the cursor moves downward so as to surround the item image including the words "prefetch reduction mode" instead of the item image including the words "one shot notification mode". When the player operates the first effect button 63a in this state, the characters "ON" are highlighted instead of the characters "OFF" related to the prefetch reduction mode setting image, and the prefetch reduction mode is set.

Note that, as illustrated in FIG. 55(C), when effect customization is performed so that the text "ON" is strongly displayed for three setting images, the customization including the text "Product customization 3" is performed. A number notification image (see FIG. 55(A)) is displayed.

The third cross-key image (see FIG. 55(C)) is a cross-key image displayed to the left of the fourth cross-key image, and the left and right keys are highlighted more than the up and down keys. ing. The words "switch" are displayed directly below the third cross key image. Therefore, a player who sees the third cross-key image and the text directly below it can switch the production customization screen to the volume/light intensity adjustment screen by operating the left key of the cross-key, and then operate the right key. This makes it possible to easily recognize that the effect customization screen can be switched to the in-game reset selection screen (see FIG. 55(D)).

(Reset selection screen during gaming)
When the player operates the right key of the cross key while the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)) is displayed, the effect customization screen is switched to the in-game reset selection screen (see FIG. 55(D)). As illustrated in FIG. 55(D), this in-game reset selection screen includes a message "Do you want to reset the production settings?", a selection item for "No", and a selection item for "Yes". It is configured to include a fifth cross key image and a first effect button image.

Here, in the fifth cross key image, the up key and down key are highlighted more than the left and right keys, and the player can select "No" by operating the up key or down key of the cross key. It is possible to move the cursor between the selection item ``Yes'' and the selection item ``Yes''. The first effect button image is an image that imitates the first effect button 63a, and the words "OK" are displayed directly below it.

By the way, in the initial settings of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, the premium mode setting image, the one-shot notification mode setting image, the look-ahead reduction mode setting image, and the auto button on the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)) are The setting image, the back button suggestion setting image, and the treble adjustment setting image are all in a state where the text "OFF" is highlighted. On the other hand, as illustrated in FIG. 55(C), when the player operates the up key or down key of the cross pad in a state where three settings are set differently from the initial settings, When the cursor is moved to the selection item "Yes" and the first effect button 63a is operated in this state, all settings classified as the second setting are returned to the initial settings. As a result, on the production customization screen, the premier mode setting image, one-shot announcement mode setting image, look-ahead reduction mode setting image, auto button setting image, back button suggestion setting image, and treble adjustment setting image are all set to "OFF". The characters will be highlighted.

(end screen)
Although not shown in the figure, when the player operates the right key of the cross key while the reset selection screen is displayed during the game, a predetermined end screen is displayed. This exit screen displays the message "Do you want to end the production settings?", a selection item for "Yes", a selection item for "No", a cross-key image similar to the fifth cross-key image above, and a cross-key image similar to the fifth cross-key image above. 1 effect button image is displayed, and when the player operates the first effect button 63a with the cursor positioned so as to surround the "Yes" selection item, the effect setting is completed and the customization reception screen ( (see FIG. 55(A)) is displayed again.

(Reset selection screen during non-gaming)
FIG. 57 is a screen diagram illustrating a non-gaming reset selection screen displayed on the first display screen 7a of the first image display device 7. In FIG. 57, three performance symbols showing a random number of "526" are displayed in a stopped state to notify that the judgment result of the first special symbol validity judgment executed in the low-accuracy, low-base state is a "loss". An example of the situation is shown below. Here, if the right to determine the validity of the first special symbol is reserved, a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.6 seconds) has elapsed since the first special symbol and production symbol that notify the loss are stopped and displayed. When the elapsed time has elapsed, the suspended first special symbol validity determination is executed, and variable display of the next first special symbol and performance symbol is started. On the other hand, if the right to determine the validity of the first special symbol is not reserved, the game performance non-progress state in which the game performance that displays the performance symbols in a variable manner does not proceed will continue, and the game production will transition to the game production non-progress state. When a first period of time (10 seconds in the second embodiment) has elapsed, a non-gaming reset selection screen is displayed (see FIG. 57).

As illustrated in FIG. 57, this non-gaming reset selection screen includes a message "Customization of production is in progress. Do you want to reset?", a selection item for ``Yes'', and a selection item for ``No''. It is configured to include a cross key image in which the up key and the down key are highlighted more than the left key and right key, and a first effect button image imitating the first effect button 63a.

On the non-gaming reset selection screen, the player can move the cursor to the "Yes" selection item or "No" selection item by operating the up or down key on the cross key. If the first effect button 63a is operated with the cursor positioned on the selection item "No", the setting changes made to the effect customization screen are maintained. Conversely, if the first effect button 63a is operated while the cursor is positioned on the "Yes" selection item, the setting changes made to the effect customization screen are reset and classified into the second setting. All settings will be returned to their default settings.

However, the non-gaming reset selection screen is a selection screen for resetting the second settings, not a selection screen for resetting the first settings. Therefore, when the first effect button 63a is operated while the cursor is positioned on the "Yes" selection item while the non-game reset selection screen is displayed, the settings classified as the first settings are changed. It will never be reset. As mentioned above, the settings classified as the first settings (in the second embodiment, the settings related to the volume and the settings related to the light intensity) are set after the game production non-progress state is entered and the game production non-progress state ends. If the second period of time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed without any action being taken, the settings will be reset to the initial settings.

Furthermore, while the reset selection screen is displayed during non-gaming, it is necessary for the player to select whether or not to reset the effect settings, so when the right or left key of the cross key is operated , it is not preferable to display the volume/light amount adjustment screen (see FIG. 55(B)) or the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)). Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, instead of the message "You can customize the effect" (see FIG. 55(A)) in the lower area of the third display screen 72a, the message "Other selection screen displayed" is displayed. In addition to displaying a message such as ", for example, a cross key image is displayed semi-transparently to clearly inform the player that performance customization is not possible (see FIG. 57).

[About the permission period for various operations related to production settings]
Next, while referring to FIG. 58, the permission period during which the volume/light intensity adjustment operation is permitted on the volume/light intensity adjustment screen (see FIG. 55(B)), and the effect customization on the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)) The permission period during which the operation is permitted and the permission period during which the reset selection operation on the non-gaming reset selection screen (see FIG. 57) is permitted will be explained. Here, FIG. 58 is a time chart illustrating the permission periods for volume/light intensity adjustment, effect customization, and reset selection during non-gaming.

As illustrated in FIG. 58(A), for example, when the game is controlled in a low-accuracy, low-base state, in a situation where the first special symbol is repeatedly displayed fluctuating and stopping, the first special symbol is The effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner along with the variable display, and the effect symbols are stopped and displayed as the first special symbol stops being displayed. In this way, in the game performance progress state where the game performance is intermittently performed in which the performance symbols are displayed variably in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol, the customization reception screen described above based on FIG. 55(A) etc. is always displayed. Displayed. Therefore, when the game performance is in progress, by operating the left or right key of the cross key while the customization reception screen is displayed to display the volume/light adjustment screen, you can adjust the volume classified as the first setting. The amount of light can be adjusted. In addition, when the game performance is in progress, by operating the left or right key of the cross key to display the performance customization screen while the customization reception screen is displayed, various settings classified as the second setting can be changed. It is possible.

Therefore, it can be said that the game performance progress state is a permission period in which volume and light intensity adjustment is permitted, and a permission period in which performance customization is permitted. Note that the reset selection screen during non-gaming will not be displayed until the first time (10 seconds in this embodiment 2) has elapsed after the game performance stopped progressing, that is, after the fluctuating display of the performance symbols was no longer performed. The display of (see FIG. 57) does not start. Therefore, the period from when the game effect is not progressed until the first time elapses is also a permission period during which volume and light amount adjustment and effect customization are permitted (see FIG. 58(A)).

On the other hand, when the first time period has elapsed since the game performance stopped progressing and the game performance transitioned to the non-progress state, the display of the reset selection screen during non-gaming is started. While this non-gaming reset selection screen is displayed, operations of the left key and right key of the cross key are disabled (see the screen diagram of the third display screen 72a in FIG. 57). It is not possible to display the volume/light intensity adjustment screen or the production customization screen by operating the right key. Therefore, while the reset selection screen is displayed during non-gaming, it can be said that it is a prohibited period in which volume/light intensity adjustment and production customization are prohibited.

In FIG. 58(A), performance customization is reset on the non-gaming reset selection screen while the game performance non-progress state continues even after the first time has elapsed since the transition to the game performance non-progress state. A case is illustrated in which a choice is made as to whether or not to do so. In this case, the display of the reset selection screen during non-gaming ends when a selection is made as to whether or not to reset while the game performance is not progressing, and along with this, volume/light intensity adjustment and performance customization are permitted. (See Figure 58(A)).

The non-gaming reset selection screen is a selection screen that is displayed when the game performance is not in progress, and is not displayed when the game performance is in progress. Therefore, although not shown in FIG. 58, if a game ball enters the first starting port 20 during the game performance progress state and the game performance progress state shifts from the game performance non-progress state, the game performance progress state is changed to the game performance progress state. The reset selection screen is erased from the first display screen 7a, and accordingly, a transition is made to a permission period in which volume/light amount adjustment and performance customization are permitted.

FIG. 58(B) illustrates a case where the first special symbol and the second special symbol change simultaneously in the low-accuracy, low-base state. In the pachinko game machine 1 of the second embodiment, the third starting port 26 is always open like the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment. Therefore, by the player hitting right, it is possible to easily win the game ball into the third starting hole 26, and in the low-probability low base state, the second ball selected according to this winning is possible. The structure is such that a variation pattern with an extremely long variation time of 600 seconds is likely to be selected as a variation pattern of the special symbol (see FIG. 9). For this reason, when the game is controlled in a low-accuracy, low-base state, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may change simultaneously.

One of the production symbols, in the low-accuracy, low-base state, is displayed fluctuating and stopping in conjunction with the first special symbol, but it is not fluctuating and being displayed in a static manner in conjunction with the second special symbol. . Therefore, as illustrated in FIG. 58(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends in a situation where the variable display of the second special symbol continues in the low probability low base state, this With the end of the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the performance symbols also ends, and the game performance progress state shifts to the game performance non-progress state.

In this way, when transitioning from the simultaneous fluctuation state in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously fluctuate to the game performance non-progress state, the game performance non-progress state is performed in the same way as described above based on FIG. 58(A). When a first period of time (10 seconds in this embodiment 2) has elapsed after the game entered the progress state, a non-game reset selection screen starts to be displayed, and along with this, volume/light intensity adjustment and presentation customization are prohibited. This will lead to a period of prohibition.

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 58, if the predetermined operation for adjusting the volume and light intensity is performed when the reset selection screen is not displayed during non-gaming, the performance control microcomputer 91 On the other hand, while the reset selection screen is displayed during non-gaming, even if a predetermined operation is performed to adjust the volume and light intensity, the volume and light intensity will not be changed in accordance with the predetermined operation. It is configured like this. Furthermore, if the selection of whether or not to return various settings classified as the second setting to the initial settings is made while the non-gaming reset selection screen is displayed, the display of the non-gaming reset selection screen will end. , Along with this, changes in volume and light intensity are permitted.

<Production control based on first setting>
(Output control of production sound)
When an operation is performed to change the volume on the volume/light amount adjustment screen (see FIG. 55(B)), the following process is executed in the pachinko game machine 1 of the second embodiment. That is, the RAM of the sub-control board 90 stores volume information indicating the current volume. The production control microcomputer 91 updates the volume information to indicate the volume selected by the player when a predetermined operation is performed on the volume/light amount adjustment screen to change the volume. Then, the audio control board 106 is caused to perform a process of outputting a performance sound (for example, a game performance sound outputted along with a game performance) from the speaker 67 at the volume indicated by the updated volume information.

(Display control of production images)
When an operation is performed to change the light intensity on the volume/light intensity adjustment screen (see FIG. 55(B)), the following process is executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment. That is, the RAM of the image control board 100 stores light amount information indicating the current amount of light. When a predetermined operation is performed on the volume/light amount adjustment screen to change the light amount, the performance control microcomputer 91 sends a light amount command to the image control board 100 to notify that an operation to change the light amount has been performed. do.

This light amount command includes information indicating the light amount selected by the player, and the image control microcomputer 101 selects the light amount to indicate the light amount specified from the information included in the received light amount command. Update information. Then, the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71 and the display control of the third image display device 72.

<Production control based on second setting>
(Premier mode)
When an operation for setting the premium mode is performed on the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)), the following process is executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment. The ROM of the sub-control board 90 stores a normal mode premiere performance determination table and a premier mode premier performance determination table. These premium performance determination tables are used when deciding whether to execute a premiere performance when the judgment result of the first special symbol validity judgment performed during the low-accuracy, low-base state is a "jackpot". This is a table that is referred to in the table, and in each case, a random value is associated with each of "with premiere performance" and "without premiere performance". In addition, in the premiere performance determination table for the premier mode, more random values are associated with "premium performance available" than in the premiere performance determination table for the normal mode.

When the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a fluctuation start command related to the first special symbol validity determination from the main control board 80 while the game is being controlled in a low-accuracy, low-base state, the performance control microcomputer 91 receives the fluctuation start command included in the fluctuation start command. Based on information indicating the determination result of the first special symbol validity determination, it is determined whether the current determination result of the first special symbol validity determination is a "jackpot". Here, if it is determined that it is a "big hit", processing is performed to determine whether or not to execute the premiere performance.

Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 uses the value of the timing at which the fluctuation start command related to the "jackpot" is received, regarding the premium performance execution decision random number that is updated as appropriate every time the random number update process in the sub-control board 90 is performed. is obtained as the random number for determining the execution of the premiere performance. Then, normally, the premiere performance is executed based on whether or not the acquired random number for determining the execution of the premiere performance matches the random number associated with "with premiere performance" in the normal mode premiere performance determination table. Decide whether or not.

On the other hand, if an operation is performed on the production customization screen to set the premium mode and the production control microcomputer 91 is set to the premium mode, the production control microcomputer 91 determines that the obtained premium production execution decision random number is the premium mode for the premium mode. It is determined whether or not to perform the premiere performance based on whether or not the random number value corresponds to "with premiere performance" in the performance determination table.

As described above, in the premiere performance determination table for the premier mode, more random values are associated with "with premier performance" compared to the premiere performance determination table for the normal mode. For this reason, when the premium mode is set, the appearance rate of premier effects is improved compared to when the premium mode is not set.

(One shot notification mode)
When an operation for setting the one-shot notification mode is performed on the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)), the following process is executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment. The ROM of the sub-control board 90 stores a one-shot announcement determination table for normal mode and a one-shot announcement determination table for one-shot announcement mode. These one-shot announcement decision tables determine whether or not to execute a one-shot announcement when the judgment result of the first special symbol validity judgment performed during the low-probability, low-base state is a "jackpot". This is a table that is referred to when making a notification, and in both cases, a random value is associated with each of "one-shot notification" and "one-shot notification not available." Furthermore, in the one-shot announcement determination table for one-shot announcement mode, more random values are associated with "one-shot announcement" than in the one-shot announcement determination table for normal mode.

When the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a fluctuation start command related to the first special symbol validity determination from the main control board 80 while the game is being controlled in a low-accuracy, low-base state, the performance control microcomputer 91 receives the fluctuation start command included in the fluctuation start command. Based on information indicating the determination result of the first special symbol validity determination, it is determined whether the current determination result of the first special symbol validity determination is a "jackpot". Here, if it is determined that it is a "jackpot", a process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a one-shot announcement.

Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines the timing at which the fluctuation start command related to the "jackpot" is received, regarding the one-shot announcement execution decision random number that is updated as appropriate every time the random number update process in the sub-control board 90 is performed. Obtain the value as a random number for one-shot announcement execution decision. Then, normally, a one-shot announcement is executed based on whether the obtained one-shot announcement execution decision random number matches the random number associated with "one-shot announcement" in the one-shot announcement determination table for normal mode. Decide whether to carry out the announcement.

On the other hand, when the operation for setting the one-shot announcement mode is performed on the production customization screen and the one-shot announcement mode is set, the production control microcomputer 91 determines that the acquired one-shot announcement execution decision random number is , it is determined whether or not to execute the one-shot announcement based on whether the random number value corresponds to "one-shot announcement" in the one-shot announcement determination table for the one-shot announcement mode.

As described above, in the one-shot announcement determination table for one-shot announcement mode, more random values are associated with "one-shot announcement" than in the one-shot announcement determination table for normal mode. Therefore, when the one-shot announcement mode is set, the appearance rate of one-shot announcements is improved compared to the case where the one-shot announcement mode is not set.

(Read ahead reduction mode)
When an operation for setting the prefetch reduction mode is performed on the effect customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)), the following process is executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment. The ROM of the sub-control board 90 stores a pre-read performance determination table for the normal mode and a pre-read performance determination table for the reduced pre-read mode. These pre-read effect determination tables are tables that are referred to when deciding whether or not to perform a so-called pre-read effect based on the result of the advance judgment described above in the first embodiment, and all of them are tables that are referred to when deciding whether or not to perform a so-called pre-read effect. ” and “No look-ahead effect” are each associated with a random value. In addition, in the look-ahead effect determination table for the look-ahead reduction mode, a smaller random number value than in the look-ahead effect determination table for the normal mode is associated with "with look-ahead effect".

When the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a special figure 1 starting ball entry command from the main control board 80 while the game is being controlled in a low-accuracy, low-base state, the production control microcomputer 91 receives the command included in the special drawing 1 starting ball entry command from the main control board 80. Based on the advance determination information, it is determined whether or not the advance look effect can be executed. Specifically, for example, when the corresponding first special symbol propriety determination is executed based on the preliminary determination information, it is determined whether a fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol whose fluctuation time is longer than a predetermined time is selected. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the prefetch effect can be executed. Here, if it is determined that the pre-read effect can be executed, processing is performed to determine whether or not to actually execute the pre-read effect.

Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 controls the pre-read performance execution determination random number, which is updated as appropriate every time the random number update process is performed in the sub-control board 90, based on which the pre-read performance is determined to be executable. The value of the timing at which the special figure 1 starting ball entering command including the judgment information is received is acquired as a pre-reading performance execution decision random number. Then, normally, the prefetch effect is executed based on whether the acquired prefetch effect execution decision random number matches the random number associated with "prefetch effect available" in the normal mode prefetch effect determination table. Decide whether or not.

On the other hand, when the operation for setting the prefetch reduction mode is performed on the effect customization screen and the prefetch reduction mode is set, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the acquired prefetch effect execution decision random number is set to the prefetch reduction mode. It is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read effect based on whether or not it matches the random number value associated with "with pre-read effect" in the mode pre-read effect determination table.

As described above, in the look-ahead performance determination table for the look-ahead reduction mode, a smaller random number is associated with "with look-ahead performance" compared to the look-ahead performance determination table for the normal mode. Therefore, when the prefetch reduction mode is set, the appearance rate of the prefetch effect is lower than when the prefetch reduction mode is not set.

(auto button)
When an operation is performed to enable the auto button on the performance customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)), the following process is executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment. At the start of a game performance, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a valid period during which the operation of the first performance button 63a (or second performance button 63b) is valid. On the other hand, when the validity period starts, the image control microcomputer 101 displays a button image imitating the first effect button 63a (or second effect button 63b) and an operation prompting, for example, "Press!" An operation promotion effect is executed in which promotion characters and a validity period gauge indicating the remaining time of the validity period are displayed on the first display screen 7a.

When the auto button function is not valid, if the player operates the first effect button 63a (or second effect button 63b) during the above-mentioned valid period, an operation notification command to notify the user of the operation is sent to the image from the sub-control board 90. The information is transmitted to the control board 100, and, for example, an operation-responsive effect of displaying a predetermined effect image on the first display screen 7a is executed. Conversely, if no operation is performed during the validity period, such operation-corresponding effects will not be executed.

On the other hand, when an operation to enable the auto button is performed on the production customization screen and the auto button function is enabled, the production control microcomputer 91, for example, At a timing when half of this valid period has elapsed, a command instructing execution of the operation corresponding effect is transmitted to the image control board 100. In this way, by the player performing a predetermined operation to enable the auto button on the effect customization screen, the operation can be supported without operating the first effect button 63a (or second effect button 63b). It is possible to execute the performance.

(auto button)
When an operation is performed to enable the back button suggestion on the performance customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)), the following process is executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment. For example, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a valid period during which the operation of the first performance button 63a becomes valid during the game performance when starting the game performance. During the validity period set in this way, there are times when the above-mentioned operation promotion effect is not executed, and the player may, for example, press the back button based on the effect image displayed on the first display screen 7a. It is necessary to specify the valid period and operate the first effect button 63a during the valid period to generate the operation corresponding effect.

On the other hand, when an operation to enable back button suggestion is performed on the production customization screen and the function of back button suggestion is enabled, the production control microcomputer 91, for example, controls the operation promotion production described above. During the valid period without any activation, the button lamp built in the first effect button 63a is turned on via the lamp control board 107. In this way, if the player performs a predetermined operation to enable the back button suggestion on the effect customization screen, the button image, operation promotion text, and validity period gauge may not be displayed during the validity period. However, it is possible to suggest (suggest) to the player that the validity period is still in effect.

(treble adjustment)
When an operation is performed to enable treble adjustment on the performance customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)), the following process is executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment. When the treble adjustment function is not enabled, the performance control microcomputer 91 outputs the first game performance sound accompanying the game performance from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106, for example.

On the other hand, when an operation for enabling treble adjustment is performed on the production customization screen and the treble adjustment function is enabled, the production control microcomputer 91 controls the treble adjustment via the audio control board 106. A second game performance sound obtained by cutting the high range of the first game performance sound is output from a speaker 67. Thereby, it is possible to output performance sounds that are less likely to be harsh to the player's ears.

[Win waiting command reception process by sub-control board 90]
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the winning waiting command reception process executed in the sub control board 90 will be described. Here, FIG. 59 is a flowchart illustrating the winning waiting command reception process executed in the sub control board 90.

The game control microcomputer 81 controls the first special symbol when the variable display of the first special symbol ends while the right to determine the validity of the first special symbol is not reserved while the game is controlled in a low-accuracy, low-base state. A winning waiting command is sent to the sub control board 90 to notify that the game ball is waiting for the winning of the game ball to the starting hole 20. In this way, when the game balls are in a state of waiting for winning, the game production in which the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner along with the variable display of the first special symbol does not proceed, so the production control microcomputer 91 executes this wait for winning command. By receiving the information, it is possible to specify the transition from the game performance progress state to the game performance non-progress state.

As illustrated in FIG. 59, the production control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not it has received the prize waiting command transmitted from the main control board 80 as described above (step S111). Here, if it is determined that the prize waiting command has been received (step S111: YES), that is, if the game performance has transitioned to the non-progress state, measurement of the elapsed time since the transition to the game production non-progress state is started. (Step S112), and the measurement flag stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 is set to "ON" (Step S113). This measurement flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the elapsed time from the transition to the game production non-progress state is being measured. When the elapsed time measurement starts, it is set to "ON" and the elapsed time is set to "ON". It is set to "OFF" at the end of the time.

When the performance control microcomputer 91 executes the process of step S113 or determines that the prize waiting command has not been received (step S111: NO), the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether the measurement flag is set to "ON" or not. (Step S114). Here, if it is determined that the counting flag is not set to "ON" (step S114: NO), the series of winning waiting command reception processing is completed and the processing is returned to step S111.

When the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the measurement flag is set to "ON" (step S114: YES), the performance control microcomputer 91 waits for a first time after transitioning to the game performance non-progress state (in the second embodiment, 10 seconds) has elapsed (step S115). Specifically, when measurement of the elapsed time is started by the process of step S112, information indicating the elapsed time (elapsed time information) is stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90, and updated as appropriate as time passes. Therefore, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether the first time has elapsed since the transition to the game performance non-progress state based on whether or not the elapsed time specified by this elapsed time information matches the first time. Determine whether or not.

If the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the first time has elapsed since the transition to the game performance non-progress state (step S115: YES), the production control microcomputer 91 issues, for example, a command instructing to start displaying the reset selection screen during non-gaming. By transmitting the data to the image control board 100, the image control microcomputer 101 starts displaying the reset selection screen during non-gaming (step S116). Then, the adjustment/change prohibition flag stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is set to "ON" (step S117). This adjustment/change prohibition flag is used when the volume/light intensity adjustment screen (see Figure 55 (B)) is displayed, and when the production customization screen (see Figure 55 (B)) is displayed. This is a flag that indicates whether or not changing the performance customization is prohibited.It is set to "ON" when the non-gaming reset selection screen starts to be displayed, and the display of the non-gaming reset selection screen is flagged. Upon completion, it is set to "OFF".

The production control microcomputer 91 executes the process of step S117, or if it is determined that the first time has not elapsed since the transition to the game production non-progress state (step S115: NO), the production control microcomputer 91 executes the game production non-progress state. It is determined whether a second period of time (5 minutes in the second embodiment) has elapsed since the transition to the progress state (step S118). Specifically, based on whether or not the elapsed time specified by the elapsed time information stored in the RAM matches the second time, it is determined whether the second time has elapsed since the transition to the game production non-progress state. Determine whether or not. Here, if it is determined that the second time has elapsed since the transition to the game production non-progress state (step S118: YES), the volume and light amount are reset (step S119). Specifically, the volume information stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is updated to indicate "1", which is the minimum volume, and the light amount information stored in the RAM of the image control board 100 is updated. A command is sent to the image control board 100 instructing execution of a process for updating the light amount information to indicate "5" which is the maximum light amount.

In this way, the performance control microcomputer 91 controls the game performance based on the determination result of the first special symbol validity determination in the low-accuracy, low-base state when the settings classified as the second settings have been changed from the initial settings. When a first time elapses without the game performance non-progress state ending after the game performance is shifted to a non-progress state in which no progress is made, the display of a reset selection screen during non-gaming is started. Then, when a second time (longer than the first time) has elapsed without the game performance non-progress state ending after the transition to the game production non-progress state, the first setting (here, the light intensity/volume setting) ) to the initial settings.

[Operation response processing by sub-control board 90]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, the operation corresponding processing executed in the sub-control board 90 will be described. Here, FIGS. 60 and 61 are flowcharts illustrating the operation corresponding processing executed in the sub-control board 90. The production control microcomputer 91 executes the operation corresponding processing described below when the first production button 63a, the second production button 63b, or the cross key is operated.

That is, as illustrated in FIG. 60, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether a detection signal from the first production button detection switch 63c, the second production button detection switch 63d, or the key operation detection switch 63e is input. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the player has performed an operation (step S120). Here, if it is determined that no operation has been performed by the player (step S120: NO), the operation response process is completed and the process returns to step S120.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, the first time (10 seconds in the second embodiment) has elapsed without the game production non-progress state ending after the game production non-progress state was entered. A configuration has been adopted in which the display of the reset selection screen is started during non-game play under the condition that: That is, in this configuration, for example, if a player who is playing a game attempts to adjust the volume and light intensity or customize the performance by operating the cross key or the first performance button 63a immediately after the game transitions to the non-progress state, Despite this, after the first period of time has passed since the game production transitioned to the non-progress state, the non-gaming reset selection screen starts to be displayed, making it impossible to adjust the volume and light intensity or customize the production. Problems may arise.

Therefore, in order to prevent such problems from occurring, for example, if the player performs an operation between the transition to the game performance non-progress state and the elapse of the first time, the game performance It is conceivable to also adopt a configuration in which the reset selection screen is not displayed during non-gaming by stopping the measurement of the time elapsed since the transition to the non-progress state.

However, if such a configuration is adopted carelessly, another problem may occur, such as the inability to collectively reset various settings classified into the second setting.
Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, in order to suppress the occurrence of such another problem, the player's operation is not performed before the first time elapses after transitioning to the game production non-progress state. When the operation is performed, the elapsed time from the transition to the game performance non-progress state is reset, and the elapsed time is measured again based on the timing when the operation was performed. Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 executes the following processing.

That is, when the production control microcomputer 91 determines that the player has performed the operation (step S120: YES), the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether the measurement flag stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is set to "ON". It is determined whether or not (step S121). That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the transition to the game performance non-progress state is being measured. Here, if it is determined that the measurement flag is set to "ON" (step S121: YES), the elapsed time indicated by the elapsed time information stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 becomes "0". The elapsed time is reset (step S122), and measurement of the elapsed time is started anew (step S123).

In this way, when the measurement flag is set to "ON", by performing the process of step S122 and the process of step S123, the last operation performed by the player in the game production non-progress state is The display of the non-gaming reset selection screen is started at the timing when the first time has elapsed since the start of the reset selection screen, and as a result, it is possible to solve the above-mentioned plurality of problems at the same time.

In addition, here, when an operation is performed by the player in the state where the game production is not progressing, the display of the reset selection screen during non-gaming starts at the timing when the first time has elapsed since the operation was performed. will be described as an example, but in other embodiments, a third time period (for example, 7 seconds) shorter than the first time period has elapsed since the last operation by the player in the game performance non-progress state. The display of the reset selection screen during non-gaming may be started at the same timing.

When the performance control microcomputer 91 executes the process of step S123, or when it determines that the measurement flag is not set to "ON" (step S121: NO), the game performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the game performance is in progress. is determined (step S124). For example, if a variation stop command has not yet been received after receiving a variation start command related to the first special symbol propriety determination from the main control board 80, it can be determined that the game performance is in progress. Further, if the fixed time (for example, 0.6 seconds) has not elapsed since receiving the fluctuation stop command (the special symbols are stopped and displayed), it can be determined that the game performance is in progress.

If the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the game performance is in progress (step S124: YES), it determines whether or not the operation promotion performance is within the valid period (step S125). When an operation promotion performance is executed during a game performance including a variable display of performance symbols, information indicating the validity period of the operation promotion performance is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. For this reason, when the operation promotion effect is executed, it is determined that the operation promotion effect is still valid based on the elapsed time since the game effect was started and the information indicating the validity period stored in the RAM. It can be determined whether or not. Note that if the information indicating the valid period of the operation promotion effect is not stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90, it is determined in step S125 that the operation promotion effect is not within the valid period.

If the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the operation promotion performance is within the valid period (step S125: YES), it determines whether the performance button has been operated (step S126). Specifically, when an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 63a is executed, the first effect button 63a is activated based on the presence or absence of a detection signal from the first effect button detection switch 63c. Determine whether or not it has been operated. On the other hand, when an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the second effect button 63b is executed, it is determined whether the second effect button 63b has been operated based on the presence or absence of a detection signal from the second effect button detection switch 63d. Determine whether or not.

When the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the performance button has been operated (step S126: YES), the performance control microcomputer 91 executes the performance corresponding to the operation (step S127). For example, if the first performance button 63a is operated during an operation promotion performance performed before the reach of the performance symbol is established, a performance image showing a predetermined character uttering a line is displayed on the first display screen 7a. A command is sent to the image control board 100 to instruct the execution of an operation-responsive effect called a speech preview. Further, for example, if an operation promotion performance that prompts the operation of the second performance button 63b is executed at the end of the highly reliable reach performance, and the second performance button 63b is operated during the valid period of this operation promotion performance, the game performance On the condition that the judgment result of the first special symbol validity judgment carried out at the start of is a "jackpot", the movable decorative member 14 is operated, and the LED, board lamp 5, and frame built in the movable decorative member 14 are operated. A command is sent to the lamp control board 107 to instruct execution of an effect that causes the lamp 66 to emit light in rainbow colors.

On the other hand, if the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the operation promotion performance is not within the valid period (step S125: NO), it determines whether the left key or the right key of the cross key has been operated (step S128). . Here, since the determination in step S124 is "YES", the customization reception screen (see FIG. 55(A)), the volume/light intensity adjustment screen (see FIG. 55(B)), the production customization screen (see FIG. 55(C) ), or the in-game reset selection screen (see FIG. 55(D)) is displayed on the third display screen 72a, and these settings are displayed in response to the player's operation of the left or right cross key. It is necessary to switch the screen. In order to realize such screen switching processing, the production control microcomputer 91 executes the following processing.

That is, when the production control microcomputer 91 determines that the left key or the right key of the cross key has been operated (step S128: YES), it executes the switching process (step S129). Specifically, for example, if an operation of the right key is detected while the customization reception screen is displayed, a command is sent to the image control board 100 instructing execution of a process of switching the customization reception screen to a volume/light intensity adjustment screen. . Further, for example, if an operation of the left key is detected while the effect customization screen is being displayed, a command is sent to the image control board 100 instructing execution of processing for switching the effect customization screen to the volume/light amount adjustment screen. Further, for example, if an operation of the right key is detected while the effect customization screen is being displayed, a command is sent to the image control board 100 to instruct execution of processing for switching the effect customization screen to the in-game reset selection screen.

On the other hand, when the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the game performance is not in progress (step S124: NO), that is, when the game performance is in a non-progress state where the performance symbols are stopped and displayed, the sub-control board 90 It is determined whether the adjustment/change prohibition flag stored in the RAM is set to "ON" (step S130). This adjustment/change prohibition flag is a flag that is set to "ON" when the non-game reset selection screen (see FIG. 57) starts displaying (see steps S116 and 117 in FIG. 59). When the selection screen is not displayed, it is set to "OFF".

If the production control microcomputer 91 determines that the adjustment/change prohibition flag is not set to "ON" (step S130: NO), that is, if the reset selection screen is not displayed during non-gaming, the third display Since it is possible to switch between the various screens displayed on the screen 72a, the process in step S128 is executed in the same way as in the case where the determination in step S125 is "NO".

On the other hand, if the adjustment/change prohibition flag is set to "ON", the reset selection screen during non-gaming (see Figure 57) is being displayed, and depending on the operation of the up or down key on the cross key, The cursor must be moved between the "Yes" and "No" choices. Therefore, when the production control microcomputer 91 determines that the adjustment/change prohibition flag is set to "ON" (step S130: YES), it executes the process of step S132, which will be described later.

The performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the left or right key of the cross key is not operated (step S128: NO), or determines that the adjustment/change prohibition flag is set to "ON". (Step S130: YES), the upper key or the lower key of the cross key is activated based on whether a detection signal notifying that the upper key or the lower key of the cross key has been inputted from the key operation detection switch 63e. It is determined whether or not has been operated (step S132). Here, if it is determined that the up key or down key of the cross key is not operated (step S132: NO), the process proceeds to step S137 (see FIG. 61), which will be described later.

Note that while the customization reception screen (see FIG. 55(A)) is being displayed, the screen can be switched by the player operating the left or right key of the cross key. On the other hand, the up key and down key of the cross key do not function while the customization reception screen is displayed. Therefore, when the customization reception screen is being displayed, the determination in step S132 is not ``YES'', but the determination in step S132 is ``NO'', and the process proceeds to step S137.

When the production control microcomputer 91 determines that the up key or the down key of the cross key has been operated (step S132: YES), it determines whether the volume/light amount adjustment screen is being displayed (step S133). Specifically, the RAM of the sub-control board 100 stores a customization reception screen (see FIG. 55(A)), a volume/light intensity adjustment screen (see FIG. 55(B)), and a production customization screen (see FIG. 55(C)). ), and the in-game reset selection screen (see FIG. 55(D)), screen information indicating which screen is being displayed on the third display screen 72a is stored. In step S133, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether the volume/light amount adjustment screen is being displayed based on whether the screen indicated by the screen information stored in the RAM is the volume/light amount adjustment screen. Determine.

By the way, among the volume/light intensity adjustment screen, effect customization screen, and in-game reset selection screen illustrated in FIGS. It is only necessary to execute this on the volume/light adjustment screen; for the other two screens, it is necessary to execute cursor movement processing that moves the cursor according to the operation of the up or down key on the cross key. . Therefore, when the production control microcomputer 91 determines that the volume/light amount adjustment screen is being displayed (step S133: YES), it executes an increase/decrease process (step S134). Specifically, when a display object containing the word "volume" is highlighted on the volume/light amount adjustment screen (see FIG. 55(A)), the production control microcomputer 91 controls the effect in response to the operation of the up key. , sends a command to the image control board 100 to instruct the execution of a process to increase the number of highlighted display objects by one among the five display objects that make up the volume image, and in response to the operation of the down key, the volume image A command is sent to the image control board 100 to instruct execution of a process for reducing the number of highlighted display objects by one among the five display objects that make up the image control board 100 . In addition, when a display object including the characters "light amount" on the volume/light amount adjustment screen (see FIG. 55(A)) is highlighted, the production control microcomputer 91 displays a light amount image in response to the operation of the up key. A command is sent to the image control board 100 to instruct the execution of a process to increase the number of highlighted display objects by one among the five display objects that make up the display object, and a light intensity image is constructed in response to the operation of the down key. A command is sent to the image control board 100 to instruct execution of a process to reduce the number of highlighted display objects by one among the five display objects.

On the other hand, if the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the volume/light intensity adjustment screen is not being displayed (step S133: NO), that is, the performance customization screen (see FIG. 55(B)) or the in-game reset selection screen ( 55(C)), a command is sent to the image control board 100 to instruct execution of the process of moving the cursor as described above based on FIGS. 55(B) to (C).

If the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the up key or the down key of the cross key is not operated (step S132: NO), the volume/light intensity adjustment screen is being displayed, as illustrated in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S137). The determination process in step S137 is performed in the same manner as the process in step S133 described above.

When the production control microcomputer 91 determines that the volume/light intensity adjustment screen is being displayed (step S137: YES), the production control microcomputer 91 performs the processing in step S120 above based on the presence or absence of the detection signal from the first production button detection switch 63c. It is determined whether the operation determined to have been performed by the player is an operation of the first effect button 63a (step S138). Here, if it is determined that the first effect button 63a has been operated (step S138: YES), a volume/light amount setting process is executed (step S139). Specifically, when the volume increase/decrease process is executed in the process of step S134, the volume information is updated so that the volume information stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 indicates the volume after the volume increase/decrease process. . In addition, when an increase/decrease process related to the light amount is executed in the process of step S134 above, the notified information includes information notifying the light amount after the increase/decrease process, and specifies the light amount information stored in the RAM of the image control board 100. A command is sent to the image control board 100 instructing execution of an update process to indicate the amount of light to be used.

When the performance control microcomputer 91 executes the process of step S139, when it determines that the volume/light amount adjustment screen is not being displayed (step S137: NO), or when the player's operation is performed, the first performance button 63a is If it is determined that the operation is not (step S138: NO), it is determined whether or not the effect customization screen is being displayed based on the screen information stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 100 (step S140). .

When the production control microcomputer 91 determines that the production customization screen is being displayed (step S1410: YES), it executes the customization process (step S141). Specifically, the RAM of the sub-control board 90 stores customization information indicating the contents of various settings classified as the second setting, and the production control microcomputer 91 stores information that is included in the production customization screen. Update the customization information to reflect the settings changes for each setting. Then, a customization content notification pattern is set (step S142). Specifically, regarding the various settings displayed on the production customization screen, the number of settings that have been changed to "ON" is specified based on the customization information, and the production that is notified by the customization number notification image (see Fig. 56) is determined based on the customization information. , and stores information indicating the determination result in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as custom content notification setting information. In addition, regarding the various settings displayed on the production customization screen, the settings that have been changed to "ON" are specified based on the customization information, and the order in which the specified settings are displayed is determined. Information indicating the determination result is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as custom content notification setting information.

Following the process of step S142, the production control microcomputer 91 includes the two setting information stored in the RAM in the process of step S142, and the customization content notification (customization number notification image and customization information) described above based on FIG. A customization content notification command is sent to the image control board 100 to instruct execution of the content notification image (display of content notification image) (step S143). As a result, as described above based on FIG. 56, a customized number notification image is displayed that indicates the number of settings that are different from the initial settings among the various settings classified as the second settings. , customization content notification images are displayed to show in order the contents of settings that are different from the initial settings. In FIG. 56, since the premier mode, lookahead reduction mode, and back button suggestion are all set to "ON," the characters shown in the customization content notification image are "premier mode," "lookahead reduction mode," and " The example shows how the buttons are switched in the order of "back button suggestion".

When the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the performance customization screen is not being displayed (step S140: NO), the production control microcomputer 91 displays the reset selection screen during gaming (see FIG. 55(D)) or the reset selection screen during non-gaming (see FIG. 55(D)). 57) is being displayed, it is determined whether "Yes" is selected (step S144). Specifically, it is based on whether or not a detection signal notifying that the first performance button 63a has been operated is input from the first performance button detection switch 63c while the cursor is positioned on the "Yes" selection item. Then, it is determined whether "Yes" is selected. Here, if it is determined that "Yes" is not selected (step S144: NO), the series of operation corresponding processing is completed and the processing returns to step S120.

On the other hand, when the production control microcomputer 91 determines that "Yes" is selected (step S144: YES), it executes a customization initialization process (step S145). Specifically, the customization information stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is information indicating that all settings classified as the second setting are set to "OFF" (initial setting). Update your customization information.

If the production control microcomputer 91 executes the process of step S145, or if it determines that "yes" is not selected (step S144: NO), for example, Based on whether the adjustment/change prohibition flag is set to "ON", it is determined whether the non-gaming reset selection screen is being displayed (step S146). Here, if it is determined that the non-gaming reset selection screen is being displayed (step S146: YES), the image control board 100 is made to end the display of the non-gaming reset selection screen (step S147), and adjustments and changes are prohibited. The flag is set to "OFF" (step S148). After the non-gaming reset selection screen has been displayed, the elapsed time is reset in the same way as in steps S122 and 123 in order to display the non-gaming reset selection screen again as necessary (step S149). ), measurement of elapsed time is started (step S150).

Although the process executed by the effect control microcomputer 91 to realize the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment has been described here based on FIGS. 59 to 61, in other embodiments, this effect may be A part of the processing executed by the control microcomputer 91 may be executed by the image control board 100.

Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 62 to 73. Here, FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of the performance executed in accordance with the variable display of the first special symbol in the low-accuracy, low-base state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment. The flow of this performance will be explained with reference to FIG. 62. In addition, in the following explanation, the explanation of the common configuration and common processing with the pachinko gaming machine 1 of Examples 1 and 2 will be omitted, and the explanation will be mainly about the configuration and the common processing that are different from the pachinko gaming machine 1 of Embodiment 1 and 2. The process will be explained.

In the low probability low base state, when the first special symbol validity determination is executed in response to the game ball entering the first starting hole 20, the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 41a. , the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol validity determination is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, on the first display screen 7a, along with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the performance symbols (in this embodiment, the variable display of three symbol rows) is started (FIG. 62 (See (A)). Specifically, for example, when the performance is controlled in the fourth normal mode, which is one of the multiple performance modes (see FIG. 64), "1" is displayed in the performance symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 3). Each symbol row is displayed in 3 rows horizontally so that part of the symbol row of production symbols in which numbers from ``9'' to ``9'' are consecutively written vertically from bottom to top is displayed. (For example, see FIG. 66(A)). Then, along with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the scrolling display of the three symbol rows is started so that these symbol rows are scrolled from top to bottom (for example, as shown in FIG. 66(B) )reference).

In addition, immediately after the fluctuating display of each symbol row starts, or immediately after a so-called pseudo continuous effect is executed, each symbol column scrolls at high speed, making it difficult to visually recognize (identify) the effect symbols. In each screen diagram such as FIG. 66(B), in order to express such a state, each symbol row is scrolled at high speed by a broken line with an arrow indicating the scroll direction.

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the display mode and variation mode of the performance symbols vary depending on the performance mode of the variable performance (performance including the variable display of performance symbols) performed on the first display screen 7a. It has characteristics. The display mode and variation mode of the production symbols for each production mode will be described in detail later.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 62, if the determination result of the first special symbol validity determination performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol is "lose" and it is determined not to perform the reach effect, That is, when the variation pattern of the first special symbol in which the reach effect is not executed is selected, the three production symbols indicating the winning number (for example, "294") are pseudo-stopped at the end of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the As the loss symbol is stopped and displayed as one special symbol, a loss notification performance is performed to stop these three performance symbols (see FIG. 62(B)). Here, "pseudo-stop" refers to making the performance symbols displayed at a predetermined position swing in place without moving them.In the following explanation, the actual stop (simply (Sometimes called "stop display"), it is sometimes called "pseudo stop".

Up to this point, we have explained the variable performance when the judgment result of the first special symbol validity judgment is "Lose" and the reach effect is not executed, but when the judgment result of the first special symbol validity judgment is "Jackpot" If it is decided to perform the reach effect even though it is a "lose", that is, if the variation pattern of the first special symbol in which the reach effect is executed is selected, the variation display of the first special symbol During the process, for example, the left symbol is pseudo-stopped on the effective line in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 3), and the right symbol row is moved so that the right symbol that is common to the left symbol moves onto the effective line. A pre-reach effect that scrolls at a low speed is performed (see FIG. 62(C)). In addition, the pre-reach performance is not limited to this. After the fluctuating display of the performance symbols has started, the right symbol is first pseudo-stopped on the active line, and then the left symbol that is common to this right symbol is placed on the effective line. The left symbol and the right symbol (same as the left symbol) are simultaneously pseudo-stopped on the active line after the display of the symbols in the left row is scrolled at low speed so as to move toward the left symbol, or after the fluctuating display of the symbol has started, the left symbol and the right symbol (same as the left symbol) are simultaneously pseudo-stopped on the active line. In some cases, the effect of moving these symbols toward the active line is performed as a pre-reach effect.

As a result of these pre-reach performances, when the common left and right symbols come to a pseudo-stop on the active line, a reach is established (see FIG. 62(D)). In this way, when the performance symbols that are common to the left and right symbols come to a pseudo-stop and a reach is established, the game recognizes that the performance symbols that are common to these performance symbols (reach symbols) will stop on the effective line in the middle row. A reach performance that will make people look forward to it will be performed. In the third embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 62, the reach effects that can be executed in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol in the low-accuracy, low-base state include normal short reach, normal long reach, 1st SP reach, Five types of reach effects are prepared: 2nd SP reach and SPSP reach.

The normal short reach (see FIG. 62(E)) is a reach effect with the lowest jackpot reliability among the five types of reach effects described above (for example, jackpot reliability: approximately 2%). This normal short reach is a reach effect with a shorter execution time than the normal long reach described later, and when the reach is established, the normal short reach is usually performed. When this normal short reach is performed, once the reach is established, the scrolling speed of the middle row of symbols will gradually decrease, and between the left and right symbols that form the reach, there will be a middle symbol or reach symbol that is the same as the reach symbol. A scrolling display of a middle symbol row is performed in which a different middle symbol is pseudo-stopped (for example, see FIG. 63(B)).

Here, if a variable performance pattern is set to notify a win or loss in normal short reach, a win notification performance (win notification performance or loss notification performance) is performed at the end of normal short reach (see Figure 62 (F)). . Specifically, if the judgment result of the first special symbol validity judgment this time is "Jackpot", the middle symbol that is the same as the reach symbol is pseudo-stopped on the active line to make a double (for example, "222"). After the performance symbols showing the above are brought to a pseudo stop, a winning notification performance is performed in which these performance symbols are brought to a real stop. On the other hand, if the judgment result of this first special symbol validity judgment is "lose", a medium symbol different from the reach symbol is pseudo-stopped on the active line to indicate a reach loser (e.g. "232") After the performance symbols are pseudo-stopped, a loss notification performance is performed in which these performance symbols are brought to a real stop.

On the other hand, if a variable performance pattern that develops from normal short reach to other reach performances is set, in other words, the (first special When the variation pattern (of symbols) is selected, the following effects are performed. For example, if a variable performance pattern is set in which the normal short reach (see Figure 62 (E)) evolves into the normal long reach (see Figure 62 (G)), and a win or loss is announced at the normal long reach, the normal short reach At the end of the reach, a predetermined development suggestion effect suggesting the development to a normal long reach is performed, and high-speed scrolling of the middle row of symbols is restarted, and the reach effect develops to a normal long reach. In this normal long reach, for example, a predetermined character is displayed in the center area of the first display screen 7a to make the player look forward to matching the symbols. FIG. 63(C) shows an example of the normal long reach being executed, but the illustration of the effect display that makes you expect the symbols to line up is omitted.

Note that among the five types of reach effects mentioned above, normal long reach is the reach effect with the second lowest jackpot reliability after normal short reach (for example, jackpot reliability: approximately 4%), and in most cases, normal long reach A loss notification effect (see Figure 62 (F)) is performed in normal long reach without developing into other reach effects, but if the judgment result of this first special symbol validity judgment is a jackpot, normal long reach is performed. In some cases, a winning notification effect (see FIG. 62(F)) is performed. In addition, if a variable performance pattern that develops from normal long reach to another reach performance (in this third embodiment, 1st SP reach or SPSP reach) is set, from normal long reach to 1st SP reach (Fig. 62 ( (see H)) or SPSP reach (see FIG. 62(K)).

Here, the 1st SP reach is a reach performance with the lowest jackpot reliability next to the normal long reach (for example, jackpot reliability: about 11%), and when the normal long reach develops into the 1st SP reach, the following will occur. A performance will be held. In other words, at the end of the normal long reach, the symbol row in the middle row scrolls at a low speed, and after the middle symbol that is the same as the reach symbol passes over the active line, the high speed scrolling of the symbol row in the middle row resumes, and the symbol row in the middle row scrolls at a low speed. The ready-to-reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that are pseudo-stopped move to the upper left area and the upper right area of the first display screen 7a, respectively, while maintaining the ready-to-reach state (FIG. 63(D) )reference). Then, a first SP ready-to-win effect image is displayed in the central area of the first display screen 7a, and a predetermined effect display that makes the player expect a jackpot is performed.

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, when the normal short reach (see FIG. 62(E)) develops into the above-mentioned first SP reach (see FIG. 62(H)) without going through the normal long reach Or, there are cases where normal short reach directly develops to 2nd SP reach (see Figure 62 (I)) without going through normal long reach, or cases where normal short reach directly develops to SPSP reach (see Figure 62 (I)) without going through normal long reach. (see K) may develop directly.

Here, the 2nd SP reach is a reach performance with a slightly higher jackpot reliability than the 1st SP reach (for example, jackpot reliability: about 12%), and when it develops from a normal short reach to a 2nd SP reach, the following will occur. A performance will be held. In other words, at the end of the normal long reach, the symbol row in the middle row scrolls at a low speed, and after the middle symbol that is the same as the reach symbol passes over the active line, the high speed scrolling of the symbol row in the middle row resumes, and the symbol row in the middle row scrolls at a low speed. The ready-to-reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that are pseudo-stopped move to the upper left area and the upper right area of the first display screen 7a, respectively, while maintaining the ready-to-reach state (FIG. 63(E) )reference). Then, a second SP ready-to-win effect image is displayed in the center area of the first display screen 7a, and a predetermined effect display that makes the player expect a jackpot is performed.

By the way, in the first SP reach and the second SP reach, an effect display that makes you expect a jackpot is performed in the same screen configuration, but these reach effects are different from each other in their effect content. Specifically, in the first SP reach, an effect display is performed in which if the player's own character is able to prevent the attack of the enemy character, it will be a jackpot, and conversely, if the player's character cannot prevent the attack of the enemy character, it will be a loss. On the other hand, the second SP reach is configured as a mission effect, and if the own character succeeds in the mission, it will be a jackpot, and conversely, if the character fails in the mission, the effect will be displayed as a loss.

When it develops into the 1st SP reach or the 2nd SP reach, the reliability of the jackpot for these reach effects is relatively low, so the loss notification effect is better than the loss notification effect (see Figure 62 (J)). easier to implement than Therefore, when the SP reach develops into the first SP reach or the second SP reach, the player expects the SP reach to develop from these SP reach (see FIG. 62(K)).

Here, SPSP reach (see FIG. 62(K)) is a reach effect with the highest jackpot reliability among the five types of reach effects mentioned above. In this third embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 62, there are two cases in which a reach develops directly into an SPSP reach immediately after the reach is established (see FIGS. 62 (D) and (K)), a normal short reach, and a normal long reach. (see Figure 62 (E), (G), and (K)), and when it develops into SPSP reach through normal short reach and first SP reach (see Figure 62 (E)). ), (H), and (K)), and when it develops into SPSP reach via normal short reach and second SP reach (see Fig. 62 (E), (I), and (K)), There are cases where normal short reach directly develops into SPSP reach (see FIGS. 62(E) and (K)).

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in SPSP reach, an SPSP reach effect image is displayed on the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 63(F)), and a battle effect in which your character and enemy character battle is executed. However, if the judgment result of this first special symbol validity judgment is a "jackpot", a victory performance and a winning notification performance in which your character wins over the enemy character will be executed, and if it is a loss, your character will defeat the enemy character. A defeat effect in which the character is defeated and a loss notification effect are executed.

[About screen configuration]
FIG. 63 is a screen diagram illustrating the screen configuration of the first display screen 7a in the low-accuracy, low-base state. In the low probability low base state, as illustrated in FIG. 63(A), a pending icon display area 9c and the icon display area 9e are formed on the first display screen 7a below the effect symbol display area 73. Ru.

<Pending icon display area 9c>
The pending icon display area 9c (see FIG. 63(A)) is a display area in which a pending icon (pending display image) indicating that the first special symbol validity determination is pending is displayed, and is illustrated in Example 1. This is a display area corresponding to the first effect pending display area 9c. In the pachinko game machine 1 of the third embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 in a situation where special symbol validity determination and special symbol variable display cannot be started immediately, such as during variable display of special symbols or during a jackpot game, , the right to determine whether the first special symbol is correct or not is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, four).

In this way, when the right for the first special symbol validity determination is reserved, the reservation icon display area 9c displays the same number of reservations as the number of reservations for the first special symbol validity determination indicated by the first special symbol reservation display 43a. An icon will be displayed. In FIG. 63(A), a state in which one pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 9c is illustrated in order to suggest that the pending number of the first special symbol validity determination is "1". There is.

By the way, if a hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c during execution of a highly reliable reach effect such as the SPSP reach effect described above (see FIG. 62(K)), the display area used for the reach effect is restricted. In addition, the display of the hold icon may reduce the interest of the reach effect. For example, if a pending icon (for example, a red pending icon) is displayed in the pending icon display area 9c in a display style that suggests that the jackpot reliability is relatively high due to a so-called pending look-ahead effect, the player's awareness may be The user is likely to be directed towards the pending icon, and the effect of the reach effect that is currently being executed may be significantly reduced.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, during the pre-reach performance described above based on FIG. 62(C) or during the normal short reach performance described above based on FIG. 62(E), the hold icon display area While displaying the display object (in this Example 3, the pedestal of the pending icon) and the pending icon (see FIGS. 63(A) and (B)) that constitute 9c, the reach effect has a higher jackpot reliability than the normal long reach. During execution, a configuration is adopted in which display objects and pending icons constituting the pending icon display area 9c are not displayed on the first display screen 7a (see FIGS. 63(C) to (F)).

<The icon display area 9e>
The icon display area 9e is a display area that displays "the icon" as a change suggestion image that suggests that the first special symbol is changing. The icon is displayed in the icon display area 9e at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (for example, see FIG. 63(A)), and for example, the icon is displayed at the timing when the variable display of the first special symbol ends. It is deleted from the icon display area 9e. However, the timing of erasing the icon is not limited to this, and the icon may be erased during the variable display of the first special symbol. For example, the icon may be erased when the SPSP reach is developed or in the middle of the SPSP reach. You may delete it.

By the way, if a game ball enters the first starting slot 20 while the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner and the right to judge whether the special symbol is correct is not reserved, the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Accordingly, the icon is displayed in the icon display area 9e. On the other hand, when the pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 9c, when the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e ends, the icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 9c. A first special symbol validity determination corresponding to the earliest pending icon (the pending icon displayed in the position closest to the icon display area 9e) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in accordance with the execution of this first special symbol propriety determination, the earliest pending icon is shifted from the pending icon display area 9c to the icon display area 9e. , will be displayed as a new icon. In this way, the hold icon (here, the icon) shifted to the icon display area 9e is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the hold icon display area 9c (see FIG. 63(A)). Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e rather than the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c.

Note that if another pending icon different from the first pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 9c, as the first pending icon is shifted to the icon display area 9e, the pending icon display area 9c , the other pending icons are shifted in the direction closer to the icon display area 9e. As is clear from the explanation so far, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the icon corresponding to the pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 9c may be displayed in the icon display area 9e. Therefore, in the following description, if the pending icon and the icon are not distinguished, they may be collectively referred to simply as "icon."

(Screen configuration at the start of fluctuation)
When the first special symbol propriety determination that has been suspended during the low-probability, low-base state is executed, variable display of the first special symbol is started, and along with this, icon shift processing is performed. Specifically, for example, if the first special symbol validity determination is executed with the two rights of the first special symbol validity determination being reserved, as illustrated in FIG. 63(A), , the first hold icon of the two hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e, and the second hold icon is shifted to the hold icon display area 9c. Shift processing is performed to shift the first hold icon to the display position where it was displayed. In addition, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, high-speed scrolling of the three symbol rows is started (see FIG. 63(A)).

Immediately after the high-speed scrolling of these three symbol rows is started, some of the performance symbols of each of the three symbol rows are displayed on the first display screen 7a in the performance symbol display area 7b, and at the same time, the performance symbols of these three symbol rows are displayed on the first display screen 7a. A predetermined background image is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a so that some of the performance symbols are displayed in a superimposed manner (see FIG. 63(A)). For example, when the performance is controlled in the fourth normal mode, which will be described later, a background image exclusively for the fourth normal mode (selected music performance image: see FIG. 65) is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a, and the background image The performance mode name "4th normal mode" corresponding to is displayed in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a. During high-speed scrolling of the three symbol rows, the performance symbols that make up the three symbol rows are displayed semi-transparently, so the player can see through the performance symbols that make up the three symbol rows according to the production mode. It is possible to visually recognize the background image.

In addition, in FIG. 63(A), a background image dedicated to the fourth normal mode is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a, and the production mode name "4th normal mode" is displayed in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a. Although the displayed state is illustrated, when the performance is controlled in the first normal mode, the background image exclusively for the first normal mode is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a, and the “first normal mode” The production mode name "Mode" is displayed in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a (see, for example, FIGS. 65, 68, and 69). Furthermore, when the performance is controlled in the second normal mode, a background image exclusively for the second normal mode is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a, and the performance mode name "Second Normal Mode" is displayed in the first It is displayed in the upper right area of the display screen 7a (see, for example, FIGS. 65 and 70). Further, when the performance is controlled in the third normal mode, a background image exclusively for the third normal mode is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a, and the performance mode name "Third Normal Mode" is displayed in the first display screen 7a. It is displayed in the upper right area of the display screen 7a (see, for example, FIGS. 65 and 71 to 73).

(Screen configuration during normal short reach)
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 63, after the high-speed scrolling of the three symbol rows has started, the scrolling speed of each symbol row gradually decreases, and the effect symbols common to the left and right symbols pseudo-stop and reach may hold true and develop into a normal short reach (see FIG. 62(E)). In this way, if the normal short reach develops, the background image that was displayed on the first display screen 7a before the reach was established will continue to be displayed, and with this background image displayed, the normal short reach will continue. Such a predetermined effect display is performed (see FIG. 63(B)).

In addition, in this third embodiment, a case where the background image displayed during normal short reach will be continuously displayed until the end of normal short reach will be explained as an example, but from normal short reach to other reach effects. In the case of further development, the background image may be changed to another effect image during the normal short reach. For example, when the reach effect develops from normal short reach to normal long reach (see Figure 62 (G)), the background image changes to a long suggestive image that suggests normal long reach in the middle of normal short reach, When the reach effect develops from normal short reach to 1st SP reach (see Figure 62 (H)), the background image is changed to the 1st SP suggestion image that suggests 1st SP reach in the middle of normal short reach, and the normal When the reach effect develops from short reach to 2nd SP reach (see Figure 62 (I)), a configuration such as changing the background image to a 2nd SP suggestion image that suggests 2nd SP reach in the middle of normal short reach is possible. This is given as an example.

(Screen configuration during normal long reach)
On the other hand, during the normal long reach, which has developed from the normal short reach, as illustrated in FIG. In a pseudo-stopped state, a predetermined normal long reach effect image is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a. As a result, during the normal long reach, an effect display is performed in the center area of the first display screen 7a that makes the player expect a predetermined character to match the symbols.

In addition, in this Example 3, during normal short reach, although the background image that has been displayed since before the reach is established (during pre-reach performance) is continuously displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than in normal short reach. During the reach effect, a dedicated reach effect image is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a. In this way, when a reach effect image dedicated to each reach effect is displayed, if a hold icon that is not directly related to the current variable effect or a display object that constitutes the hold icon display area 9c is displayed, the reach effect image As a result, there is a possibility that the visibility of each reach performance may be reduced. Therefore, in the third embodiment, during the normal long reach, the first SP reach, the second SP reach, and the SPSP reach, the display objects constituting the hold icon and the hold icon display area 9c (here, each hold icon 63 (C) to (F)).

(Screen configuration during 1st SP reach)
Subsequently, during the 1st SP reach, as illustrated in FIG. 63(D), the left symbols constituting the reach symbols are displayed in a small pseudo-stop manner in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a, and the reach symbols are A predetermined first SP ready-to-win effect image is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a while the constituent right symbols are displayed in a small pseudo-stop manner in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a.

(Screen configuration during 2nd SP reach)
In addition, during the second SP reach, as illustrated in FIG. 63(E), the left symbol forming the reach symbol is displayed in a small pseudo-stop position in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a, and the left symbol forming the reach symbol is displayed in a small pseudo-stop manner. A predetermined second SP ready-to-win effect image is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a while the right symbol is displayed in a small pseudo-stop manner in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a.

(Screen configuration during SPSP reach)
In addition, during SPSP reach, as illustrated in FIG. 63(F), the left symbol forming the reach symbol is displayed in a small pseudo-stop position in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a, and the left symbol forming the reach symbol is displayed in a small pseudo-stop manner. A predetermined SPSP ready-to-reach effect image is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a while the right symbol is displayed in a small pseudo-stop manner in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a.

(About the composition of the production pattern)
Although not shown in FIG. 63, in the third embodiment, except when the performance is controlled in the fourth normal mode (the performance is controlled in any one of the first normal mode to the third normal mode) ), the performance pattern displayed in the performance pattern display area 7b is a character image representing a predetermined person, with respect to identification information (numbers in this embodiment) for distinguishing the performance pattern from other performance patterns. (See FIGS. 66 to 73). In this embodiment, the case where the identification information is a number will be explained as an example, but the identification information is not limited to numbers, as long as it is information that allows the production pattern to be distinguished from other production patterns, and for example, alphabets. It may also be a symbol or the like.

On the other hand, if character images are added to the small reach symbols displayed in the upper left and upper right regions of the first display screen 7a, the visibility of the small reach symbols may be reduced, and each reach effect may be There is a possibility that it may actually reduce interest. Therefore, in the third embodiment, when the reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol) are displayed in a small pseudo-stop manner in the upper left region and the upper right region of the first display screen 7a, the reach symbols to which no character image is attached are displayed. The design is to be displayed.

[About changes in production mode]
FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various production modes in the low-accuracy, low-base state. In the pachinko game machine 1 of the third embodiment, a variable performance is performed using the first display screen 7a, the speaker 67, the board lamp 5, the frame lamp 66, etc. in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol in the low-accuracy, low-base state. As the normal performance mode (normal performance mode) related to this, four types of normal performance modes are prepared: a first normal mode, a second normal mode, a third normal mode, and a fourth normal mode (see FIG. 64). .

In the pachinko game machine 1 of the third embodiment, the production control microcomputer 91 counts the number of variations, which is the number of times the first special symbol and the production symbol are displayed in a variable manner (symbol variation) in one normal production mode. When the counted number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 15 times), one normal presentation mode changes to another normal presentation mode. For example, when the number of symbol variations performed in the first normal mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the first normal mode changes to the second normal mode, the third normal mode, or the fourth normal mode. Further, for example, when the number of symbol variations performed in the second normal mode reaches a predetermined number of times, the second normal mode changes to the first normal mode, the third normal mode, or the fourth normal mode. Further, for example, when the number of symbol variations performed in the third normal mode reaches a predetermined number, the third normal mode changes to the first normal mode, the second normal mode, or the fourth normal mode. Further, for example, when the number of symbol variations performed in the fourth normal mode reaches a predetermined number, the fourth normal mode changes to the first normal mode, the second normal mode, or the third normal mode.

The normal performance mode to which the game is transferred is determined, for example, by a performance lottery performed by the performance control microcomputer 91. The ROM of the sub-control board 90 contains a first normal mode/transition destination selection table that is referred to when selecting the normal production mode to which the first normal mode is to be transferred, and a normal production to which the second normal mode is to be transferred. The second normal mode/transition destination selection table is referred to when selecting a mode, and the third normal mode/transition destination selection table is referenced when selecting the normal production mode to which the third normal mode is transitioned. and a fourth normal mode/transition destination selection table that is referred to when selecting a normal presentation mode to which the fourth normal mode is to be transferred are stored. In these transition destination selection tables, different random numbers are associated with three normal performance modes that can be transition destinations.

For example, when selecting the normal production mode to which the first normal mode is transferred, the production control microcomputer 91 executes the following processing. That is, when the number of variations in the symbol variations performed in the first normal mode reaches a predetermined number, the performance control microcomputer 91 changes the number of variations with respect to the transition destination selection random number that is appropriately updated by the random number update process in the sub-control board 90. A random number when reaches a predetermined number of times is acquired as a migration destination selection random number. On the other hand, in the first normal mode/transition destination selection table, different random values are associated with each of the second normal mode, the third normal mode, and the third normal mode, and the production control The microcomputer 91 reads one normal presentation mode associated with a random value that matches the acquired transition destination selection random number from the first normal mode/transition destination selection table, and selects the normal presentation mode as the transition destination. Select.

Although the combination of normal production modes specified in the transition destination selection table and the random number associated with each normal production mode are different, it is possible to select the second normal mode, third normal mode, or fourth normal mode. When shifting to another normal production mode, it is possible to select the normal production mode to which the mode will be transferred by performing similar processing.

By the way, when a loss notification effect is executed in a reach effect with relatively high jackpot reliability such as the 1st SP reach, 2nd SP reach, or SPSP reach, the player may feel bad about the fact that the win notification effect was not executed. Players may not be able to switch between the two properly, and as a result, they may stop playing the game.

In order to suppress the occurrence of such a problem, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, when a loss notification effect is executed in the first SP reach, second SP reach, or SPSP reach, the number of fluctuations is set to a predetermined value. Regardless of whether the number of times has been reached or not, the normal production mode immediately before developing into these ready-to-reach productions is changed to another normal production mode from the next symbol variation after the symbol variation in which these ready-to-reach productions were executed. It is said that For example, during the variable display of the first special symbol and the production symbol, the production is executed in the second normal mode during the pre-reach production or during the normal short reach, and the second SP reach, which is developed from the normal short reach, is a loss. When the notification performance is executed, a performance lottery is executed using the above-mentioned transition destination selection random number and the second normal mode/transition destination selection table, and based on the result of the performance lottery, the normal performance to be the transition destination is selected. Select mode. Then, with the start of the next symbol variation after the symbol variation for which the loss notification performance was executed in the second SP reach, the second normal mode is changed to the normal performance mode selected by the performance lottery.

In this way, when a loss notification performance is executed with a reach performance with relatively high jackpot reliability, by changing the normal performance mode to another normal performance mode, the hit notification performance is lower than normal short reach etc. This will encourage players to change their minds and feel disappointed because the winning notification effect was not executed even though the 1st SP reach, 2nd SP reach, and SPSP reach, which are easy to execute, have been executed, and as a result, the players' It is possible to contribute to reducing discomfort.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, when the jackpot reliability is relatively high, that is, when the judgment result of the first special symbol correctness judgment in the low probability low base state is a "jackpot", or when the judgment result is "a jackpot", '', but the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is selected, and when the first special symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner in the selected fluctuation pattern, the above-mentioned four types of normal There are cases where one of the normal presentation modes shifts to another presentation mode. In other words, one of the normal production modes may shift to a chance mode, which is a production mode with higher jackpot reliability than the normal production mode, or may shift to a super hot mode, which has an even higher jackpot reliability than the chance mode, or , it may shift to super hot mode via chance mode.

In addition, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, if the right to determine whether the first special symbol is correct or not is reserved, before the first special symbol is determined to be correct or not, it is determined in advance whether or not it is a jackpot. In some cases, the game control microcomputer 81 executes a preliminary determination process that specifies a variation pattern of the first special symbol that is selected when the first special symbol validity determination is actually executed. Then, based on this preliminary judgment result, before the first special symbol validity judgment that is subject to the preliminary judgment process is executed, the normal production mode shifts to chance mode, or the normal production mode shifts to super hot mode. Or, the normal production mode may shift to the super hot mode via the chance mode. In addition, the normal production mode shifts to the chance mode before the first special symbol validity determination, which is the target of the preliminary determination process, is executed, and the first special symbol validity determination is performed in response to the execution of the first special symbol validity determination. Chance mode may shift to super hot mode while special symbols are being displayed.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the normal performance mode may shift to the chance mode or the super hot mode, so by performing the mode transition performance as described above, the player's expectations for a jackpot can be reduced. It is possible to improve the performance and obtain high performance effects.

However, in the mode transition performance as described above, the judgment result of the first special symbol validity judgment is "lose", and a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. It has the characteristic that it is difficult to carry out in some cases. For this reason, if the player has difficulty hitting the jackpot and there continues to be a long period in which only the variation pattern of the first special symbol, which has a relatively short variation time, is selected, a highly reliable reach effect may not be executed. This is likely to lead to a gradual decline in interest.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, by shifting the production mode between the normal production modes, it is possible to change the background image on which the production symbols are superimposed, change the display mode of the production symbols, and change the production mode. A synthetic effect that changes the fluctuation mode of the design, performs a dialogue performance using a similar image that is a performance image similar to the character image that makes up the performance design, or combines numbers and character images to form a performance design. By doing this, we are trying to suppress the decline in interest as described above.

[Characteristics of each normal production mode]
Next, the characteristics of each normal performance mode will be explained with reference to FIG. 65. Here, FIG. 65 is a list illustrating the characteristics of each normal production mode. As described above based on FIG. 64, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the first normal mode is the normal performance mode related to the performance performed during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low probability low base state. , a second normal mode, a third normal mode, and a fourth normal mode are prepared.

<Song selection>
In the pachinko game machine 1 of the third embodiment, when the performance is controlled in the fourth normal mode, a music selection screen, which will be described later, is displayed, and the player can perform a predetermined operation on this music selection screen to select the first music selection screen. It is possible to arbitrarily select the music to be played using the display screen 7a, the speaker 67, etc. (see FIG. 65). On the other hand, in the three normal production modes from the first normal mode to the third normal mode, the above song selection screen is not selected, making it impossible for the player to arbitrarily select a song (see Figure 65). ).

<Background image>
As illustrated in FIG. 65, when the performance is controlled in the first normal mode, a background image dedicated to the first normal mode that is not displayed in other normal performance modes is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and When the performance is controlled in the normal mode, a background image exclusively for the second normal mode that is not displayed in other normal performance modes is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and when the performance is controlled in the third normal mode, A background image exclusively for the third normal mode, which is not displayed in other normal performance modes, is displayed on the first display screen 7a.

On the other hand, when the performance is controlled in the fourth normal mode, unlike when the performance is controlled in other normal performance modes, the pachinko game machine 1 can select any one of the plurality of songs that can be played. The music selection screen 72a (see FIG. 1) is displayed on the third display screen 72a (see FIG. 1), and the player can use the cross key described above in the second embodiment and the first effect button 63a (see FIG. 1) to By performing an operation, it is possible to select one of the songs. When any song is selected by a predetermined operation while the production is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the selected song production image (video of the selected song), which is the production image related to the selected song, becomes the first song. It is displayed on the display screen 7a (see FIG. 65).

Note that when no music is selected by the player, the production control microcomputer 91 selects any playable music by production lottery, and generates a music production image (video of the music) that is a production image related to the selected song. ) is displayed on the first display screen 7a via the image control board 100. Then, when the display of the music performance image selected by the performance lottery ends, if the player has not selected a song, the performance lottery is executed again, and the music performance image associated with the newly selected song is is displayed on the first display screen 7a. In addition, on the song selection screen, it is possible to select random playback separately from any of the plurality of songs, and when the player selects this random playback, the song production image displayed on the first display screen 7a It will change automatically.

<BGM>
Further, as illustrated in FIG. 65, when the performance is controlled in the first normal mode, the first normal mode dedicated BGM corresponding to the first normal mode dedicated background image is output from the speaker 67, and the second normal mode When the effect is controlled in the mode, the second normal mode exclusive BGM corresponding to the second normal mode exclusive background image is output from the speaker 67, and when the effect is controlled in the third normal mode, the third normal mode Third normal mode dedicated BGM corresponding to the dedicated background image is output from the speaker 67.

On the other hand, when the performance is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the selected music performance image associated with the selected music selected by the player or the music performance image associated with the music automatically selected by the performance lottery is displayed. It is displayed on the first display screen 7a. Therefore, when the production is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the selected music piece that is arbitrarily or automatically selected and corresponds to the music production image displayed on the first display screen 7a is controlled in the fourth normal mode. It is output from the speaker 67 as dedicated BGM (see FIG. 65).

<Normal display mode of pending/applicable icon>
By the way, the pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 9c (see FIG. 63(A)) is normally displayed as a pending icon in a normal display mode that does not indicate the degree of jackpot reliability. This pending icon in the normal display mode is moved to the icon display area 9e and displayed as the icon when the corresponding first special symbol validity determination is executed.

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, based on the result of the above-mentioned preliminary judgment process performed in response to the right to judge the validity of the first special symbol being held in the low-accuracy/low-base state, An icon change effect may be performed in which a pending icon in a normal display mode displayed in the icon display area 9c is changed to a pending icon in a special display mode that indicates the degree of jackpot reliability. When this icon change effect is performed, the pending icon in the normal display mode (for example, a white pending icon) becomes the pending icon in the special display mode, indicating jackpot reliability such as blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow color. Changes to colored pending icon. The colors suggesting the jackpot reliability illustrated here are arranged in order from the lowest to the highest jackpot reliability. In Example 3, the jackpot reliability of the blue pending icon is set to about 1%, and the green The jackpot confidence of the pending icon is set to about 10%, the jackpot confidence of the red pending icon is set to about 40%, the jackpot confidence of the golden pending icon is set to about 65%, and the jackpot confidence of the rainbow pending icon is set to about 65%. The jackpot reliability of the icon is set to 100%.

Up to this point, we have described an icon change effect in which the display color of a pending icon changes only once when it is displayed in the pending icon display area 9c. may be carried out. That is, for example, when a white hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 9c, it changes to a blue hold icon, and then changes to a green hold icon. An icon change effect may be performed in which the display color of the pending icon changes multiple times. Further, when a white pending icon shifted from the pending icon display area 9c to the icon display area 9e is displayed as the icon, an icon change effect in which the display color changes may be performed.

Further, the display color of the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c changes, and then when the hold icon is shifted to the icon display area 9e and displayed as the icon, the display color changes. In some cases, an icon change effect is performed in which the display color of the icon changes in both the pending icon display area 9c and the icon display area 9e. Additionally, there is an icon change effect that displays a pending icon in a display color other than white (for example, blue) from the beginning, and an icon change effect that changes the display color of a pending icon whose initial color is other than white to a higher-level display color. may be carried out.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 9c may be shifted to the icon display area 9e and displayed as the icon as it is, so the following explanation will be given. In this case, when the pending icon and the icon are not distinguished, they may be collectively referred to simply as "icon."

Up to this point, we have described the pending icon and the icon change effect that targets the icon, but when this icon change effect is not performed, the following problems may occur. That is, as described above, by shifting the normal performance mode to another normal performance mode, the background image displayed on the first display screen 7a and the BGM output from the speaker 67 change, so that the jackpot Even in cases where it is difficult to produce a performance that makes people look forward to it, changes occur in the performance, which can contribute to suppressing a decline in interest.

On the other hand, when the icon change effect is not performed, the effect is controlled in the first normal mode, the second normal mode, and the third normal mode. In a configuration where the display mode is completely the same when the display is in the 4th normal mode and when the performance is controlled in the 4th normal mode, the pending icon or the icon is displayed in the normal display mode. , there are few changes accompanying the transition of production modes, and it is thought that the reduction in interest is not sufficiently suppressed.

Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the third embodiment, in order to suppress the decline in interest, a configuration is adopted in which a pending icon and the icon are displayed with different shapes and sizes depending on the four types of normal performance modes ( (See Figure 65). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 65, when the performance is controlled in the first normal mode, the icon dedicated to the first normal mode (for example, a hexagonal When the hold icon or the relevant icon (see FIG. 68(A)) is displayed and the performance is controlled in the second normal mode, the second normal mode exclusive icon (for example, A diamond-shaped hold icon or the corresponding icon (see FIG. 70(A)) is displayed. In addition, when the performance is controlled in the third normal mode, a hold icon in the normal display mode or an icon dedicated to the third normal mode (for example, an inverted triangle hold icon or the relevant icon: see FIG. 71(A) ) is displayed, and when the performance is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the hold icon in the normal display mode or an icon dedicated to the fourth normal mode (for example, a hold icon in the shape of a musical note or the icon: 66(A)).

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to change the pending icon or the normal display mode of the icon by shifting the normal presentation mode to another presentation mode without performing the icon change presentation. Therefore, due to the synergistic effect with the icon change production, it is possible to effectively contribute to suppressing a decrease in interest.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, while the hold icon and the normal display mode of the icon are different for each normal performance mode, the hold icon and the special display mode of the icon (after the icon change performance is A configuration is adopted in which the pending icon and the display mode of the icon) are shared between the normal production modes. For example, when comparing the first normal mode and the fourth normal mode, in the first normal mode, a hexagonal icon (see FIG. 68(A)) is displayed as the icon of the normal display mode, whereas In the fourth normal mode, a musical note-shaped icon (see FIG. 66(A)) is displayed as the icon of the normal display mode, and when the two icons are compared, the normal display modes are different from each other. On the other hand, in the first normal mode, when the icon change effect is performed, the hexagonal icon changes to a circular icon (with a color that suggests jackpot reliability) (see FIG. 68(A)); 4 In the normal mode, when the icon change effect is performed, the musical note-shaped icon changes to a circular icon (with a color that suggests the jackpot reliability) (see Figures 66 (H) and (I)), and both When the icons are compared, the special display mode is common to each other. Although the first normal mode and the fourth normal mode have been described here for comparison, the same can be said when comparing a plurality of other normal production modes.

For example, if you easily adopt a configuration in which the icon display mode (special display mode) after the icon change effect is different for each normal effect mode, the display color, shape, size, etc. of the icon will be different from the normal effect mode. This will vary depending on the type, and a problem may arise in that it becomes difficult to recognize the jackpot reliability based on the display mode of the icon after the icon change effect.

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the display mode (special display mode) of the icon after the icon changes is made common among the plurality of normal production modes (the shape and size are the same). Therefore, it is possible to recognize the jackpot reliability based only on the display color of the icon (blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow color) after the icon change effect, and the above problems can be effectively prevented. It is possible to suppress the

In the third embodiment, when comparing the icons in the normal display mode displayed in each normal presentation mode, the icons are different in shape and size but have the same display color. In other embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the display colors are different from each other in addition to the shapes and sizes. In addition, in this third embodiment, the special display mode (here, shape and size) of the icon after the icon change effect is shared among multiple normal effect modes, and the jackpot is achieved based only on the display color of the icon. Although a configuration in which reliability can be recognized is adopted, in other embodiments, the special display mode (here, shape and size) of the icon after the icon changes is made different between a plurality of normal presentation modes. The configuration may also be adopted. In this case, a configuration may also be adopted in which even if the special display mode (here, shape and size) of the icon after the icon change is different, if the display color is the same, the jackpot reliability is the same. Alternatively, even if the displayed colors are the same, if the shapes and sizes are different, the jackpot reliability may also be different.

<Design composition>
As illustrated in FIG. 65, in the three normal production modes of the first normal mode to the third normal mode and the fourth normal mode, the production symbols displayed in the production symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 3) are The configurations are different from each other. Specifically, when the production is controlled in any of the normal production modes from the first normal mode to the third normal mode, a number is added to the number to distinguish the production symbol from other production symbols. An effect pattern including a character image (an example of a decorative image) is displayed in the effect pattern display area 7b (see FIGS. 68 to 73). On the other hand, when the performance is controlled in the fourth normal mode, a performance pattern consisting only of numbers to which no character image is added is displayed in the performance pattern display area 7b (see FIGS. 66 and 67).

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. It is displayed on the first display screen 7a as a background image. For this reason, if a performance pattern composed of numbers and character images is superimposed and displayed on a music performance image, the visibility of the music performance image will be significantly reduced, and the interest of the performance for playing the music will be unnecessarily reduced. There is a possibility that it will happen.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, in order to suppress the occurrence of such a problem, as described above, when the performance is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the numbers to which no character images are attached are A performance pattern made up of only one is displayed in the performance pattern display area 7b.

In addition, when comparing the three types of normal production modes, 1st normal mode to 3rd normal mode, these normal production modes have in common that the production design is composed of numbers and character images. However, these normal performance modes are different in that the display mode of the character images that constitute the performance symbols differs depending on the performance mode.

Specifically, a production pattern with the number "1" is configured with a character image of character A, a production pattern with the number "2" is configured with a character image of character B, and a production pattern with the number "2" is configured with a character image of character B. The production pattern with the number "3" is configured with the character image of the character C, and the production pattern with the number "4" is configured with the character image of the character D, and the production pattern with the number "5" is configured. The production design is composed of a character image of character E, the production design with the number “6” is composed of a character image of character F, and the production design with the number “7” is composed of a character image of character G. A production pattern having a character image and having the number "8" is made up of a character image of the character H, and a production design having the number "9" has a character image of the character I. In the first normal mode to the third The normal mode is common.

On the other hand, for example, when comparing each production pattern (hereinafter referred to as "2 patterns") consisting of the number "2" displayed in the first normal mode to the third normal mode, the following is shown. There are some differences. That is, the two symbols displayed when the performance is controlled in the first normal mode are configured with a character image representing the upper body of character B, as illustrated in FIG. , the number "2" is added to the lower right of the character image. On the other hand, the two symbols displayed when the performance is controlled in the second normal mode are character images representing the upper body of character B, as illustrated in FIG. It is configured with a character image representing the character B which is larger than the character images composing the two symbols displayed when the production is controlled in the normal mode (see FIG. 68(A)), and the character image The number "2" is added to the lower right corner of the screen. Furthermore, the two symbols displayed when the performance is controlled in the third normal mode are configured with a character image representing character B wearing a dress, as illustrated in FIG. 71(H). At the same time, the number "2" is added to the lower center of the character image.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, even if the character images represent the same character, the display manner of the character images differs depending on the performance mode.

<Variation mode>
As illustrated in FIG. 65, the pachinko game machine 1 of the third embodiment has a feature that the variation mode of the performance symbols differs for each normal performance mode.

(1st normal mode)
Specifically, when the game is controlled in the first normal mode, the numbers "1" to "9" are displayed horizontally consecutively from left to right in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 3). Each symbol row is displayed in three rows in the vertical direction so that a part of the symbol row of the effect design written as is displayed (for example, see FIG. 68(A)). Then, along with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the scrolling display of the three symbol rows is started so that these symbol rows scroll from right to left (for example, as shown in FIG. 68(B) )reference). In this way, when the performance is controlled in the first normal mode, the manner in which the performance symbols change is left scrolling (see FIG. 65).

In addition, as is clear from the notation in FIG. 68(A), the performance symbols forming the lower row of symbols make a pseudo-stop in the lower left area of the performance symbol display area 7b and then come to a real stop, and the symbols forming the middle row of symbols The composing effect symbols make a pseudo-stop in the central area of the effect pattern display area 7b and then make a real stop, and the effect patterns forming the upper row of symbols make a pseudo stop in the upper right area of the effect pattern display area 7b and then make a real stop. Stop the book.

(Second normal mode)
On the other hand, when the game is controlled in the second normal mode, numbers "1" to "9" are continuously written vertically from bottom to top in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 3). Each symbol row is displayed in three rows in the horizontal direction so that a part of the symbol row of the effect design is displayed (for example, see FIG. 70(A)). Then, along with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the scrolling display of the three symbol rows is started so that these symbol rows are scrolled from top to bottom (for example, as shown in FIG. 70(B) )reference). In this way, when the performance is controlled in the second normal mode, the manner in which the performance symbols change is downward scrolling (see FIG. 65).

In addition, as is clear from the notation in FIG. 70(A), the effect symbols forming the left column of symbols make a pseudo stop in the left area of the effect symbol display area 7b and then come to a real stop, and then stop in the middle row of symbols. The performance symbols that make up the performance symbols make a pseudo-stop in the center area of the performance symbol display area 7b and then make a real stop, and the performance symbols that make up the right column of symbols pseudo-stop in the right area of the performance symbol display area 7b. The book stops.

Further, as illustrated in FIG. 70, when the performance is controlled in the second normal mode, the character image forming the performance pattern is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and then the character image corresponding to the character image is displayed on the first display screen 7a. Numbers are displayed on the first display screen 7a, and then a composite effect may be performed in which the character image and the number are combined to complete one effect pattern (see FIGS. 70(F) to (H)). . In FIGS. 70(F) to (H), a character image representing character H is displayed in the right area of the first display screen 7a, and then the number "8" is displayed in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a. The left 8 symbols are completed by moving these character images and the number "8" to the left area of the first display screen 7a and combining them.

(3rd normal mode)
When the game is controlled in the third normal mode, three performance symbols having numbers from "1" to "9" are lined up horizontally in the performance symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 3). is displayed (for example, see FIG. 71(A)). Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol starts, the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol rotate clockwise with the vertical direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the axis direction. (For example, see FIGS. 71(B) to (D)). Then, as each performance symbol rotates once, a performance symbol having a number added by "1" is displayed. In Figures 71(B) to (D), the 4 symbols on the left rotate once clockwise to display the 5 symbols on the left, the 3 middle symbols rotate once clockwise to display the 4 middle symbols, and the 1 symbol on the right rotates once clockwise to display the 5 symbols on the left. An example is shown in which the symbols rotate once clockwise and the two symbols on the right are displayed. In this way, when the performance is controlled in the third normal mode, the variation mode of the performance symbol is rotation (clockwise rotation with the vertical direction as the axial direction) (see FIG. 65).

As is clear from the notations in Figures 71 to 73, the rotation of the left, middle, and right symbols is performed without any character images added, and the effect design consisting only of numbers is simulated. When the car stops, a character image corresponding to that number is added. For example, in FIGS. 71(E) to (F), when the 8 symbols on the left come to a pseudo stop, a character image representing the character H moving from above the number "8" is synthesized with the number "8", It is illustrated that a synthesis effect is being performed to complete the left 8 symbols including the character image of the character H and the number "8".

(4th normal mode)
On the other hand, when the game is controlled in the fourth normal mode, numbers "1" to "9" are written consecutively in the vertical direction from bottom to top in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 3). Each symbol row is displayed in three rows in the horizontal direction so that a part of the symbol row of the effect design is displayed (for example, see FIG. 66(A)). Then, along with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the scrolling display of the three symbol rows is started so that these symbol rows are scrolled from top to bottom (for example, as shown in FIG. 66(B) )reference). In this way, when the performance is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the manner in which the performance symbols fluctuate is downward scrolling (see FIG. 65).

In this third embodiment, the manner of variation of the production symbols in the fourth normal mode is similar to the variation manner of the production symbols in the second normal mode in that it scrolls down, but it is displayed during the fourth normal mode. The effect patterns displayed are different from the effect patterns displayed during the second normal mode in that each effect pattern does not have a character image (see FIGS. 66, 67, and 70).

In addition, in the configuration in which the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol move (scroll) on the first display screen 7a, the display of the production symbol is more difficult than when the production symbol rotates, for example, as in the third normal mode. The area tends to be large. Therefore, if the above configuration is adopted for the fourth normal mode in which the selected music performance image is displayed, the visibility of the selected music performance image is likely to decrease.

Therefore, in other embodiments, when the production is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the production patterns in the third normal mode in the third embodiment are different from each other, except that the production patterns have character images. A configuration common to the variation mode (rotation) may be adopted. In addition, a performance display is performed in which a performance pattern consisting only of numbers moves from the back to the front of the first display screen 7a, and when the performance pattern moves to a predetermined position, it disappears from the first display screen 7a. , The production patterns made up of the numbers that were added by "1" to the numbers that made up the erased production patterns move in the same way, so the production patterns become 1, 2, and 3 in the following order. Another configuration may be adopted in which the effect symbols are varied in the depth direction of the first display screen 7a.

<Common character dialogue production>
As illustrated in FIG. 65, when the performance is controlled in the first normal mode or the third normal mode, a similar character image (similar image (for example) is displayed on the first display screen 7a, and a common character dialogue production is performed in which the character represented by this similar character image utters the dialogue using the first display screen 7a and the speaker 67 ( (See Figures 68 to 69 and Figures 72 to 73). The details of this common character dialogue production will be described in detail later based on FIGS. 68 to 69 and FIGS. 72 to 73.

In the third embodiment, the above-mentioned common character dialogue production is performed when the production is controlled in the first normal mode or the third normal mode, and is not performed in the second normal mode or the fourth normal mode. A configuration is adopted in which the above-mentioned common character line performance is not executed when the performance is controlled (see FIG. 65).

When such a configuration is adopted, by transitioning the production mode from the second normal mode (or fourth normal mode) to the first normal mode (or third normal mode), the effect that was not performed in the production mode before the transition can be changed. This means that common character dialogues that are not previously available can now be produced, and as a result, it is possible to produce effective changes in production.

<Synthesis effect>
As illustrated in FIG. 65, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, character images and numbers are displayed on the first display screen 7a when the performance is controlled in the second normal mode or the third normal mode. A composite effect may be executed in which the images are displayed individually and then combined and displayed as a effect image (see FIGS. 70 and 71). In this third embodiment, such a composite effect is executed when the effect is controlled in the second normal mode or the third normal mode, and is not executed in the first normal mode or the fourth normal mode. A configuration is adopted in which the above-mentioned composite effect is not executed when the effect is controlled (see FIG. 65).

When such a configuration is adopted, by transitioning the production mode from the first normal mode (or fourth normal mode) to the second normal mode (or third normal mode), the production mode that was not performed before the transition can be changed. As a result, it is possible to produce an effective change in the effect.

[Specific example of production in the 4th normal mode]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67, we will discuss a specific example of the performance performed when the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner in the low-accuracy, low-base state and the performance is controlled in the fourth normal mode. explain. Here, FIGS. 66 and 67 are screen diagrams illustrating the effects in the fourth normal mode. The effect executed when a variation pattern is selected in which a loss notification effect is performed in the SPSP reach (see FIG. 62(K)), which is directly developed from (see )), will be described.

FIG. 66A shows a state in which one pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 9c on the first display screen 7a, and a first special icon corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e. In order to notify that the judgment result of the symbol validity judgment was "lost", the losing symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, and the production symbol showing the winning number of "438" was stopped and displayed. The state is illustrated. Here, since the performance is controlled in the fourth normal mode, the current performance mode name "4th performance mode" is displayed in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a, and also as shown in FIG. Although not shown in , a selected music production image is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a as a background image of the production pattern. In addition, since the icon change effect is not being performed, the one pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 9c and the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e are both in the shape of a musical note. It is displayed as an icon in the normal display mode.

As mentioned above, when a predetermined fixed time (0.6 seconds in this embodiment 3) has elapsed since the losing symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the first symbol displayed in the pending icon display area 9c The first special symbol validity determination corresponding to the hold icon (here, the hold icon in the shape of a musical note) is executed. Then, the judgment result of this first special symbol validity determination is "lose", and as a variation pattern of the production symbol accompanying the variation display of the first special symbol, a variation production pattern that directly develops from normal reach to SPSP reach is for production control. When selected by the microcomputer 91, the following effects are performed.

That is, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol propriety determination corresponding to the earliest pending icon, the most recent pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 9c is The previous pending icon is shifted to the icon display area 9e, and scrolling display of the three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 66(A) and 66(B)). When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the scrolling display of these three symbol rows was started, a step-up preview performance image (SU preview performance image) is displayed in the center area of the first display screen 7a, and this SU preview performance image In some cases, a preview effect called SU preview that changes the display mode of the SU notice in stages may be executed. In this SU preview, the reliability of the jackpot is suggested by the display color of the SU preview performance image and the number of stages to which the display mode of the SU preview performance image changes.

Following the above-mentioned SU notice, a pseudo continuous performance may be executed. Here, the pseudo-continuous performance is such that during the variable display of one special symbol (here, the first special symbol), the performance symbol displayed in the performance symbol display area 7b is variably displayed multiple times. It is a staged performance. Regarding this pseudo continuous effect, the following effects are displayed.

In other words, the scrolling speed of the symbol row in the left column decreases and the left symbol (for example, 6 symbols) pseudo-stops, and then the scrolling speed of the symbol column in the right column decreases (the left symbol that pseudo-stopped first and The symbols on the right (for example, 4 symbols) will pseudo-stop, and then the scroll speed of the middle row of symbols will decrease, and the 7 symbols will pseudo-stop as the middle symbol to notify the execution of the pseudo-series effect (Fig. 66). (See (D)).

In this way, after the different performance symbols as the left symbol and the right symbol have pseudo-stopped, when the 7 symbols in the middle row have pseudo-stopped, the pseudo-second fluctuating performance that follows the pseudo-first fluctuating fluctuating performance is started. . Specifically, after the characters "x2" indicating the start of the pseudo second fluctuating effect are displayed in a large size in the central area of the first display screen 7a, the characters "x2" are displayed in the first display. It is displayed in a small size in the upper left area of the screen 7a, and accordingly, the scrolling display of the three symbol rows is restarted in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIGS. 66(D) and (E)). When this pseudo second series of variable effects is being performed, for example, an SU preview may be executed as in the case of the pseudo first series of variable effects (see FIG. 66(F)).

As mentioned above, when the SU notice is executed during the variable display of the second pseudo series, the second pseudo continuous display is executed during the variable display of the current first special symbol (see Figure 66 (G) ). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 66(G), the scrolling speed of the left symbol column decreases, the left symbol (for example, 2 symbols) comes to a pseudo-stop, and then the right symbol column The scrolling speed decreases and the right symbols (for example, 5 symbols) pseudo-stop, and then the scrolling speed of the middle symbol row decreases and the 7 symbols pseudo-stop as the middle symbols.

When the second pseudo consecutive performance is executed during the variable display of the first special symbol, a pseudo third consecutive variable performance following the pseudo second consecutive fluctuating performance is started. Specifically, after the characters "x3" indicating the start of the pseudo third fluctuating effect are displayed in a large size in the central area of the first display screen 7a, the characters "x3" are displayed in the first display. It is displayed in a small size in the upper left area of the screen 7a, and accordingly, the scrolling display of the three symbol rows is restarted in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIGS. 66(G) and (H)).

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the pseudo third fluctuating effect in this way, the scrolling speed of the symbol row in the left column decreases, the left symbol (for example, 3 symbols) pseudo-stops, and then , the scrolling speed of the symbol row in the right column decreases (same as the left symbol), the right symbols (here, 3 symbols) come to a pseudo stop, and a reach is established (see FIG. 66(I)).

In addition, here, we have explained the case where the "pseudo series before reach" is executed, in which the scrolling display of each symbol row is temporarily interrupted and then restarted before the reach is established, but after the reach is established, the scrolling display of each symbol row is executed. A "pseudo-run after reaching" may be performed in which the scrolling display is temporarily interrupted and then restarted. Furthermore, both the pre-reach pseudo-run and the post-reach pseudo-run may be executed.

In the third embodiment, a case will be explained in which a pseudo continuous effect is executed in which the scrolling display of a symbol row is temporarily interrupted and then restarted. It may be without. That is, in the pseudo continuous performance, during the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance symbol display area 7b is in a non-display state in which no performance symbol is displayed, and in this non-display state, the center area of the first display screen 7a is This is a production that displays a suggestive image that suggests the execution of a pseudo-continuous production, such as "NEXT", to make it appear as if the production symbol has been varied and displayed multiple times during one variation display of the first special symbol. Good too. When performing a pseudo-continuous effect that does not use such pseudo-continuous symbols (in Example 3, seven symbols pseudo-stopped in the middle row), the non-display state is canceled immediately after the display of the suggestion image ends. By restarting the scrolling display of the symbol row, it is possible to make it appear as if the performance symbol is being variably displayed a plurality of times during one variably displaying of the special symbol.

Returning to the explanation of the third embodiment, as mentioned above, when the same effect symbols as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped and a reach is established, a normal short reach (see FIG. 62(E)) is executed ( (See FIG. 67(A)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 67(A), after the reach is established, the scrolling speed of the middle row of symbols gradually decreases, and the reach symbols (here, 3 symbols on the left and 3 symbols on the right) and An effect display is performed to show that the same middle symbol (in this case, the third middle symbol) approaches the active line defined by the reach symbol.

Here, when the normal reach progresses to the SPSP reach, the following effects are displayed. In other words, when the middle row symbol row is being scrolled, the same middle symbol as the reach symbol (3 symbols in this case) passes over the active line, and accordingly, the scrolling speed of the middle row symbol row increases. increases, making it difficult to identify the medium symbol, and a development effect is performed that suggests that the SPSP reach will develop (see FIG. 67(B)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 67(B), in the process of moving the three left symbols to the upper left area of the first display screen 7a while being reduced, the scroll direction is rotated once clockwise as the axis direction. Then, it moves to the upper left area, and at the same time, in the process of moving to the upper right area of the first display screen 7a while the three right symbols are being reduced, it rotates once clockwise with the scroll direction as the axis direction, and then moves to the upper right area. move to the opposite area. After that, until the end of the variable display of the first special symbol this time, the 3 symbols on the left are displayed in a pseudo-stop display in the upper left area, and the 3 symbols on the right are displayed in a pseudo-stop display in the upper right area (Fig. 67 (C) to (G )reference).

Next, following the development effect that suggests development to SPSP reach as described above (see Figure 67 (B)), for example, a group preview is performed as a preview effect that foretells the possibility of a jackpot. (See FIG. 67(C)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 67(C), an effect display showing a large number of characters moving from right to left on the first display screen 7a is performed.

In addition, during the development presentation, the background image corresponding to the fourth normal mode changes to a solid black background image (black image), which effectively heightens the player's expectations for the occurrence of the group preview. We are trying to improve it. Furthermore, although FIG. 67 shows an example of a development performance followed by a group preview that develops into an SPSP reach, there is also a case where the development performance develops into an SPSP reach without a group preview being performed. Yes, the former has a higher jackpot reliability than the latter.

When the SPSP reach is started after the development effect and the group notice as described above, the SPSP reach effect image which is the effect image related to the SPSP reach is displayed on the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 67(D)). As a result, for example, an effect display showing a battle between the main character and the enemy character is performed. Thereafter, when reaching the final stage of SPSP reach, a first performance button operation promotion performance is performed to prompt the player to operate the first performance button 63a (see FIG. 67(E)). Specifically, a first performance button image imitating the first performance button 63a and a validity period gauge indicating the remaining time of the validity period during which operation of the first performance button 63a is valid are displayed.

In this first performance button operation promotion performance, it is possible to win a jackpot at the timing when the first performance button 63a is operated during its validity period, or at the timing when the validity period ends without operating the first performance button 63a. For example, a cut-in is performed in which a predetermined cut-in image is displayed superimposed on the effect image (other than the ready-to-reach symbol) displayed on the first display screen 7a (FIG. 67). See F). This cut-in is an effect that suggests the degree of jackpot reliability, and there is a case where a green cut-in is displayed in a superimposed manner with a green cut-in image, and a red cut-in in which a red cut-in image is displayed in a superimposed manner. There are cases where a cut-in is performed, and cases where a gold cut-in that displays a gold cut-in image superimposed is performed.If these cut-ins are arranged in order from lowest to highest reliability of jackpot, green cut-in, The order is red cut-in, then gold cut-in.

In addition, here, an example has been described in which, if the first effect button 63a is not operated during the valid period, a cut-in is performed at the timing when the valid period ends, but in other embodiments, Another configuration may be adopted in which the cut-in is not performed if the first effect button 63a is not operated during the process.

When the cut-in occurs and the SPSP reach reaches the final stage as described above, a second performance button operation promotion performance is performed to prompt the player to operate the second performance button 63b (see FIG. 67(G)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 67(G), during the valid period of the second performance button operation promotion performance, a second performance button image imitating the second performance button 63b and "Press!" are displayed. Characters indicating the operation content of the second performance button 63b and a validity period gauge indicating the remaining time of the validity period are displayed.

When the second performance button 63b is operated during the valid period of this second performance button operation promotion performance, as an operation corresponding performance according to the operation, three performance symbols indicating a reach loss are pseudo-stopped, and then the main stop is stopped. A loss notification effect is performed (see FIG. 67(H)).

In addition, here, since the judgment result of the first special symbol validity judgment performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol this time is "loss", a loss notification performance is performed as an operation compatible performance, but this time When the judgment result of the first special symbol propriety judgment is a "jackpot", a hit notification performance is performed as an operation corresponding performance in which the three performance symbols indicating a double are pseudo-stopped and then actually stopped.

In addition, here, since the loss notification performance is executed with SPSP reach, which is a highly reliable reach performance, the performance mode changes to the 4th normal with the start of the next variable display of the first special symbol and the performance symbol. For example, the mode is shifted to the first normal mode, and the scrolling display (here, left scrolling) of the symbol row is started with the background image dedicated to the first normal mode being displayed (see FIG. 67(I)). . In addition, since the transition has been made to the first normal mode, the production mode name "First Normal Mode" is displayed in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a, and the corresponding icon ( In the third embodiment, the hexagonal icon) is displayed in the icon display area 9e.

[Specific example of production in the first normal mode]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69, we will discuss a specific example of the performance performed when the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner in the low-accuracy, low-base state and the performance is controlled in the first normal mode. explain. Here, FIGS. 68 and 69 are screen diagrams illustrating effects in the first normal mode.

As described above based on FIG. 65, when the performance is controlled in the first normal mode, a performance pattern including a character image and a number is displayed on the first display screen 7a. In FIG. 68(A), the first special symbol corresponding to the icon in the normal display mode displayed in the icon display area 9e (the hexagonal icon in the normal display mode exclusive to the first normal mode) is shown. In order to notify that the determination result is a "loss", a state is illustrated in which three performance symbols indicating a random number of "524" are stopped. Specifically, the 5 symbols included in the lower row of symbol rows make a final stop in the lower left area of the production symbol display area 7b, and the 2 symbols included in the middle row symbol row make a final stop in the center area of the production symbol display area 7b. However, a state in which four symbols included in the upper row of symbols are completely stopped in the upper right area of the effect symbol display area 7b is illustrated.

In addition, here, since the performance is controlled in the first normal mode, the current performance mode name "first performance mode" is displayed in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a (FIG. 68(A) Although not shown in FIG. 68(A) and the like, a background image exclusively for the first normal mode is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a as a background image of the production pattern. FIG. 68(A) also shows a special display mode common to the four normal performance modes as a result of the icon change performance targeting one pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 9c. A state in which a hold icon (for example, a red circular hold icon) is displayed is illustrated.

The losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, and a predetermined fixed period of time (0.6 seconds in this embodiment 3) after the final stop of the production symbol indicating the winning number of "524" as described above. When , a first special symbol validity determination corresponding to the first pending icon (here, a red circular pending icon) displayed in the pending icon display area 9c is executed. In cases where the judgment result of this first special symbol validity determination is a "jackpot" or a "loss", a variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected in which a variation effect that develops to a pseudo third consecutive sequence is executed. In some cases, the following effects may be performed.

<First common character line production>
That is, when the first special symbol validity determination corresponding to the red, circular pending icon is executed, this pending icon is shifted from the pending icon display area 9c to the icon display area 9e, and is displayed in three columns in the vertical direction. 68 (A) and (B)). When left scrolling of the three symbol rows is started in this manner, the lower symbol row becomes temporarily hidden, and a common character line performance is started. Here, an explanation will be given using as an example a case where the first common character dialogue performance in the current symbol variation develops to the third stage, which is the upper limit.

(First stage performance)
First, as the first stage of the first common character dialogue production, the following production is performed. That is, at the start timing of the first stage production, although not shown in FIG. 1 appears in the lower right end area of the display screen 7a. Similar character images representing this character A are scrolled to the left in the same way as the lower symbol row, and the character images constituting the performance symbols included in the lower symbol row are displayed in a stopped state. (For example, in FIG. 68(A), the character image representing the character E constituting the 5 symbols is displayed: the first position) and says the line "B-san!" An effect display is performed to show how the sound is emitted. Specifically, in addition to a similar character image representing character A, a dialogue frame containing the words "B-san!" is displayed. Note that at the timing when the dialogue frame including the characters "B-san!" is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the voice of the character A saying "B-san!" is output from the speaker 67.

In the first stage of production, a similar character image showing the same character A as one symbol is scrolled to the left in the same way as each production symbol included in the lower row of symbols, and after moving to the first position, An effect display is performed to show how the character A indicated by this similar character image utters a line (see FIG. 68(C)). For this reason, it is possible to give the player the impression that the character shown by the character image constituting the production symbols included in the lower row of symbols has uttered a line, and the lower row of symbols can be moved to the left. It is possible to obtain a high performance effect by the synergistic effect of the first stage performance and the performance in which any of the performance symbols is scrolled and displayed and then stopped in the lower left area.

In addition, if the first stage performance is being performed and the lower symbol row is also displayed with high-speed scrolling, even though the performance symbols included in the lower symbol row will be displayed semi-transparently, these A display area for displaying the production design and a display area for displaying production images related to the first stage production (here, a similar character image indicating character A and a dialogue frame containing the characters "B-san!"). There is a concern that the visibility of the effect image related to the first stage effect may decrease because of the overlap between the two.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, in order to suppress the occurrence of such a problem, as described above, the lower symbol row is temporarily hidden, and then the first stage (See FIG. 68(C)). FIG. 68(C) shows that the scrolling display of the upper and middle symbol rows is continued, and the scrolling display of the lower symbol row is interrupted.

(Second stage performance)
In the second stage performance following the first stage performance, the following performance is performed. That is, at the start timing of the second stage performance, although it is not shown in FIG. 68, the performance display (see FIG. 68(C)) that shows the character A uttering the lines indicated by the similar character image continues. While the game is being executed, a similar character image showing the same character B as two symbols included in the upper row of symbols (a production pattern consisting of the number "2" and a character image showing character B) is displayed in the second row. 1 appears in the upper right end area of the display screen 7a. Similar character images representing this character B are scrolled to the left in the same way as the upper row of symbol rows, and the character images constituting the performance symbols included in the upper row of symbol rows are stopped and displayed. (For example, in FIG. 68A, the position where the character image representing the character D constituting the four symbols is displayed: the second position).

In this way, when the similar character image representing character B is placed at the second position, the display of the similar character image representing character A continues. On the other hand, in order to realize a production display in which a similar character image representing character B utters the line "How are you doing?", "B The dialogue frame containing the words "Say!" is deleted, and instead, the dialogue frame containing the words "How are you doing?" is displayed in a position close to the similar character image representing character B (Fig. 68 ( See D). Note that at the timing when the dialogue frame including the characters "How are you doing?" is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the voice of the character B saying "How are you?" is output from the speaker 67.

In the second stage of production, a similar character image showing the same character B as the second symbol is scrolled to the left in the same way as each production symbol included in the upper row of symbols, and after moving to the second position, , an effect display is performed showing how the character B represented by this similar character image utters a line (see FIG. 68(D)). For this reason, it is possible to give the player the impression that the character shown by the character image constituting the performance symbols included in the upper row of symbol rows has uttered a line. A high performance effect can be obtained by the synergistic effect of the performance of scrolling leftward and then stopping any of the performance symbols in the upper right area, and the second stage performance.

In addition, when the second stage performance is being performed, if the upper row of symbol rows is also displayed with high-speed scrolling, the performance symbols included in the upper row of symbol rows will be displayed semi-transparently. , a display in which the display area of these performance symbols and the performance image related to the second stage performance (here, a similar character image indicating character B and a dialogue frame containing the words "How are you doing?") are displayed. Since the areas overlap, there is a concern that the visibility of the effect image related to the second stage effect may be reduced.

Therefore, in order to suppress the occurrence of such a problem, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the second stage effect is performed after the upper row of symbols is temporarily hidden. It is said that FIG. 68(D) shows that the scroll display of the middle row of symbol rows is continued, and the scroll display of the lower row and upper row of symbol rows is interrupted.

(3rd stage performance)
In the third stage performance following the second stage performance, the following performance is performed. That is, when the timing for the start of the third stage production arrives, a dialogue frame containing the words "How are you doing?" is displayed while a similar character image representing character A and a similar character image representing character B are displayed. Instead, a similar character image showing character A is replaced by a dialogue frame containing the words "Good feeling!" to realize a production display showing character A uttering the line "Good feeling!" (See FIG. 68(E)). Note that at the timing when the dialogue frame including the characters "Good feeling!" is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the voice of the character A saying "Good feeling!" is output from the speaker 67.

In this way, in the common character dialogue production that develops step by step from the second stage onward, the numbers that make up the production symbols are not displayed, and the character images that make up the production symbols included in the lower row of symbol rows are displayed. (here, the character image indicating character A) and a similar character image indicating a character in common with the character image constituting the production design included in the upper row of symbol rows (here, the character image indicating character B) A similar character image showing the character who is playing is displayed on the first display screen 7a. Then, the first display screen 7a and the speaker 67 are used to produce an effect in which the characters indicated by these similar character images alternately utter lines (see FIGS. 68(C) to 68(E)).

Therefore, it is as if the character indicated by the character image constituting the production design included in the lower row of symbol rows and the character indicated by the character image constituting the production symbol included in the upper row of symbol rows are having a conversation. It is possible to give a strong impression to the player, and in combination with the performance in which the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner, it is possible to obtain a high performance effect.

When the third stage performance is performed as illustrated in FIG. 68(E), all the performance images related to the third stage performance are erased, and the lower row of symbol rows and the upper row of symbol rows are scrolled at high speed. The display (left scroll) is restarted (see FIGS. 68(E) and (F)).

Up to this point, we have explained the case where the common character dialogue production reaches the upper limit of the third stage and ends, but the third stage production is performed after the first stage production and the second stage production have been performed. There are cases where the common character line performance ends without being performed, or there are cases where the common character line performance ends after the first stage performance is performed without performing the second and third stage performances. be.

In addition, when comparing the common character line performance that ends with the first stage performance, the common character dialogue performance that ends with the second stage performance, and the common character dialogue performance that ends with the third stage performance, the following I can say that. In other words, if the judgment result of the first special symbol validity judgment performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol this time is a "jackpot", or even if it is a "loss", the variation time is relatively long. When a variation pattern of 1 special symbol is selected, the common character line performance that ends with the third stage performance is most likely to be executed, and the common character dialogue performance that ends with the second stage performance is most likely to be executed next, The common character dialogue production that ends with the first stage production is the most difficult to execute. On the other hand, the judgment result of the first special symbol validity judgment performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol this time is "lose", and the variation pattern of the first special symbol has a relatively short variation time. If is selected, the common character line performance that ends with the first stage performance is the most likely to be performed, the common character dialogue performance that ends with the second stage performance is the most likely to be performed next, and the third stage performance is the most likely to be performed. The common character lines that end are the most difficult to execute.

For these reasons, the jackpot reliability is highest when a common character line performance that ends with the third stage performance is executed, and the second highest jackpot reliability is when a common character dialogue performance that ends with the second stage performance is executed. The jackpot reliability is high, and the jackpot reliability is the lowest when a common character line performance that ends with the first stage performance is executed.

Further, the common character dialogue performance has a feature that the jackpot reliability changes depending on the content of the dialogue uttered by the character in the final stage performance, for example. FIG. 68(E) shows an example of how a similar character image of character A utters the line "I like it!". In addition to this, there are cases where the line ``Masumasu'', ``Great chance!'', and ``Super hot!?'' are uttered. When these lines are arranged from highest to lowest confidence level, the order is ``Super hot!?'', ``Great chance!'', ``It feels good!'', and ``Not bad''.

(Production after the first common character dialogue production is completed)
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 68, when the first common character dialogue performance in this symbol change is completed, the high-speed scrolling display of the lower and upper symbol rows is resumed as described above (FIG. 68 ( See F). In this way, when a predetermined period of time has passed after the high-speed scroll display of the upper and lower symbol rows is resumed, the scroll speed of the lower row of symbol rows gradually decreases, and the 6 symbols included in the lower row of symbol rows ( The effect pattern consisting of the number "6" and the character image of character F) pseudo-stops in the lower left area of the effect pattern display area 7b (see FIG. 68(G)). Then, the scrolling speed of the upper row of symbol rows gradually decreases, and the six symbols included in the upper row of symbol rows pseudo-stop in the upper right area of the performance symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 68(H)). As a result, a reach with 6 symbols is established, and, for example, a normal short reach (see FIG. 62(E)) is executed. Here, if the above-mentioned variable performance pattern for performing the post-reach pseudo-run is set, the following performance is performed.

In other words, while the two 6 symbols forming the reach are in a pseudo-stop state, the middle symbol consisting only of numbers to which no character image is attached rotates clockwise with the vertical direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the axis direction ( rotation) (see Figure 68(H)). Then, each time the middle symbol rotates once, the numbers forming the middle symbol change by increasing by "1". As a result, the middle symbols change in ascending order, for example, 2 symbols, 3 symbols, and 4 symbols. Here, a variable production pattern is set to execute a pseudo-run after reaching, so when the middle symbol changes to 7 symbols, the 7 symbols do not change to 8 symbols and are moved to the center area of the production symbol display area 7b. A pseudo-stop is performed (see FIG. 68(I)).

In this way, when the first pseudo continuous performance during the current symbol variation is executed, the pseudo second continuous variation performance that follows the pseudo first continuous variation performance is started. Specifically, after the characters "x2" indicating the start of the pseudo second fluctuating effect are displayed in a large size in the center area of the first display screen 7a, the characters "x2" are displayed in the first display. It is displayed in a small size in the upper left area of the screen 7a, and accordingly, the scroll display (left scroll) of the three symbol rows is restarted in the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 69(A)).

<Second common character dialogue production>
During the fluctuating performance of this second pseudo series, there are cases where a common character dialogue performance is executed, and there are cases where a common character dialogue performance is executed. The common character line performance (see Figures 68(C) to (E)) is executed, and the second common character line performance (see Figures 69(B) to (D)) is performed during the pseudo second fluctuating performance. An example of a case in which this is executed will be explained. In addition, the second common character line production may consist of one stage of production (first stage production) or two stages of production (first stage production to second stage production). In some cases, the production consists of three stages (stages 1 to 3), but in this case, the second common character dialogue production is similar to the first common character dialogue production. The explanation will be given using an example of a case where the performance consists of three stages.

(First stage performance)
At the start of the first stage of the second common character line performance, the lower row of symbols is temporarily hidden, and although it is not shown in FIG. A similar character image showing the character H that is common to the character image forming the symbol appears in the lower right end area of the first display screen 7a. Similar character images representing this character H are scrolled to the left in the same way as the lower symbol row, and the character images constituting the performance symbols included in the lower symbol row are stopped and displayed. (see FIG. 69(B)). Specifically, in addition to a similar character image showing character H, a dialogue frame including the characters "F-san!" is displayed. Note that at the timing when the dialogue frame including the characters "F-san!" is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the voice of the character H saying "F-san!" is output from the speaker 67.

Note that in the first stage of the first common character dialogue performance (see FIG. 68(C)), the performance is performed using a similar character image showing character A, and the first stage of the second common character dialogue performance In the stage production (see FIG. 69(B)), as is clear from the fact that the production is executed using a similar character image showing the character H, similar characters used for the production of each stage of the common character line production The type of image is variable.

(Second stage performance)
In the second stage performance following the first stage performance, the following performance is performed. That is, at the start timing of the second stage performance, the upper row of symbols is temporarily hidden, and although it does not appear in FIGS. 69(B) to (C), it is While the effect display (see Fig. 69(B)) showing how the character H shown by the similar character image that appears is uttering a line continues, the 6 symbols (numbers) included in the upper row of symbols are displayed. A similar character image showing the same character F as the production pattern (composed of "6" and a character image showing character F) appears in the upper right end area of the first display screen 7a. Similar character images representing this character F are scrolled to the left in the same way as the upper row of symbol rows, and the character images constituting the performance symbols included in the upper row of symbol rows are stopped and displayed. 68(A)) (second position: see FIG. 68A).

In this way, when the similar character image representing character F is placed at the second position, the display of the similar character image representing character H continues. On the other hand, in order to realize a production display in which a similar character image representing character F utters the line "Is it over?", "F The dialogue frame containing the characters "Hmm!" is deleted, and instead, the dialogue frame containing the characters "Is it over?" is displayed in a position close to the similar character image representing character F (Figure 69(C)) reference). Note that at the timing when the dialogue frame including the characters "Are you done?" is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the voice of the character F saying "Are you done?" is output from the speaker 67.

(3rd stage performance)
In the third stage performance following the second stage performance, the following performance is performed. In other words, when the timing for the start of the third stage production arrives, the dialogue frame containing the words "Is it over?" disappears while the similar character image representing character H and the similar character image representing character F are displayed. Instead, a dialogue frame containing the words "One more time!" to realize a production display showing Character H saying the words "One more time!" is a similar character representing Character D. It is displayed in a position close to the image (see FIG. 69(D)). Note that at the timing when the dialogue frame including the characters "One more time!" is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the voice of the character H saying "One more time!" is output from the speaker 67.

(Production after the second common character dialogue production is completed)
When the third stage performance is performed as illustrated in FIG. 69(D), all the performance images related to the third stage performance are erased, and the lower and upper symbol rows are scrolled at high speed. The display (left scroll) is restarted (see FIGS. 69(D) and (E)).

Here, the third stage of the second common character dialogue performance (character H utters the line "One more time!": see Figure 69(D)) suggests the execution of a pseudo-continuous performance. There is. Therefore, after the second common character line performance is completed, the second pseudo continuous performance is performed in the same manner as the first pseudo continuous performance described above based on FIGS. 68(G) to (I). .

Specifically, when a predetermined period of time elapses after the high-speed scrolling display of the upper and lower symbol rows (see FIG. 69(E)) is resumed, the scrolling speed of the lower row of symbol rows gradually decreases. The two symbols included in the symbol row (the production symbol composed of the number "2" and the character image of character B) pseudo-stop in the lower left area of the production symbol display area 7b (FIG. 69(F)). reference). Then, the scrolling speed of the upper symbol row gradually decreases, and the two symbols included in the upper row of symbol rows pseudo-stop in the upper right area of the production symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 69(G)). As a result, a reach with two symbols is established, and, for example, a normal short reach (see FIG. 62(E)) is executed.

During this normal short reach, the above-described post-reach pseudo-run is executed. In other words, while the two symbols forming the reach are in a pseudo-stop state, the middle symbol consisting only of numbers to which no character image is attached rotates clockwise with the vertical direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the axis direction ( rotation) (see Figure 69(G)). Then, each time the middle symbol rotates once, the number forming the middle symbol increases by "1". As a result, the middle symbols change in ascending order, for example, 2 symbols, 3 symbols, and 4 symbols. In this way, when the middle symbol changes to 7 symbols in the process of changing, the 7 symbols do not change to 8 symbols and pseudo-stop in the center area of the performance symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 69(H)).

In this way, when the second pseudo consecutive performance during the current symbol variation is executed, the pseudo third consecutive fluctuating performance that follows the pseudo second consecutive fluctuating performance is started. Specifically, after the characters "x3" indicating the start of the pseudo third fluctuating effect are displayed in a large size in the central area of the first display screen 7a, the characters "x3" are displayed in the first display. It is displayed in a small size in the upper left area of the screen 7a, and accordingly, the scroll display (left scroll) of the three symbol rows is restarted in the performance symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 69(I)).

Here, two pseudo consecutive performances are performed, and the variable performance has developed to the third pseudo consecutive performance. For this reason, although not shown in FIG. 69, in most cases, highly reliable reach performances such as 1st SP reach, 2nd SP reach, and SPSP reach are developed, and a hit notification performance or a loss notification performance is executed. That will happen.

(Features related to common character line production)
As described above based on FIGS. 68 and 69, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low-accuracy, low-base state, the number added to the production symbol is A similar character image that does not exist and has the same display content as the character image constituting the performance pattern is displayed in a predetermined display area on the first display screen 7a, and a common character dialogue performance using the similar character image is executed. (See FIGS. 68(C) to (E) and FIGS. 69(B) to (D)).

When the production is controlled in the first normal mode, each production symbol included in the three symbol rows is scrolled to the left, while similar character images used in the common character line production Similarly, the display is scrolled to the left. Further, the common character dialogue performance is performed with similar character images being displayed in the same display area where the character images forming the performance pattern are displayed in a stopped state.

In this manner, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, after the similar character images are displayed in a variable manner in a manner common to the manner in which each performance symbol (character image and number) included in the symbol row is varied, a predetermined display is performed. A common character line production is performed using similar character images displayed in the area. For this reason, it is possible to give the player the impression that the character images that make up the performance symbols are performing a common character line performance, and it is possible to give the player the impression that the character images that make up the performance symbols are performing a common character line performance. It is possible to obtain a high production effect by synergistic effect with character dialogue production.

Furthermore, after the similar character image is erased from the first display screen 7a with the end of the common character dialogue production, there is a character image (a character image indicating a different character) whose display content is different from that of the similar character image. The effect pattern composed of the characters is displayed in the same display area where the similar character image is displayed (for example, see FIGS. 68(E) and (G)).

In this manner, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, a character representing another character different from the character represented by the similar character image is displayed in the same display area in which the similar character image is displayed during the common character dialogue performance. A production pattern including an image is displayed.
For this reason, for example, after displaying a similar character image showing character A in a predetermined display area, by displaying a production pattern including a character image showing the same character A in a predetermined display area, the same It is possible to effectively suppress the problem that a player misunderstands that the performance symbols are displayed consecutively.

Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, each performance symbol is displayed in a high-speed variable manner from the start of the common character dialogue performance until the end, making it extremely difficult to visually recognize each performance symbol. (See Figures 68(C) to (E)). Then, after the common character dialogue performance is completed (after the similar character image is deleted), a performance pattern that can be visually recognized by the player is displayed (for example, see FIG. 68(G)).

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, since there is no period in which both the similar character image and the production pattern are displayed in a visible state, the character images constituting the production pattern are displayed in a common character line production. It is possible to easily suppress the occurrence of a problem in which a player misidentifies a similar character image as a production pattern while giving the appearance of executing the same character image.

Up to this point, we have explained the common character dialogue production that is performed when the production is controlled in the first normal mode, but as illustrated in FIG. 65, it also applies when the production is controlled in the third normal mode. , similar common character lines will be produced. The common character line performance performed when the performance is controlled in the third normal mode will be described in detail later based on FIGS. 72 and 73.

[Specific example of production in the second normal mode]
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, a specific example of the effect performed when the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner in the low-accuracy/low-base state and the effect is controlled in the second normal mode will be explained. . Here, FIG. 70 is a screen diagram illustrating the effect in the second normal mode.

FIG. 70(A) shows a state in which two pending icons are displayed in the pending icon display area 9c on the first display screen 7a, and a first special icon corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e. In order to notify that the determination result of the symbol validity judgment was "lost", the losing symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, and the production symbol showing the winning number of "513" was stopped and displayed. The state is illustrated. Here, since the performance is controlled in the second normal mode, the current performance mode name "Second Performance Mode" is displayed in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a, and also as shown in FIG. Although not shown in , a second normal mode exclusive background image is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a as a background image of the production pattern (see FIG. 65). In addition, since the icon change effect is not being performed, the two pending icons displayed in the pending icon display area 9c and the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e are both diamond-shaped. It is displayed as a normal display mode icon (second normal mode exclusive icon).

Note that since the effects are controlled in the second normal mode, each effect pattern displayed on the first display screen 7a (for example, see FIG. 70(A)) is the image of one of the characters A to I. A character image that represents the upper body of a character and is larger than a character image that constitutes a production pattern that is displayed when the production is controlled in the first normal mode (for example, see FIG. 68(A)). It is configured with Further, the effect pattern displayed when the effect is controlled in the second normal mode has a number added to the lower right of the character image (see FIG. 70(A)).

When a predetermined fixed time (0.6 seconds in this embodiment 3) has elapsed since the losing symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 9c (here Then, the first special symbol validity determination corresponding to the left pending icon of the two diamond-shaped pending icons (see FIG. 70(A)) is executed. Then, the judgment result of this first special symbol propriety determination is "lose", and the variable production pattern of the no-reach production is determined by the microcomputer 91 for production control as the variation production pattern of the production symbol accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol. When selected, the following effects will occur.

That is, as the first special symbol propriety determination corresponding to the earliest pending icon is started, the first special symbol displayed in the pending icon display area 9c starts to be displayed in a variable manner. The previous pending icon is shifted to the icon display area 9e, and the remaining pending icons are shifted within the pending icon display area 9c in the direction approaching the icon display area 9e, and the three symbol rows are scrolled (scroll down). is started (see FIGS. 70(A) and 70(B)). When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the scroll display of these three symbol rows started, one symbol included in the left symbol column and two symbols included in the right symbol column pseudo-stop (Fig. 70 ( See C). In addition, these 1 and 2 symbols may not only pseudo-stop in the order of 1 and 2, but also may pseudo-stop in the order of 2, 1, or 1 and 2 at the same time. be.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has passed after the left and right symbols have pseudo-stopped, for example, the 6 symbols included in the middle row of symbols have pseudo-stopped, and the losing symbol has been stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. At the same time, the three performance symbols showing the random number of "162" come to a standstill (see FIG. 70(D)).

Next, when a predetermined fixed time has elapsed since the losing symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the symbol corresponding to the first pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 9c (see FIG. 70(D)) A first special symbol validity determination is executed. Then, the judgment result of this first special symbol propriety determination is "lose", and the variable production pattern of the no-reach production is determined by the microcomputer 91 for production control as the variation production pattern of the production symbol accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol. When selected, the following effects may occur.

That is, as the variable display of the first special symbol starts, the first pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e and displayed as the icon, and the horizontal direction Scroll display (downward scrolling) of the three symbol rows displayed in three rows is started (see FIG. 70(E)).

(Composition effect in 2nd normal mode)
When the performance is controlled in the second normal mode, the above-described composite performance may be executed immediately after the scrolling display of the three symbol rows is started. When this composite effect is executed, the three symbol rows will be hidden after a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the scroll display of the three symbol rows started (see Fig. 70(F)). . Then, for example, an effect display is performed in which a character image representing the character H constituting the 8 symbols appears in the right area of the first display screen 7a (see FIG. 70(F)).

In this way, when the 8 symbol appears in the right side area of the first display screen 7a, the number "8" appears in the upper left area of the first display screen 7a, and this number "8" is the same as the symbol in the left column. Like the columns, they are scrolled downward (see FIG. 70(G)). Further, as similarly illustrated in FIG. 70(G), as the eight symbols scroll down, the character image representing the character H moves to the left.

After that, when the character image indicating character H and the number "8" move to the left side area in the effect pattern display area 7b, these character images and numbers are combined to form one effect pattern (in this case, the 8 pattern). A synthetic effect is performed in which the images are completed (see FIGS. 70(G) to (H)).

When the 8 symbols completed by this composite effect are pseudo-stopped in the left area of the effect symbol display area 7b, for example, the 4 symbols included in the middle symbol row and the 5 symbols included in the right symbol row are Moving from above (see Fig. 70 (I)), the three production symbols indicating the winning number "845" come to a pseudo-stop, and as the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the above-mentioned winning number appears. The three production symbols showing may stop.

As explained based on FIG. 70, when the effect is controlled in the second normal mode, a composite effect that combines a character image and a number may be executed. In this way, in addition to the case where the effect pattern is formed from the beginning, the effect pattern may be formed on the first display screen 7a, so the display control is performed to pseudo-stop the effect pattern and then actually stop it. It is possible to effectively suppress the problem that the performance becomes monotonous by repeating this process, and as a result, the interest level decreases.

In addition, here, we have explained the case where a composite effect is executed in which the effect symbols included in the left column symbol column (in this case, 8 symbols on the left: see FIG. 70(H)) are executed, but the middle column A composite performance in which the performance symbols included in the symbol row are formed, or a composite performance in which the performance symbols included in the right symbol row are formed may be executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment 3, during one variable display of the first special symbol, the effect pattern (left pattern) included in the left pattern column and the effect pattern (middle pattern) included in the middle pattern column ) and one of the performance symbols (right symbols) included in the symbol row in the right column (in the example shown in FIG. 70, the 8 symbols on the left), the case where a composite performance is performed will be explained as an example. I do. On the other hand, in other embodiments, for example, during the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, a combination effect is performed to form a left pattern, and then a combination effect to form a right pattern is performed. It is also possible to perform a composite effect of times.

In addition, in this third embodiment, a case will be explained using as an example a case where the composite effect is executed immediately after the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect pattern is started, but in other embodiments, for example, when a reach is established, , when performing a composite effect to form a effect pattern that becomes a reach pattern, or when the three effect patterns indicating a losing eye (reach losing eye or rose eye) come to a pseudo stop at the end of the fluctuating display of the first special symbol. , a composite effect may be performed to form any one effect pattern.

[Specific example of production in 3rd normal mode]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, a specific example of the performance performed when the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner in the low-accuracy low base state and the performance is controlled in the third normal mode I will explain about it. Here, FIGS. 71 to 73 are screen diagrams illustrating effects in the third normal mode.

FIG. 71(A) shows a state in which two pending icons are displayed in the pending icon display area 9c on the first display screen 7a, and a first special icon corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e. In order to notify that the determination result of the symbol validity judgment was "lost", a losing symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, and a production symbol indicating a winning number of "431" was stopped and displayed. The state is illustrated. Here, since the performance is controlled in the third normal mode, the current performance mode name "Third Performance Mode" is displayed in the upper right area of the first display screen 7a, and also as shown in FIG. Although not shown in , a third normal mode exclusive background image is displayed in the entire area of the first display screen 7a as a background image of the production pattern (see FIG. 65). In addition, since the icon change effect is not being performed, the two pending icons displayed in the pending icon display area 9c and the icon displayed in the icon display area 9e both have an inverted triangle shape. The icon is displayed as a normal display mode icon (a third normal mode exclusive icon).

Note that since the effects are controlled in the third normal mode, each effect pattern displayed on the first display screen 7a (for example, see FIG. 71(A)) may be any of the characters A to I wearing one-piece dresses. These are character images representing those characters, and a corresponding number is added to the center lower end of each character image.

In order to notify that the judgment result of the first special symbol validity determination corresponding to the icon illustrated in FIG. When the confirmation time has elapsed, the hold icon corresponding to the first hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 9c (here, the left hold icon of the two inverted triangular hold icons: see FIG. 71(A)) A first special symbol validity determination is executed. Then, the judgment result of this first special symbol propriety determination is "lose", and the variable production pattern of the no-reach production is determined by the microcomputer 91 for production control as the variation production pattern of the production symbol accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol. When selected, the following effects will occur.

That is, as the first special symbol propriety determination corresponding to the earliest pending icon is started, the first special symbol displayed in the pending icon display area 9c starts to be displayed in a variable manner. The previous pending icon is shifted to the icon display area 9e, and the remaining pending icons are shifted within the pending icon display area 9c in a direction approaching the icon display area 9e, and the variable display of the three performance symbols is started. (See FIG. 71(B)).

When the performance is controlled in the third normal mode and the first special symbol is stopped, a character image corresponding to any number from "1" to "9" is added to the performance symbol display area 7b. Three performance symbols are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction (see FIG. 71(A)). On the other hand, when the variable display of the next first special symbol starts, the character image is removed from each number of the three production symbols, and each production symbol is The character image is displayed in a variable manner without being added (see FIGS. 71(B) to 71(D)).

The left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol each rotate clockwise with the vertical direction of the pachinko game machine 1 as the axis direction (for example, see FIGS. 71(B) to 71(D)). Then, as each performance symbol rotates once, a performance symbol having a number added by "1" is displayed. In Figures 71(B) to (D), the 4 symbols on the left rotate once clockwise to display the 5 symbols on the left, the 3 middle symbols rotate once clockwise to display the 4 middle symbols, and the 1 right symbol rotates clockwise to display the 5 symbols on the left. An example is shown in which the symbols rotate once clockwise and the two symbols on the right are displayed.

(Composition effect in 2nd normal mode)
When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the first special symbol and the variable display of the performance symbols started, a composite performance that is different from the composite performance performed in the second normal mode (see FIGS. 70(G) to (H)) will be performed. executed. That is, for example, the left symbol representing "8" is temporarily enlarged and displayed in the left area of the performance symbol display area 7b, and along with this, a performance display showing a character image representing character H moving from above. is performed (see FIG. 71(E)). Then, a synthesis effect is executed to synthesize the character image representing character H and the number "8" (see FIGS. 71(E) to (F)). In addition, FIG. 71(F) illustrates a state in which the left 8 symbols are pseudo-stopped, and the middle symbol and the right symbol continue to be displayed in a fluctuating manner.

In this way, when the synthesis effect that forms the left symbols (in this case, the left 8 symbols) is executed, the synthesis effect that forms the right symbols is executed with the left 8 symbols pseudo-stopped (Fig. 71 ( (See G) to (H)). That is, for example, the right symbol indicating "2" is temporarily enlarged and displayed in the right area of the performance symbol display area 7b, and along with this, the effect display showing the character image indicating character B moving from above. is performed (see FIG. 71(G)). Then, a synthesis effect is executed to synthesize the character image representing character B and the number "2" (see FIGS. 71(G) to (H)). Note that FIG. 71(G) illustrates a state in which a hold icon in a special display mode is newly displayed in the hold icon display area 9c as the second hold icon. Further, FIG. 71(H) shows an example of a state in which the two right symbols are pseudo-stopped in addition to the eight symbols on the left, and the fluctuating display of the middle symbol continues.

In this way, when the synthesis effect that forms the right symbol (here, the right two symbols) is executed, the synthesis effect that forms the middle symbol is executed with the left eight symbols and the right two symbols pseudo-stopped. (See FIGS. 71(I) and 72(A)). That is, for example, a medium symbol representing "6" is temporarily enlarged and displayed in the center area of the performance symbol display area 7b, and along with this, a performance display showing a character image representing character F moving from above. is performed (see FIG. 71(I)). Then, a synthesis effect is executed to synthesize the character image representing character F and the number "6" (see FIGS. 71(I) to 72(A)). In addition, FIG. 72(A) shows a state in which the left 8 symbols, the right 2 symbols, and the middle 6 symbols are pseudo-stopped, to which the corresponding character images are added, and these production symbols are "losing". ” is stopped and displayed, and the main stop is made.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first special symbol was stopped and displayed, a first special symbol validity determination corresponding to the earliest pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 9c is executed. Then, the judgment result of this first special symbol propriety determination is "lose", and the variable production pattern of the no-reach production is determined by the microcomputer 91 for production control as the variation production pattern of the production symbol accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol. When selected, the following effects may occur.

That is, as the variable display of the first special symbol starts, the earliest pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 9c is shifted to the icon display area 9e and displayed as the icon, and the pending icon The remaining pending icons (here, the pending icons in the special display mode) displayed in the display area 9c are shifted in the direction closer to the icon display area 9e (see FIGS. 72(A) and 72(B)).

Also, when the variable display of the first special symbol starts, the character image representing character H is removed from the 8 symbols on the left, the character image representing character F is removed from the 6 symbols in the middle, and the character image representing character B is removed from the 2 symbols on the right. The image is removed, and the variable display of three effect symbols to which no character image is added begins (see FIGS. 72(A) to 72(C)). Note that the variable display of these three performance symbols is the same as that described above based on FIGS. 71(B) to (D), so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

(Common character dialogue production in 3rd normal mode)
When the performance is controlled in the third normal mode, a common character dialogue performance similar to the common character dialogue performance performed when the performance is controlled in the first normal mode is executed. Here, we will explain the case where the common character dialogue performance is composed of one stage of performance, and the common character dialogue performance with the related production content is executed at the next symbol change. .

As illustrated in FIG. 72(B), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the variable display of the three effect symbols to which no character images have been added, for example, a character D that is common to the character images constituting the four symbols is displayed. A similar character image showing the character appears in the upper left end area of the first display screen 7a. The character image representing the character D is displayed at the same display position as the character image forming the left pattern (in the example shown in FIG. 72(A), the character image representing the character H forming the left eight An effect display is performed that shows the robot moving to the display position where the image is displayed and uttering the line "A-san!" (see FIG. 72(D)). Specifically, in addition to a similar character image showing character D, a dialogue frame including the characters "A-san!" is displayed. Note that at the timing when the dialogue frame including the characters "A-san!" is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the voice of the character D saying "A-san!" is output from the speaker 67.

This common character dialogue performance (see FIG. 72(D)) is a performance related to the first common character dialogue performance (see FIG. 72(H)) performed in the next symbol variation, and is similar to the character A. It has a function as a preview effect that foretells that the character image will appear in the next pattern change. It should be noted that while such a common character dialogue performance is being executed, the variable display of the middle symbol and the right symbol continues (see FIG. 72(D)).

(Production after the common character dialogue production ends)
In this way, when a common character dialogue production is executed as a production display showing how character D calls character A, the similar character image showing character D that appeared in this common character dialogue production will move, for example, to the left. It moves and disappears from the first display screen 7a. FIG. 72(E) exemplifies a state in which a similar character image representing character D is being deleted from the first display screen 7a after the common character dialogue performance is completed.

When the common character dialogue performance is completed in the above-described flow, the variable display of the left symbol is restarted, and a state in which three performance symbols are variably displayed is reached, similar to the state shown in FIG. 72(C). After that, although not shown in FIG. 72, a synthesis effect is performed in which a character image representing character E and the number "5" are combined, and a synthesis effect is performed in which a character image representing character D and the number "4" are combined. A synthesis effect that combines the character image representing character F and the number "6" is executed, and as the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, "456" illustrated in FIG. 72(F) is executed. ” The production pattern that shows the difference in the number of characters stops. Note that each of the composite performances regarding these three performance symbols is performed in the same manner as each of the composite performances described above based on FIGS. 71(E) to (I) and FIG. 72(A), so a detailed explanation here Omitted.

At the same time as the first special symbol informing you of a loss is stopped and displayed, and when a predetermined fixed time has elapsed since the main stop of the three production symbols indicating the difference of "546", they are displayed in the pending icon display area 9c. A first special symbol validity determination corresponding to the earliest pending icon (here, a pending icon in a special display mode, for example, a red circular pending icon: see FIG. 72(F)) is executed.

When this first special symbol validity determination is executed, the first pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 9c (the pending icon in the special display mode) starts to display the first special symbol in a variable manner. ) is shifted to the icon display area 9e and displayed as the icon, the character image indicating character E is removed from the 5 symbols on the left, the character image indicating character D is removed from the 4 symbols in the middle, and the character F is removed from the 6 symbols on the right. The displayed character image is removed, and a variable display of three effect symbols to which no character image is attached is started (see FIGS. 72(F) to 72(G)). Note that the variable display of these three performance symbols is the same as that described above based on FIGS. 71(B) to (D), so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In addition, in the following explanation based on FIGS. 72 (G) to (I) and FIG. The explanation will be given by taking as an example a case where the first common character line performance is executed during the first fluctuating performance, and the second common character dialogue performance is performed during the pseudo third fluctuating performance.

<First common character line production>
When the red circular pending icon is shifted from the pending icon display area 9c to the icon display area 9e and displayed as the icon, and the variable display of the three production symbols starts, the first symbol variation in this time The common character line production is executed (see FIG. 72(H)). Specifically, the similar character image showing the character A called by the character D (see FIG. 72(D)) shown by the similar character image that appeared during the previous symbol change is displayed at the upper left corner of the first display screen 7a. Appears in certain areas. The character image representing the character A is displayed at the same display position as the character image composing the left pattern (in the example shown in FIG. 72(A), the character image representing the character H comprising the left 8 The screen moves to the display position where the image is displayed, and a serif frame containing the words "NEXT!" is displayed at a nearby position (see FIG. 72(H)). Furthermore, at the timing when the dialogue frame including the characters "NEXT!" is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the voice of the character A saying "NEXT!" is output from the speaker 67. It should be noted that while such a common character dialogue performance is being executed, the variable display of the middle symbol and the right symbol continues (see FIG. 72(H)).

This first common character line performance suggests the execution of a pseudo continuous performance. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 69(B), for example, this is not an effect that calls out to the character shown by another similar character image. Therefore, the first common character dialogue performance ends with the first stage performance without performing the second stage and subsequent stage performances.

In this way, when the performance is controlled in the third normal mode, the current symbol change is considered the second symbol change, and if the previous symbol change is considered the first symbol change, the second symbol change is During the fluctuation, a common character dialogue performance (see FIG. 72(H)) related to the common character dialogue performance (see FIG. 72(D)) performed during the first symbol fluctuation is executed.

(Common character dialogue production/performance after the first time is finished)
As described above, when the first common character dialogue performance that suggests the execution of a pseudo-continuous performance is executed, the similar character image representing character A is displayed as the first 1 from the display screen 7a (see FIG. 72(I)). In this way, when the similar character image representing character A is erased, the variable display of the left symbol is restarted, and the three performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner (see FIG. 73(A)).

Next, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the three performance symbols were displayed in a fluctuating manner, a composite performance that combines the character image of character A and the number "1" is performed in the left area of the performance design display area 7b. At the same time, a synthesis effect is also executed in the right area to synthesize the character image of character A and the number "1", and as a result, a reach is established with one symbol (see FIG. 73(B)).

Here, since the first common character dialogue performance described above based on FIG. 72(H) suggests the execution of a pseudo continuous performance, the above-mentioned After the reach, pseudo-association is executed (see FIG. 73(C)). In other words, while the two single symbols forming the reach are in a pseudo-stop state, the middle symbol consisting only of numbers to which no character image is attached rotates clockwise with the vertical direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the axis direction ( (see FIG. 73(B)), and the medium 7 symbol comes to a pseudo-stop in the center area of the effect symbol display area 7b (see FIG. 73(C)).

In this way, when the first pseudo continuous performance during the current symbol variation is executed, the pseudo second continuous variation performance that follows the pseudo first continuous variation performance is started. Specifically, after the characters "x2" indicating the start of the pseudo second fluctuating effect are displayed in a large size in the central area of the first display screen 7a, the characters "x2" are displayed in the first display. It is displayed in a small size in the upper left area of the screen 7a, and along with this, the variable display of three performance symbols consisting only of numbers to which no character images are added is resumed in the performance symbol display area 7b (FIG. 73). See D).

Then, during the second pseudo consecutive fluctuating performance, the second pseudo consecutive performance in this symbol variation is executed by pseudo-stopping the middle 7 symbols with reach established with 5 symbols (Fig. 73 (See (E)). In this way, when the second pseudo consecutive effect is executed, the pseudo third continuous variable effect that follows the pseudo second continuous variable effect is started. Specifically, after the characters "x3" indicating the start of the pseudo third fluctuating effect are displayed in a large size in the central area of the first display screen 7a, the characters "x3" are displayed in the first display. It is displayed in a small size in the upper left area of the screen 7a, and along with this, the variable display of three performance symbols consisting only of numbers to which no character images are added is resumed in the performance symbol display area 7b (FIG. 73). See F).

<Second common character line production>
During the pseudo third consecutive variation performance developed in this manner, the second common character dialogue performance in the current symbol variation is executed (see FIGS. 73(G) to (I)). This second common character dialogue performance is configured as a three-stage performance, and is similar to the common character dialogue performance performed in the first normal mode (see Figures 68(C) to (E)). It is configured.

(First stage performance)
In the first stage performance, first, a similar character image showing the character D that is common to the character images constituting the left four symbols appears in the upper left end area of the first display screen 7a. Then, the similar character image representing this character D is moved downward so that it is placed at the same display position (left/common display position) where the character image forming the left pattern is displayed, and the similar character image When the character moves to the left/common display position, a serif frame containing the characters "G-san!" is displayed in a nearby position (see FIG. 73(G)). Further, at the timing when the dialogue frame including the characters "G-san!" is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the voice of the character D saying "G-san!" is output from the speaker 67. Such a first stage performance is performed in a state where the variable display of the left symbol is interrupted and the variable display of the middle symbol and the right symbol is continued.

(Second stage production)
At the start timing of the second stage performance, first, a similar character image showing the character G that is common to the character images constituting the right seven symbols appears in the upper right end area of the first display screen 7a. Then, the similar character image representing this character G is moved downward so that it is placed at the same display position (right/common display position) where the character image forming the right pattern is displayed, and the similar character image moves to the right/common display position. Then, the dialogue frame containing the characters "G-san!" is erased, and the dialogue frame containing the characters "What is it?", which represents the character G's dialogue, is moved close to the similar character image representing character G. (See FIG. 73(H)). Further, at the timing when the dialogue frame including the characters "What is it?" is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the voice of the character G saying "What is it?" is output from the speaker 67. Such a second stage performance is performed in a state where the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is interrupted, and the variable display of the middle symbol is continued.

(3rd stage performance)
In the third stage of production, the dialogue frame containing the words "What is it?" is erased, and the dialogue frame containing the words "Great chance!" representing character D's dialogue is replaced by a similar character representing character D. It is displayed in a position close to the image (see FIG. 73(I)). Further, at the timing when the dialogue frame including the characters "Great Chance!" is displayed on the first display screen 7a, the voice of the character D saying "Great Chance!" is output from the speaker 67.

The lines displayed in the third stage include "chance," "big chance," and "super hot." Here, the line "Chance" suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is relatively low, and when a line frame containing the word "Chance" is displayed, the 1st SP Reach, 2nd SP Reach, It has the characteristic that it is difficult to develop into a highly reliable reach performance such as SPSP reach, and even if it does develop, it is easy to execute a loss notification performance. In addition, the line ``Big Chance'' suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is medium, and if the line containing the words ``Big Chance'' is displayed, the line containing the words ``Chance'' Compared to the case where a dialogue frame is displayed, it is easier to develop highly reliable reach effects such as 1st SP reach, 2nd SP reach, and SPSP reach, and it is also easier to execute a hit notification effect with any of these reach effects. It has the following characteristics. In addition, the line ``Super Hot'' suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is relatively high, and when a line frame containing the words ``Super Hot'' is displayed, the probability of hitting the jackpot is extremely high (for example, 90%). %), it has developed into highly reliable reach effects such as 1st SP reach, 2nd SP reach, and SPSP reach, and has the characteristic that it is easier to perform hit notification effects than when other lines are displayed. are doing.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 73, the variable effect has developed to the third pseudo sequence, and the line "Big chance!" is displayed, so it is possible to reach the 1st SP reach, the 2nd SP reach, or the SPSP reach. As a result, a win notification performance or a loss notification performance is executed.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment is configured such that the reliability of jackpots changes depending on the stage to which the common character line performance develops, and the reliability of jackpots is arranged in order from lowest to highest. In this case, the common character line performance ends with the first stage performance, the common character dialogue performance ends with the second stage performance, and the common character dialogue performance ends with the third stage performance. In addition, the jackpot reliability is configured to change depending on how many times the common character dialogue is performed during one variable display of the first special symbol, and the jackpot reliability is changed from low to high. When lined up, if the common character dialogue performance is executed only once during one fluctuating display of the first special symbol, the common character dialogue performance will be performed twice during one fluctuating display of the first special symbol. In this case, the order is the case where the common character dialogue performance is executed three times during one variable display of the first special symbol.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, when the performance is controlled in the first normal mode or the third normal mode, the common character dialogue performance may be executed, whereas the second normal mode A feature is that when the presentation is controlled in the mode or the fourth normal mode, the common character dialogue presentation is not executed.

In this way, since there are production modes in which the common character dialogue production is executed and production modes in which it is not executed, it is possible to change the production mode between the production mode in which the common character dialogue is executed and the production mode in which it is not executed. It is possible to bring about an effective change in performance because the dialogue performance is started to be executed or, conversely, the common character dialogue performance is no longer executed.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the performance symbols including character images and numbers are displayed in a variable manner as the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and as the first special symbol stops being displayed. The production symbols may be stopped and displayed in a manner that indicates the determination result of the first special symbol propriety determination. On the other hand, character images and numbers may be displayed individually, and these character images and numbers may be combined and displayed as a production pattern (for example, Figs. 70 (F) to (H), Fig. 71 ( (See E) to (F)). Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while guessing which production pattern will be displayed based on the displayed character image (or number), and if the character image and number remain combined, In comparison, it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the performance in which the performance symbols are displayed.

Further, the display of the numbers (or character images) is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the character images (or numbers) has started, and these character images and numbers are combined and displayed as a production pattern. . In this way, the character images and numbers that make up the production design are displayed in order to show how the production design is formed, so the production design does not change from the state where it is composed of character images and numbers. Compared to conventional gaming machines, it is possible to obtain extremely high performance effects.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the case where the production using similar character images is a common character dialogue production was explained as an example, but the production using similar character images is not limited to the common character dialogue production. For example, the production using similar character images is It may be an effect in which a character notifies the transition of the effect mode, or an icon change effect in which a character indicated by a similar character image changes the display mode of the icon.

[Processing executed by pachinko gaming machine 1 of Example 3]
In the pachinko game machine 1 of the third embodiment, the following processing is executed in order to realize the effects described based on FIGS. 62 to 73.

(Processing related to variable effects)
In the process of step S4503 (see FIG. 52), the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether the current performance mode is the first normal mode, the second normal mode, the third normal mode, or Specify which of the fourth normal modes it is in.

Although not shown in the figure, the ROM of the sub-control board 90 stores a variable performance pattern determination table and a preview performance pattern determination table. The variable performance pattern determination table is a table that is referred to when determining a variable performance pattern that is a performance pattern of a variable performance that includes a variable display of performance symbols. The preview performance pattern determination table in Embodiment 3 is a table that is referred to when determining a preview performance pattern that is a performance pattern for various preview performances that foretell the possibility of a jackpot prior to the hit notification performance (or loss notification performance). It is.

In the third embodiment, a variable performance pattern determination table and a preview performance pattern determination table are prepared for each performance mode, and the ROM of the sub-control board 90 contains at least the first normal mode/variable performance pattern determination table, and the first variable performance pattern determination table. 2. Variable effect pattern determination table for normal mode, 3rd variable effect pattern determination table for normal mode, 4th variable effect pattern determination table for normal mode, 1st notice effect pattern determination table for normal mode, 2nd normal mode. A preview performance pattern determination table for the mode, a preview performance pattern determination table for the third normal mode, and a preview performance pattern determination table for the fourth normal mode are stored.

In the process of step S4504 (see FIG. 52), the production control microcomputer 91 controls the variation corresponding to the production mode (normal production mode) specified in the process of step S4503 and the variation pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80. The performance pattern determination table and the preview performance pattern determination table are read from the ROM of the sub-control board 90 and set in the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

In the process of subsequent step S4505 (see FIG. 52), the performance control microcomputer 91 uses the random number for determining the variable performance obtained in the process of step S4501 (see FIG. 52), the determination result of the first special symbol validity determination, and the first special A variable performance pattern is set by reading out one variable performance pattern from a variable performance pattern determination table set in a RAM based on the fluctuation pattern of symbols. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, by executing this variable performance pattern setting process, the symbol structure of the performance symbol, the variation mode of the performance symbol, the presence or absence of a reach performance, the presence or absence of a pseudo-continuous performance, and the effects that make up the reach pattern. The type of symbol, the type and content of the reach effect, the content if a pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the presence or absence of a composite effect (see Figure 65), the type of effect pattern that is stopped and displayed, the type of background image, BGM, etc. It is determined.

In addition, in the process of step S4506 (see FIG. 52), the performance control microcomputer 91 uses the random number for determining the preview performance obtained in the process of step S4501 (see FIG. 52), the determination result of the first special symbol validity determination, the first A preview performance pattern is set by reading out one preview performance pattern from the preview performance pattern determination table set in the RAM based on the variation pattern of the special symbol and the fluctuation performance pattern set in the process of step S4505. By executing this preview performance pattern setting process, it is determined whether or not to perform various preview performances, and if so, what kind of performance pattern is used to execute the preview performance. In Embodiment 3, the preview effects include, for example, SU preview (see FIG. 66(C)), group preview (see FIG. 67(C)), cut-in (see FIG. 67(F)), and common character lines. An example is presentation (see FIG. 65).

[Other aspects]
Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, when the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is set to the high probability high base state, the high probability high base state is designed to continue until the next jackpot occurs. In addition to or in addition to such a jackpot type, if the gaming state after a jackpot game is set to a high probability high base state, a predetermined number of times in the high probability high base state If the jackpot does not occur until the variable display of the special symbol (50 or 100) ends, a jackpot type may be provided in which the gaming state changes to a high probability low base state. By providing such a jackpot type, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game becomes a high base state, and when the variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times in the high base state, depending on the jackpot type, the following The gaming state of the game has a case where it shifts to a low probability low base state, a case where it continues a high probability high base state, and a case where it shifts to a high probability low base state.

As a result, it is possible to diversify the change mode (transition mode) of the gaming state, improve the gameplay, and increase the interest in the game. In addition, by executing a common game performance in the high base state from the end of the jackpot game until the predetermined number of variable displays of special symbols is executed, the predetermined number of variable displays of special symbols can be performed. After this is executed, it may be difficult for the player to recognize which gaming state the game will transition to. This increases the player's interest in playing the game in a high base state and heightens the expectation of an advantageous state. Also, as a result, even if the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is not a high-probability low-base state but a high-base state, it will change to a high-probability low-base state after a predetermined number of fluctuations. It becomes possible to play the game with anticipation. This also makes it possible to maintain interest in the game for a long period of time.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the first special symbol display device (the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b) and the second special symbol display device (c1 and c2 of the fluctuation state display device 49) ) are all displayed and controlled by the main control unit. Instead of this mode, the display of the first special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 41a, second special symbol display device 41b) is controlled by the main control unit, and the display of the second special symbol display device (variable symbol display device 41b) is controlled by the main control unit. c1 and c2) of the status display 49 may be display-controlled by another control unit such as a sub-control unit. Thereby, even if a problem occurs in the display control of one control section, if the display control of the other control section is appropriate, it is possible to notify correct game information. Further, the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device are both provided in the same display section (main display device 40). As a result, the first special symbol display controlled by the main control section and the second special symbol display controlled by the sub control section are provided nearby, and the consistency of the display contents of both can be confirmed, and the display control It becomes possible to easily check whether there are any defects.

Similarly, in the first embodiment, both the first normal symbol display device (normal symbol display device 42) and the second normal symbol display device (c3 of the fluctuation state display device 49) are display-controlled by the main control unit. It was decided that Instead of this mode, the display of the first normal symbol display (normal symbol display 42) is controlled by the main control unit, and the second normal symbol display (c3 of the fluctuation state display 49) is controlled by the sub-controller. The display may be controlled by another control unit such as a control unit. This produces the same effect as the special symbol display device described above.

In addition to the second special symbol display and the second ordinary symbol display, a second first special symbol reservation display, a second second special symbol reservation display, and a second ordinary symbol (not shown) are also provided. A hold indicator may also be provided. At this time, the main control is performed on the first special figure holding display (first special figure holding display 43a, second special figure holding display 43b) and second general figure holding display (general figure holding display 42). The second special figure holding display (first special figure holding display, second special figure holding display) and second general figure holding display are controlled by another control unit such as the sub control unit. It may also be controlled by . In addition, these are the first special figure holding display (first special figure holding display 43a, second special figure holding display 43b), first general figure holding display (general figure holding display 42), It is possible to provide two special figure holding displays (a second first special figure holding display, a second second special figure holding display) and a second general figure holding display on the same main display 40. can. As a result, it is possible to improve the visibility of both, easily check the consistency of display contents, and easily check whether there are any defects in display control.

In addition, the first special symbol display device (the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b), the first normal symbol display device (the normal symbol display device 42), the first special symbol pending display device (first special symbol holding display 43a, second special symbol holding display 43b), first general drawing holding display (normal drawing holding display 42), second special symbol display (fluctuation state indicator 49) c1 and c2), the second normal symbol display (c3 of the fluctuation state display 49), the second special symbol reservation display (the second first special symbol reservation display, the second second special symbol A hold display) and a second general hold display may all be provided on the same main display 40. This improves the visibility of these display units and makes it possible to easily check whether there are any defects in the display control by the main control unit and the display control by the sub-control. Further, the main display 40 can be provided outside (outside) the gaming area 3. Further, it can be provided on the game board 2 outside (outside) the game area 3.

In addition, if there is a power outage (power outage process) for some reason during a game or while the gaming machine is in operation (while the power is on), when power is supplied again, the main control unit will display the first special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a and second special symbol display 41b), first ordinary symbol display (normal symbol display 42), first special symbol pending display (first special symbol display 41b) The figure pending display 43a, the second special figure pending display 43b), and the first general figure pending display (general figure pending display 42) execute display (display control) first (resume and return). , a second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the fluctuating state display 49), a second normal symbol display (c3 of the fluctuating state display 49), and a second special symbol whose display is controlled by the sub-control unit. The hold display (second first special figure hold display, second second special figure hold display), second general figure hold display later executes display (display control) (resume, return) .

However, the second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the fluctuating state display 49), the second normal symbol display (c3 of the fluctuating state display 49), and the second special symbol display controlled by the sub-control unit The figure holding display (the second first special figure holding display, the second second special figure holding display) and the second regular figure holding display are image display devices whose display is also controlled by the sub-control unit. (The first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and/or the third image display device 72) executes (resumes, returns) the display (display control) first. This is a simple display control in which the main display turns on/off/blinks a single LED, while the image display device (first image display device 7, second image display device 71, or/and This is because the three-image display device 72) is composed of a liquid crystal display section and has more complicated display control than the main display.

As a result, even if the display section shows special symbol validity judgment results and fluctuation states that are controlled by the same sub-control section, the first sub-display section can quickly return to display after the power is turned on again (after the power is restored). and a second sub-display section that returns to displaying the display after a delay. Then, it becomes possible to execute optimal game control depending on each role. The first sub-display section includes a second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the fluctuation state display 49) and a second normal symbol display (fluctuation state display 49) whose display is controlled by the sub-control section. c3), the second special figure holding display (second first special figure holding display, second second special figure holding display), and second general figure holding display correspond to the simple With display control, it is possible to easily understand the fluctuating state, etc., and it is also possible to quickly recover after the power is turned on again. Further, the second sub-display section corresponds to an image display device (first image display device 7, second image display device 71, or/and third image display device 72) whose display is also controlled by the sub-control section. However, with complex display control, it is possible to display various game information and game performances (reach performance, preview performance, story performance, etc.), and to improve interest through a variety of game performances.

In still another aspect, if the power is cut off (power cutoff processing) for some reason during a game or while the gaming machine is in operation (while the power is on), when power is supplied again, the sub-control unit The display is controlled by the second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the fluctuation state display 49), the second normal symbol display (c3 of the fluctuation state display 49), and the second special symbol pending display (c3 of the fluctuation state display 49). (1st special figure holding display of 2, 2nd special figure holding display of 2nd), 2nd general figure holding display executes display (display control) first (resume, return), and the main control unit The display is controlled by the first special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a and second special symbol display 41b), first normal symbol display (normal symbol display 42), and first special symbol. The holding display (first special drawing holding display 43a, second special drawing holding display 43b) and the first general drawing holding display (normal drawing holding display 42) execute (resuming) display (display control) later. , return), and the image display device (first image display device 7, second image display device 71, or/and third image display device 72) whose display is controlled by the sub-control unit further displays (display control ) may be executed (resume, return).

In the above-mentioned embodiment, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the performance symbol display section are used as special symbols (first special symbols described later) that are set as the main characters of the game in the game state, depending on the game state. The variable display is synchronized with the variable display of the second special symbol). That is, by displaying the 1 performance symbol (3 digits) on the performance symbol display section and synchronizing it with either the 1st special symbol or the 2nd special symbol according to the game state, it is synchronized with the 1st special symbol. and a case where it is synchronized with the second special symbol. Instead of such a mode, the first performance symbol and the second performance symbol are displayed, the fluctuating display of the first performance symbol is synchronized with the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, and the second performance symbol is synchronized with the fluctuating display of the first special symbol. The variable display may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of. In addition, when displaying both the first production symbol and the second production symbol, the production symbol corresponding to the special symbol (one special symbol) that is set as the main character of the game in the gaming state is displayed in a large size (the main character). ), and the effect pattern corresponding to the special pattern (the other special pattern) that is not the main character of the game may be displayed in a small size. Specifically, the display area is 1/5 or less. In addition, instead of displaying both the first production symbol and the second production symbol all the time, depending on the gaming state and the game situation, there are cases where both the first production symbol and the second production symbol are displayed, and a case where the first production symbol and the second production symbol are displayed. There may be a case where one of the effect pattern and the second effect pattern (the main pattern) is displayed.

Furthermore, in addition to the above-described configuration of the gaming machine, a "variable ball entrance" which can be changed between a state in which game balls can enter and a state in which game balls cannot enter and a state in which game balls cannot enter; The game apparatus may include a "special game execution means" capable of executing a special game in which the variable ball entry hole is set in a state where a ball can be entered if the result of the first or second judgment is a win. Further, the "second starting port" may be a variable starting port that can be changed between the first mode and the second mode in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than the first mode. In addition, there is a game state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency (first gaming state), and a game state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is higher than that in the game state. (second gaming state). Here, the "predetermined frequency" includes 0.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the number of openings of the first grand prize opening or the second grand prize opening in one round is one time, but the number of openings of the first grand prize opening or the second grand prize opening in one round is The game may be played multiple times, or may have rounds with different numbers of openings. In addition, in this embodiment, the control process allows the first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation to be changed simultaneously, but the control process allows the second special figure reservation to be given priority over the first special figure reservation. , a so-called special figure 2 priority control process, a control process in which the first special figure reservation is given priority to the second special figure reservation, and a so-called special figure 1 priority control process. In addition, priority is not set for extinguishing the first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation, and among the first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation, they are consumed in order from the oldest memorized one. The control process may be a so-called control process for digesting pitches in order of arrival (order of memory).

In addition, it is a type of pachinko game machine that does not have a probability setting means (no high probability state), and has a specific area inside, and a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball can enter. It is equipped with a grand prize opening that can change between a state in which the ball cannot enter and a state in which the ball cannot be entered. The game ball is also applied to a pachinko game machine in which a game ball enters a jackpot in a ball-enabled state and passes through a specific area, resulting in a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed, and a predetermined privilege is given. This pachinko game machine is called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine, and when the result of the judgment based on the ball entering the starting hole is a jackpot, the jackpot game is executed without passing through a specific area. Further, as a benefit, a high base state can be generated that increases the frequency of game balls entering the starting hole. Further, it is possible to have a first starting port and a second starting port, and to generate a high base state that increases the frequency of balls entering the second starting port. The present invention can be applied to all types of gaming machines.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the jackpot probability can be set to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) by deactivating or activating the probability fluctuation function, but the type (number) of the jackpot probability is not limited to this, for example, it is possible to set three or more types of probabilities, such as a medium probability (third probability) that is higher than a low probability (first probability) and lower than a high probability (second probability). Good too. Furthermore, the first low probability and the first high probability (first probability condition), the second low probability and the second high probability (second probability condition), the third low probability and the third high probability (third probability condition), etc. , multiple types of probability conditions that define the relationship between low and high probabilities are provided, and any one of the multiple types of probability conditions can be arbitrarily set (selected), for example, when the gaming machine is powered on. Good too.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, regarding the advance judgment based on the starting pitch, the latest obtained random number value (obtained information) stored in the special figure reservation storage unit is read out, and the read obtained random number value (obtained information) is determined. (Prior judgment) (“Processing at the time of starting ball entry (S205)”; see FIGS. 11, 13, etc.), but the method of preliminary judgment is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special figure reservation storage section, an area (obtained information storage means) that stores the obtained information that is subject to preliminary judgment (that is, the obtained information obtained based on the starting ball) may be stored in the main control section or the sub-control section. It may also be provided in the RAM of the unit to judge (preliminary judgment) the obtained information stored in the storage area (preliminary judgment storage part). In this case, by storing the results of the preliminary determination in the RAM of the main control unit or the sub-control unit, it is also possible to erase the acquired information used for the preliminary determination (acquired information stored in a separate storage area). Alternatively, instead of making a preliminary determination on the acquired information stored in the special figure reservation storage unit, the preliminary determination may be made on the acquired information acquired based on the starting ball. That is, you may make it pre-determine before storing acquired information in a special figure reservation storage part. In this case, there is no need to provide an area separate from the special figure reservation storage section to store acquired information that is subject to advance determination, and there is no need to read out the acquired information stored in the special figure reservation storage section for advance determination. do not have.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, one image display device 7 (board side display means) is provided as the main liquid crystal (main display device) on the game board side (inside the game area), and one image display device 7 (board side display means) is provided on the game machine frame side (outside the game area). ) is provided with two image display devices 71 and 72 (frame side display means) as sub-liquid crystals (sub-display devices), but the sub-liquid crystals (sub-display devices) may be provided on the side of the game board 2. In this case, instead of the two sub-liquid crystals (second image display device 71, third image display device 72) shown in the previous embodiment, two sub-liquid crystals are used as the display means on the panel side. device 7), or provide one sub-liquid crystal on the game board side instead of one of the second image display device 71 and third image display device 72 (left sub-liquid crystal or right sub-liquid crystal). I can do it. Alternatively, while providing the two sub-liquid crystals (second image display device 71, third image display device 72) shown in the above embodiment, it is also possible to further provide one or more sub-liquid crystals on the game board side. be. This also allows a variety of impactful effects to be displayed using a plurality of image display devices.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a display device (the first image display device 7) provided on the game board side (inside the gaming area) and a display device (second image display device 7) provided on the gaming machine frame side (outside the gaming area) Although the display device 71 and the third image display device 72) are all image display devices consisting of liquid crystal display devices (liquid crystal display devices), the type of display device is not limited to liquid crystals, and for example, a drum display device or a drum display device. It is also possible to use a dot display, a 7-segment display, etc. Furthermore, different types of display devices may be mixed among the plurality of display devices including the main display device and the sub display device. Specifically, for example, among the first to third image display devices shown in the above embodiments, the first image display device 7 is a drum display device or a 7-segment display device, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device The image display device 72 may be a liquid crystal display as in the embodiment. Alternatively, the first image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display as in the embodiment, and one or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may be a dot display. This makes it possible to display a variety of effects using a plurality of display devices with different display methods, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

[others]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (examples) disclosed in this specification will be disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference invention 1)
A conventional gaming machine is equipped with a first starting hole, a second starting hole, a first big winning hole, and a second big winning hole, and when a game ball enters the first starting hole, the first symbol is displayed variably, and There was one that displayed a second symbol in a variable manner when a game ball entered the second starting hole. Then, when the first symbol or the second symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, either only the first grand prize opening or the second grand prize opening is opened, or the first grand prize opening and the second grand prize opening are opened. There was a gaming machine that executed a jackpot game in which the winning openings were opened in a predetermined order (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-055811).

In addition, in conventional gaming machines, the second starting port is a variable starting port, which lowers the frequency of ball entry in a low base state and increases the frequency of ball entry in a high base state. There was a game in which players aimed at the first starting hole, and in a high base state, they aimed at the second starting hole. In addition, there have been gaming machines that perform so-called right-handed games in which players aim at the right side of the gaming area when playing a jackpot game or in a high base state. In such a gaming machine, in a low base state, a left-handed game is played, and once an advantageous state is reached, a right-handed game is played until the advantageous state ends, which adds sharpness to the game in an advantageous state. Met. However, in conventional gaming machines, the mode of transition between gaming states is uniform, and it has not been possible to provide a highly interesting gaming experience.

This Reference Invention 1 has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and unlike conventional gaming machines, it provides highly interesting gaming states, diversifies the transition modes of gaming states, and increases gaming interest. The company provides gaming machines.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a second starting port that can change between a first state and a second state in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than the first state;
A third starting port into which game balls can enter,
first validity determination execution means for executing a first validity determination based on the ball entering the first starting port or the second starting port;
a second validity determination execution means for executing a second validity determination based on the ball entering the third starting port;
A first gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second gaming state in which the frequency of entering the gaming ball into the second starting port is higher than in the first gaming state. , a game state setting means that can set the
A gaming machine comprising: special game execution means capable of executing a special game when the result of the first validity determination or the second validity determination becomes a jackpot (first specified result); the mouth is provided in the first gaming area;
The second starting port and the third starting port are provided in a second game area,
A first game (low probability low base state) in which a game ball is fired into the first game area in the first game state and the first judgment is mainly performed; and a second game in the second game state. A second game (low probability/high base state) in which a game ball is fired into the area and the first judgment is the main one; 2. A third game (high accuracy/low base state) in which the game is mainly executed based on judgment of validity.

According to such a gaming machine, the first starting port for executing the first validity determination is arranged in the first game area, and the first validity determination is executed in the second game area (the first state and the second state are different from each other). A variable-type second starting port (which changes to a variable value) and a third starting port that executes the second propriety judgment are arranged. In addition, as a game state, there is a first game state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port is low (predetermined frequency), and a first gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port is higher than in the first gaming state. and a high second gaming state. Then, in the first game state, a first game in which the gun is fired aiming at the first starting port in the first gaming area and the first judgment is mainly executed, and in the second gaming state, the second starting port in the second gaming area is executed. A first game in which the game is fired aiming at the target and the first validity determination is executed as the main character, and a second game in which the game is fired aiming at the third starting port in the second game area in the first game state and the second validity determination is mainly executed. 1 game.

As a result, players can play the first game, second game, and third game with different game modes depending on the transition of the game state, and can increase their enjoyment of the game through various game state transition modes and new playability. It becomes possible. In addition, in the first game state, the frequency of ball entry into the first game area and entry into the first starting port is higher than the entry frequency at which the ball is released into the second gaming area and enters the second starting port. may be higher.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1,
As a result of the first validity determination in the first game in which a game ball is fired into the first game area, a first jackpot and a second jackpot are obtained;
having a first jackpot and a second jackpot as a result of the first judgment in the second game in which a game ball is fired into the second game area;
As a result of the second validity determination in the third game in which a game ball is fired into the second game area, a third jackpot and a fourth jackpot are obtained;
In the first game, when the result of the first validity determination is the first jackpot, the second game can be executed, and when the result of the first validity determination is the second jackpot, the third game can be executed. year,
In the second game, when the result of the first judgment is the first jackpot, the second game can be executed, and when the result of the first judgment is the second jackpot, the third game can be executed. year,
In the third game, when the result of the second judgment is the third jackpot, the second game can be executed, and when the result of the second judgment is the fourth jackpot, the third game can be executed. It is characterized by the following.

According to such a gaming machine, the result of the first validity determination in the first game in which the game ball is fired into the first game area, and the first validity determination in the second game in which the game ball is fired in the second game area. As a result, there is a first jackpot and a second jackpot, and as a result of the second win/fail determination in the third game in which the game ball is fired into the second game area, there is a third jackpot and a fourth jackpot. Then, in the first game after the start of the game, when the result of the first validity determination becomes the first jackpot, the second game becomes executable, and when the second jackpot occurs, the third game becomes executable. In addition, in the case of the second game, when the result of the first judgment in the second game becomes the first jackpot, the second game can be executed, and when the second jackpot occurs, the third game can be executed. In addition, in the case of the third game, when the result of the second judgment in the third game becomes the third jackpot, the second game becomes executable, and when the fourth jackpot occurs, the third game becomes executable.

Thereby, even if the first game after the start of the game results in either the first jackpot or the second jackpot, the subsequent game is played by firing the game ball into the second game area. In addition, even if the second game is played while playing the game of firing to the second game area, or the third game is played, the game in which the first judgment is made (second game) and the third game are performed. 2. It is possible to play a game while changing the game mode (game state) between the game (third game) in which a win/fail judgment is performed. Furthermore, this makes it possible to increase the interest in the game through various transition modes of game states and novel gameplay.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2,
In the second game, the second game state becomes the first game state and the game shifts to the first game based on the first validity determination being executed a specific number of times. .

According to such a gaming machine, when the first validity judgment is executed a specific number of times in the second game, the second game state becomes the first game state, and the game shifts to the first game. As a result, the second game is shifted to the first game by executing the validity determination a specific number of times. In addition, in a game in which the same first validity determination is executed, the firing game to the second game area is shifted to the firing game to the first game area. Furthermore, this makes it possible to increase the interest in the game through various transition modes of game states and novel gameplay.

Incidentally, the third game may be continued even if the second judgment of validity has been executed a specific number of times. Further, the third game may be continued until the result of the second win/fail determination becomes a jackpot.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-3,
A small win (second specific result) is obtained as a result of the second validity determination, and when the small win occurs, a predetermined amount of gaming profit can be obtained,
The second validity determination has a higher possibility of the small hit than the first validity determination,
In the second game, the first validity determination is executed more frequently than in the first game, so that the rate of decrease of game media used in the game is slower than in the first game,
The third game is characterized in that the speed at which the game media decreases is slower than that in the second game because it is possible to obtain gaming profits through the small winnings.

According to such a gaming machine, there is a small win that allows a predetermined amount of gaming profit to be obtained as a result of the second judgment, and the second judgment has a higher probability of winning a small prize than the first judgment. It is considered a hit. That is, the third game has a higher probability of winning small than the first game and the second game. Further, in the second game in the second gaming state, the first validity determination is executed more frequently than in the first game in the first gaming state. In the second game, the rate of decrease in game media used in the game is slower than in the first game, and in the third game, the rate of decrease in game media used in the game is slower than in the second game. As a result, the third game is more advantageous than the second game, and the second game is more advantageous than the first game. Furthermore, this makes it possible to diversify the transition modes between various gaming states with different degrees of advantage, and to increase the interest in the game through new gameplay. Note that the second validity determination may have a small hit, but the first validity determination may not have a small hit.

Furthermore, a fourth game (high-accuracy, high-base state) may be provided in which a game ball is fired into the second game area in the second game state and the first judgment is mainly performed. Further, the fourth game may be continued until the next jackpot occurs. In addition, in the fourth game, the first win/fail judgment is executed more frequently than in the first game, so that the speed of decrease of the game media is slower than in the first game, and in the third game, the game medium is reduced by a small hit. By making it possible to earn profits, the rate of decrease in game media may be slower than in the second game and the fourth game. Furthermore, since both the second game and the fourth game are in the second game state, the speed of decrease of the game media may be approximately the same.

In addition, in the first game, when the result of the first judgment is the first jackpot (corresponding to the 4R fourth jackpot of Example 1), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first judgment is the second jackpot (corresponding to the 4R fourth jackpot of Example 1). If the result of the first validity determination becomes the fifth jackpot (corresponding to the 4R third jackpot of Example 1), the third game can be executed. Enables execution of the fourth game,
In the second game, when the result of the first validity determination becomes the first jackpot (corresponding to the 4R fourth jackpot of Example 1), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first validity determination becomes the second jackpot (corresponding to the 4R fourth jackpot of Example 1). If the result of the first correctness determination becomes the fifth jackpot (corresponding to the 4R third jackpot of Example 1), the third game becomes executable. make the game executable,
In the third game, when the result of the second validity determination becomes the third jackpot (corresponding to the 2R seventh jackpot of Example 1), the second game can be executed, and the result of the second validity determination becomes the fourth jackpot (corresponding to the 2R seventh jackpot of Example 1). If the result of the second judgment is a sixth jackpot (corresponding to the 2R sixth jackpot of Example 1), the third game can be executed. ,
In the fourth game, when the result of the first validity determination becomes the first jackpot (corresponding to the 4R fourth jackpot of Example 1), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first validity determination becomes the second jackpot (corresponding to the 4R fourth jackpot of Example 1). If the result of the first correctness determination becomes the fifth jackpot (corresponding to the 4R third jackpot of Example 1), the third game becomes executable. It is also possible to make the game executable.

Furthermore, the "reduction rate of game media used in games" refers to the rate of decrease of game media used in a unit time (e.g., 1 minute) or the number of shots fired (e.g., 100 shots) over the same period. The number obtained by subtracting the game media (paid-out prize balls) is calculated as the decreased number of game media (game balls). In the first game, the second game, the third game, and the fourth game, when playing for a predetermined period of time, the rate of decrease in the game media (game balls, balls held) held by the player is determined in descending order of decreasing rate. , the first game>second game (fourth game)>third game. In addition, in the third game, it is possible to increase the number of balls held by small wins as the game continues, so it can be said that the decreasing speed is negative. In other words, the first game, the second game, and the fourth game are played while decreasing the number of balls held, while the third game is played while increasing the number of balls held.

In addition, the jackpot type (first jackpot type) when the result of the first judgment is a jackpot is different from the jackpot type (second jackpot type) when the result of the second judgment is a jackpot. It may be many. In addition, as a third game (high accuracy low base state) that occurs as a result of the second judgment, there is a case where the third game is reached after a jackpot game in which it is difficult to obtain the prize ball, and a case where the third game is reached after a jackpot game in which it is difficult to obtain the prize ball. A case where the game becomes a third game after passing through an easy jackpot game. In addition, there is no case where the third game (high accuracy/low base state) that occurs as a result of the first judgment is a third game that goes through a jackpot game in which it is difficult to obtain the prize ball. It may be provided only when a third game is reached after a jackpot game that is easy to obtain.

Further, the probability of occurrence of a small hit in the second judgment is set to be higher than the probability of a jackpot in the high probability, so that the probability of occurrence of a small win in the second judgment is increased. More preferably, the probability of occurrence of a small hit in the second validity determination is 1/2 or more. Furthermore, the probability of entry into a high probability state (probability of operation of the probability variation function) is the same between the first validity determination and the second validity determination. On the other hand, the probability of entering state C (high certainty low base state) may be different between the first validity judgment and the second validity judgment, and the probability of entering state C (high certainty low base state) of the second validity judgment may be different. The entry probability may be higher than that of the first validity determination. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the game of launching into the second game area where the third game in which the second validity determination is performed can be executed, and it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the case of a jackpot that does not enter state C (high probability low base state) in the second judgment, the jackpot is the number of prize balls that can be obtained among the jackpots (jackpot game) in the second judgment. is the least jackpot (jackpot game). Further, the jackpot is the jackpot (jackpot game) with the smallest number of prize balls that can be obtained among the jackpots (jackpot game) in the first and second judgments.

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that increases gaming interest by diversifying the transition modes of gaming states.

(Reference invention 2)
In some conventional gaming machines, a win/fail determination is made based on the entry of a game ball into a starting hole, and symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the result of the win/fail determination. In such gaming machines, if the result of the judgment is a jackpot, the symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, and if the result of the judgment is a loss, the symbol is stopped and displayed as a missing symbol. . Furthermore, there was a gaming machine that had a plurality of symbols, including special symbols and performance symbols (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-370).

In addition, the special symbols and performance symbols of conventional gaming machines are both displayed in a variable manner and in a static manner based on the result of the determination of validity. In addition, the special symbols are displayed in a stopped state without performing a game effect such as a reach variation after being displayed in a variable manner to indicate the result of a win/fail judgment, and the performance symbols are displayed in a stopped state after a variable display is performed and then a game effect such as a reach variation is performed. This indicates the result of the judgment. By having a plurality of symbols in this way, it was possible to control the display according to the purpose of each symbol.

However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, it is not easy to check the consistency of both symbols due to the display mode and display position of the plurality of symbols. The present invention 2 has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a fair gaming machine by making it easy to confirm a plurality of symbols by displaying the plurality of symbols.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is
Appropriateness determination execution means that executes validity determination based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
a first identification information display unit (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) that variably displays first identification information (special symbol) based on the result of the validity determination;
a second identification information display section (effect pattern display section 7b) that variably displays second identification information (effect pattern) based on the result of the validity determination;
a third identification information display section (fluctuation state display 49) that variably displays third identification information (state symbol, confirmation symbol) based on the result of the validity determination;
a game performance display section (performance symbol display section 7b, first display screen 7a) capable of displaying a game performance (reach performance, etc.) executed in accordance with the variable display of the second identification information;
A gaming machine comprising a special game execution means capable of executing a special game when the result of the validity determination is a specific result,
a first display section (main display 40) having the first identification information display section and the third identification information display section;
The present invention is characterized by comprising a second display section (image display device 7, display screen 7a) having the second identification information display section and the game effect display section.

According to such a gaming machine, the first identification information display section variably displays the first identification information (special symbol, first special symbol, second special symbol), and the first identification information display section variably displays the second identification information (production symbol). A second identification information display section that displays the third identification information (status symbol, confirmation symbol) in a variable manner, and a game performance that is executed in accordance with the variable display of the second identification information can be displayed. It has a game effect display section. Further, a first display section configured to include a first identification information display section and the third identification information display section, and a second display section configured to include a second identification information display section and a game effect display section. It has a section and a.

As a result, by checking the second display section, it is possible to check the second identification information indicating the result of the judgment of validity and the game effect, and by checking the first display section, it is possible to check the result of the judgment of judgment based on the result of the judgment. The first identification information and the third identification information that are variably displayed can be confirmed.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1,
A gaming machine having a gaming area in which a gaming ball can flow down, and playing a game by letting the gaming ball flow down into the gaming area,
The first display section is provided inside the game area, and the second display section is provided outside the game area.

According to such a gaming machine, the first display section including the first identification information display section and the third identification information display section is arranged outside (outside) the gaming area, and the second identification information display section is arranged outside the gaming area. A second display section including an information display section and a game effect display section is arranged inside (inside) the game area. As a result, by providing a second display section within the gaming area that displays game effects such as reach effects and the second identification information indicating the result of the win/fail judgment, you can check the falling of the game ball while checking the second display section. It is possible to check the display mode. In addition, by placing the first display section, which allows confirmation of the first identification information and the third identification information, separately from the second display section and outside the gaming area, the first display section, which allows confirmation of the first identification information and the third identification information, can be placed outside the gaming area. It becomes possible to reliably grasp the display mode of the identification information and the third identification information.

The first display section is placed outside the gaming area (an area outside the rail members that partition the gaming area), and the second display section is placed inside the gaming area (an area inside the rail members that partition the gaming area). It may also be placed in

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2,
The first display section is composed of an LED, the second display section is composed of a liquid crystal,
The second display section is characterized in that it is larger than the first display section.

According to such a gaming machine, the first display section is configured with an LED, the second display section is configured with a liquid crystal, and the second display section is larger than the first display section. As a result, it is possible to keep the display mode of the first display section simple so that the display mode of the first identification information and the third identification information can be grasped reliably, and the second display section is made larger than the first display section. By configuring the display with a liquid crystal, it is possible to execute various and diverse game performances and increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3,
a main control unit having the validity determination execution means;
a sub-control unit that receives a control signal from the main control unit and performs control;
The display of the first identification information display section constituting the first display section is controlled by a main control section, and the display of the third identification information display section and the second display section constituting the first display section is controlled by a sub-control section. It is characterized by display control.

Such a gaming machine includes a main control section and a sub-control section that receives control signals from the main control section and performs control. The display of the first identification information display section of the first display section is controlled by the main control section, and the display of the third identification information display section is controlled by the sub control section. Further, the display of the second display unit that displays the game effects and the second identification information is controlled by the sub-control unit. That is, the first display section displays first identification information whose display is controlled by the main control section and third identification information whose display is controlled by the sub-control section. Thereby, by checking the first display section, it is possible to check the display mode of the identification information (first identification information and third identification information) controlled by the main control section and the sub-control section. Moreover, this makes it possible to easily confirm the consistency of the identification information controlled by the main control unit and the sub-control unit.

The main control unit is a control unit that executes display control of special symbols, control related to correctness judgment, control related to sensor detection, control related to ejection of prize balls, and control related to opening and closing of the variable ball entrance, and is a control unit that controls games. It is. In addition, the sub-control unit is a control unit that receives control signals from the main control unit and performs predetermined control, and is the main control unit that performs control related to game effects such as operation control of movable members and display control of the effect display unit. This is a control section subordinate to the control section.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4,
a game information storage means capable of storing predetermined game information;
A power supply means (power supply board 109) that supplies power;
a memory storage means capable of storing and retaining game information stored in the game information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after power supply is stopped, based on detecting a drop in power supply voltage;
comprising a game information recovery means for restoring the game information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected, based on the game information stored and held by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power;
When the game information recovery means restores the game information, the third identification information display section recovers faster than the second display section, making it possible to execute display control.

According to such a gaming machine, a gaming information recovery means is provided for restoring the gaming information when a drop in the power supply voltage is detected, based on the gaming information stored and held by the memory holding means when power supply is started. . When restoring the game information, the third identification information display section included in the first display section recovers faster than the second display section, making it possible to execute display control. The second display section is made up of a liquid crystal display in order to diversify game presentations, and because it performs a variety of display controls, it takes a certain amount of time to restore game information. On the other hand, since the first display section (third identification information display section), which is simply configured with LEDs, performs simple display control, it does not take a long time to restore the game information.

As a result, even if the display sections are controlled by the same sub-control section, the third identification information display section is restored before the second display section, and display control can be executed as soon as possible. In addition, although this makes it possible to start the game as soon as the main control unit returns after power supply starts, the second display unit, which is made up of liquid crystal, takes time to recover (it still does not recover after starting the game). (not). Even in such a situation, by checking the third identification information display section, which became popular early on and made it possible to start display control, it is possible to check the display content to be controlled by the sub-control section.

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2, the display mode of the plurality of symbols makes it easy to confirm the plurality of symbols, and it is possible to provide a fair gaming machine.

(Reference invention 3)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 is
an input means that allows input by a player;
a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
and a performance control means for controlling a performance based on the determination result of the determination means,
The performance control means is
A first setting regarding the performance can be changed in response to a first input to the input means, and a second setting regarding the performance can be changed in response to a second input to the input means,
Execute a selection promotion effect that prompts the player to select whether or not to return the effect settings to the initial settings,
If an input to the input means for making a selection to return the effect settings to the initial settings is made during the selection promotion effect, the second setting is returned to the initial setting, while the first setting is set to the initial setting. It is characterized by the fact that it does not return to

According to this configuration, when an input for making a selection to return the performance settings to the initial settings is made during the selection promotion performance, the second setting returns to the initial setting, while the first setting returns to the initial setting. will not be returned. Therefore, it is possible to improve convenience for players who wish to return the second setting to the initial setting without returning the first setting to the initial setting.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1,
The performance control means is
During the selection promoting effect, even if the first input to the input means is performed, the first setting regarding the effect is not changed.

According to this configuration, the first setting is not changed even if the first input is performed during the selection promotion performance. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the problem that the first setting is changed in accordance with the first input during the selection promotion performance, and as a result, the selection promotion performance is hindered. be.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2,
The performance control means is
When an input to the input means for making a selection to return the effect settings to the initial settings is made during the selection promotion effect, the selection promotion effect in progress is terminated, and after the selection promotion effect is finished, the input is performed. The present invention is characterized in that the first setting regarding the presentation can be changed in accordance with the first input to the means.

By the way, if the change of the first setting according to the first input to the input means is restricted even after the selection promotion effect ends, the period during which the change of the first setting is restricted becomes longer than necessary. This may actually reduce convenience. On the other hand, according to the above configuration, if an input for selecting to return the performance settings to the initial settings is made during the selection promotion performance, the selection promotion performance ends, and after the selection promotion performance ends, Since the first setting is changed in accordance with the first input to the input means, it is possible to effectively suppress the above-mentioned problems from occurring.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of any of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-3,
The performance control means is
If a first period of time has elapsed without the non-performance progress state ending after transitioning to a non-performance progress state in which the performance based on the determination result of the determination means does not proceed, the selection promotion performance is started;
If a second time period that is longer than the first time period passes without the non-gaming state ending after transitioning to the non-performance progress state, the first setting regarding the performance is returned to the initial setting. It is something.

According to this configuration, if the second time period elapses after the transition to the non-performance progress state without ending the non-performance progress state, the first setting returns to the initial setting. Therefore, by setting the second time to an appropriate time, for example, when one player stops playing and another player starts playing, the first setting can be returned to the initial setting. It is possible to leave In addition, since the selection promotion effect starts when the first time elapses after the transition to the non-performance progress state without ending the non-performance progress state, for example, if one player stops playing and another player When starting a game, the latter player can be notified that the second setting related to the performance has been changed from the initial setting, and the latter can be notified whether or not to return the second setting to the initial setting. players can arbitrarily select.

(Reference invention 4)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is
an input means that allows input by a player;
a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
and a performance control means for controlling a performance based on the determination result of the determination means,
The performance control means is
A first setting regarding the performance can be changed in response to a first input to the input means, and a second setting regarding the performance can be changed in response to a second input to the input means,
If the second setting has been changed from the initial setting, executing a selection promotion effect that prompts the player to select whether or not to return the second setting to the initial setting;
If the first input to the input means is performed while the selection promotion effect is not being executed, the first setting is permitted to be changed in accordance with the first input, while the selection promotion effect is performed. The present invention is characterized in that changes to the first setting are restricted while the performance is being performed.

According to this configuration, when the selection promotion performance is not performed, the first setting is changed according to the first input, while during the selection promotion performance, even if the first input is performed. The first setting is not changed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the problem that the first setting is changed in accordance with the first input during the selection promotion performance, and as a result, the selection promotion performance is hindered. be.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1,
The performance control means is
After the input to the input means for selecting to return the second setting to the initial setting is performed during execution of the selection promotion effect, the first input according to the first input to the input means is performed. This feature is characterized by allowing changes to the settings.

According to this configuration, after an input for selecting to return the second setting to the initial setting is made during the selection promotion effect, the first setting is allowed to be changed in accordance with the first input. . For this reason, while suppressing the change of the first setting according to the first input from interfering with the selection promotion effect, it is convenient because the period during which the change of the first setting is restricted becomes longer than necessary. It is possible to prevent problems such as a decline in performance.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 or 4-2,
The performance control means is
If a first period of time has elapsed without the non-performance progress state ending after transitioning to a non-performance progress state in which the performance based on the determination result of the determination means does not proceed, the selection promotion performance is started;
The first setting is returned to the initial setting when a second time period that is longer than the first time elapses without the non-performance progress state ending after transitioning to the non-performance progress state. It is.

According to this configuration, if the second time period elapses after the transition to the non-performance progress state without ending the non-performance progress state, the first setting returns to the initial setting. Therefore, by setting the second time to an appropriate time, for example, when one player stops playing and another player starts playing, the first setting can be returned to the initial setting. It is possible to leave In addition, since the selection promotion effect starts when the first time elapses after the transition to the non-performance progress state without ending the non-performance progress state, for example, if one player stops playing and another player When starting a game, the latter player can be notified that the second setting related to the performance has been changed from the initial setting, and the latter can be notified whether or not to return the second setting to the initial setting. players can arbitrarily select.

(Reference invention 5)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 is
an input means that allows input by a player;
a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
and a performance control means for controlling a performance based on the determination result of the determination means,
The performance control means is
A plurality of settings related to the production can be changed according to input to the input means,
The present invention is characterized in that when the plurality of settings are different from the initial settings, the contents of the plurality of settings can be displayed in order in a predetermined first display area.

According to this configuration, when a plurality of settings related to production are set differently from the initial settings, the contents of the plurality of settings are sequentially displayed in the first display area. Therefore, compared to displaying the contents of multiple settings side by side, the display area for displaying the contents of multiple settings can be reduced, and while notifying the contents of multiple settings to the player, It is possible to secure a wide display area for displaying images and the like.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1,
The performance control means is
The present invention is characterized in that the number of the plurality of settings that are different from the initial settings can be displayed in a second display area adjacent to the first display area.

According to this configuration, the number of multiple settings that have settings different from the initial settings is displayed in the second display area (close to the first display area), so the contents of multiple settings are not displayed at the same time. Due to this, it is possible to effectively suppress the problem that it becomes difficult for the player to recognize how many settings are different from the initial settings.

(Reference invention 6)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 is
a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
When the determination is made, a symbol display control means causes a predetermined symbol display means to variably display a special symbol, and then stops and displays a special symbol indicating the result of the determination;
and a performance control means for controlling execution of the performance based on the determination result of the determination means,
The performance control means is
In a predetermined image display means, displaying a performance symbol in a variable manner as the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and haltingly displaying a performance symbol in a manner that indicates the result of the determination as the special symbol is stopped and displayed;
During the fluctuating display of the special symbol, the performance symbol is composed of identification information that allows the performance symbol to be distinguished from other performance symbols, and a decorative image added to the identification information. a first display control to display;
During the variable display of the special symbol, a similar image that is not added to the identification information and that has the same display content as the decorative image is displayed in a predetermined display area of the image display means, and the similar image is used. The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to execute a second display control that performs a presentation based on the desired effect.

According to this configuration, during the variable display of the special symbol, a similar image that is not added to the identification information and has the same display content as the decorative image is displayed in a predetermined display area, and a performance using the similar image is displayed. may be carried out. In this way, since the similar images used for the production and the display contents of the decorative images that make up the production pattern are the same, the production using the similar images can be performed as if it were a production using the production pattern. The synergistic effect of the performance using similar images and the performance displaying the performance symbols can effectively improve the interest of the performance.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1,
The performance control means is
As the first display control, the effect pattern is displayed in a variable manner in a first variable manner;
As the second display control, after displaying the similar image in a variable manner in a second variation mode that is common to the first variation mode, an effect is performed using the similar image displayed in the predetermined display area. It is characterized by this.

According to this configuration, the similar images are displayed in a fluctuating manner in the same manner as the performance symbols, so that the performance using the similar images makes the player feel as if the performance using the performance symbols is being performed. It is possible to improve the effect and further improve the interest.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 or Reference Invention 6-2,
The performance control means is
After the similar image used for the effect in the second display control is erased from the predetermined display area, the effect pattern composed of a decorative image whose display content is different from that of the similar image is erased from the predetermined display area. The present invention is characterized in that it is further possible to execute a third display control for displaying in the display area.

According to this configuration, after the similar image is erased from the predetermined display area, a performance pattern including a decorative image whose display content is different from that of the similar image is displayed in the predetermined display area. This effectively prevents the problem that, after a certain effect pattern is displayed in a predetermined display area, the player misunderstands that the same effect pattern has been displayed again in the predetermined display area. It is possible to suppress it.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-4 is the gaming machine of any of Reference Inventions 6-1 to 6-3,
The performance control means is
When the second display control is executed, after the similar image displayed by the second display control is erased from the image display means, a performance pattern that can be visually recognized by the player is displayed on the image display means. It is characterized by:

According to this configuration, after the similar image is erased from the image display means, the effect design is displayed on the image display means in a visible manner. For this reason, it is possible to effectively suppress the problem in which the player misunderstands that multiple identical performance symbols are displayed at the same time, even though multiple identical performance symbols are not displayed at the same time. It is.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-5 is the gaming machine of any of Reference Inventions 6-1 to 6-4,
The performance control means is
The performance can be performed in any one of a plurality of performance modes including a first performance mode and a second performance mode,
While the second display control can be performed while the performance is being performed in the second performance mode, the second display control is not executed while the performance is being performed in the first performance mode. It is characterized by:

According to this configuration, while the performance is being performed in the second performance mode, the second display control that is not performed during the performance in the first performance mode is executed, so compared to the first performance mode, the second display control is executed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a more interesting performance.

(Reference invention 7)
Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 is
a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
When the determination is made, a symbol display control means causes a predetermined symbol display means to variably display a special symbol, and then stops and displays a special symbol indicating the result of the determination;
and a performance control means for controlling execution of the performance based on the determination result of the determination means,
The performance control means is
In a predetermined image display means, a production pattern composed of a first partial image and a second partial image is displayed variably in accordance with the variable display of the special pattern, and the judgment is performed in accordance with the stopped display of the special pattern. a first display control that stops displaying the production design in a manner that indicates the result;
The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to perform a second display control in which the first partial image and the second partial image are individually displayed, and these partial images are combined and displayed as the effect pattern.

According to this configuration, in addition to the case where the effect pattern including the first partial image and the second partial image is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped, the first partial image and the second partial image are individually displayed. These partial images may be combined and displayed as a performance pattern. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while guessing which production symbol will be displayed based on the displayed partial image, and if the first partial image and the second partial image remain combined. Compared to the above, it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the performance in which the performance symbols are displayed.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1,
The performance control means is
Start displaying the second partial image after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of displaying the first partial image, and execute the second display control for composing and displaying these partial images as the effect pattern. It is characterized by being possible.

According to this configuration, the first partial image is displayed, and when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of display of the first partial image, the display of the second partial image is started in addition to the first partial image, and after that, these partial images are The images are combined and displayed as a performance pattern. In this way, the partial images constituting the performance pattern are displayed in order to show how the performance pattern is formed, so the performance pattern changes from the state where the performance pattern is composed of the first partial image and the second partial image. Compared to conventional gaming machines that do not change, it is possible to obtain extremely high performance effects.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 or Reference Invention 7-2,
The second partial image is identification information that identifies the production pattern from other production patterns,
The first partial image is a decorative image that decorates the second partial image.

According to this configuration, the identification information as the second partial image and the decorative image as the first partial image are individually displayed, and these partial images are combined and displayed as a performance pattern. In this way, the identification information and the decorative image, which were previously displayed separately as two partial images, are combined to form a production pattern, so compared to conventional gaming machines that simply display the production pattern in a variable manner and then stop and display it. Therefore, it is possible to obtain extremely high performance effects.

Note that any two or more inventions of Reference Inventions 1 to 7 described above may be combined.

1 Pachinko gaming machine, 7a first display screen, 7b production pattern display area, 9c pending icon display area, 9e icon display area, 71a second display screen, 72a third display screen, 7b production pattern display area (production pattern display part), 8 production pattern, 20 first starting hole, 21 second starting hole, 26 third starting hole, 30 first big winning hole, 35 second big winning hole, 41a first special symbol display (first special symbol display section), 41b second special symbol display (second special symbol display section), 63a first production button, 63b second production button, 63c first production button detection switch, 63d second production button detection switch, 63e Key operation detection switch, 67 Speaker, 80 Main control board (main control unit), 81 Game control microcomputer, 90 Sub-control board (sub-control unit), 91 Production control microcomputer, 100 Image control board (image control unit), 101 Image control microcomputer, 103a Third effect pending display, 103b Fourth effect pending display, 106 Audio control board, 107 Lamp control board.

Claims (1)

an input means that allows input by a player;
a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
A performance control means for controlling a performance based on the determination result of the determination means,
The performance control means is
A first setting regarding the performance can be changed in response to a first input to the input means, and a second setting regarding the performance can be changed in response to a second input to the input means,
The condition is that a first period of time has elapsed without any input to the input means after transition from a performance progress state in which a performance progresses based on the determination result of the determination means to a performance non-progress state in which the performance does not proceed. a first control for displaying an input prompting screen related to the second setting and returning the second setting to the initial setting in response to a third input to the input means while the input prompting screen is being displayed;
After the first time has elapsed since transition to the production non-progress state and the display of the input promotion screen is started, input to the input means is performed while the input promotion screen is displayed. the first setting without displaying an input prompting screen related to the first setting when a second time period that is longer than the first time period has elapsed since the transition to the production non-progress state; A gaming machine capable of executing a second control for returning to initial settings.

Images